Volume 3

Career Development Center at the Annex at 5800 City Avenue

SPECIFICATIONS

Volume 3 – Divisions 22-33

Prepared for:

Saint Joseph’s University

January 30, 2015


5800 City Avenue – Career Development Center

Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

TABLE OF CONTENTS – Bid Documents

Division 0 – Bidding, Contract, and Conditions of Contract

Invitation to Bid

000115 List of Drawings

Bid Form – SJU Facilities management Department

Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor (SJU standard modifycations to A101)

General Conditions of the Contract for Construction (SJU standard modifications to

A201)

Supplementary conditions for RACP Compliance

Division 1 – General Requirements

011000 Summary

012500 Substitutions

012500a Substitution Request Form

012600 Contract Modification Procedures

012900 Payment Procedures

013100 Project Management and Coordination

013200 Construction Progress Documents

013300 Submittal Procedures

013300b Electronic Document Agreement

014000 Quality Requirements

014200 References

015000 Temporary Facilities & Controls

016000 Product Requirements

017300 Execution

017329 Cutting & Patching

017416 Site Maintenance

017700 Closeout Procedures

017823 O&M Data

017839 Project Record Documents

017900 Demonstration and Training

017900a Certification of Equipment Demolition

Division 2 – Existing Conditions

024119 Selective Structure Demolition

Division 3 – Concrete

033000 Cast in Place Concrete

Division 4 – Masonry

048110 Structural Unit Masonry

Division 5 – Metals

051200 Structural Steel Framing

0551132 Metal Pan Stairs

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1



Division 6 – Woods

061010 Structural Wood Framing

062013 Exterior Finish Carpentry

062023 Finish Carpentry

Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection

071413 Hot Fluid-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing

072100 Thermal Insulation

072600 Vapor Retarders

075216 Modified Bitumen Membrane Roofing

076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

078413 Penetration Fire Stopping

078446 Fire Resistive Joint Systems

079200 Joint Sealants

Division 8 – Doors and Windows

081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

083323 Overhead Counter Doors

084113 Aluminum Framed Entrance Doors

087110 Door Hardware

088800 Glazing

Division 9 – Finishes

092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing

092900 Gypsum Board

093000 Ceramic Tile

095113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings

096813 Tile Carpeting

099100 Painting

Division 10 – Specialties

102113 Toilet Compartments

102800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories

104413 Fire Protection Specialties

Division 22 – Plumbing

220500 Standard Conditions For Plumbing

220700 Plumbing Insulation And Covering

221112 Piping Systems

221300 Drainage Systems

22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures And Equipment

Division 23 – HVAC

230100 General Provisions

23 05 00 Standard Conditions for HVAC Work

230548 Vibration Isolation

230593 Testing, Balancing, and Adjusting

230700 Insulation and Covering

230903 Building Management System

232113 Piping Systems

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

2



232513 Hot Water Treatment System - Bypass Feeder

233113 Ductwork

233400 Fans and Roof Vents

233700 Air Distribution Devices

235234 Hot Water Sealed Combustion Hi-Eff

238126 Split System Air Conditioning Units

238127 Ductless Split System (Single Zone R410a)

Division 26 – Electrical

260100 General Electrical Provisions

260000 Standard Conditions For Electrical Work

262416 Panelboards

262700 Basic Materials And Equipment

262816 Safety Switches - General Duty

264313 Surge Suppression

265000 Lighting

266000 Service and Distribution

Division 27 – Communications

2710 00 Data Communications Cabling

Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security

283000 Fire Alarm and Detection Systems - Address. Horn

Division 31 – Earthwork

311000 Site Preparation

312000 Earth Moving

312319 Dewatering

312500 Erosion and Sedimentation Controls

Division 32 – Exterior Improvements

321100 Base Courses

321216 Asphalt Paving

321313 Concrete Paving

321613 Concrete Curbs

321723 Pavement Markings

329200 Lawns and Grasses

329300 Exterior Plants

329400 Modular Concrete Retaining Wall

Division 33 – Utilities

332101 Sanitary Sewerage Utilities

334100 Storm Drainage Utility Piping

END OF DOCUMENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

3



BLANK PAGE

Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

TABLE OF CONTENTS 4



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

CONTENTS

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

SECTION TITLE

22 05 00 STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING

22 07 00

22 11 12

PLUMBING INSULATION AND COVERING

PIPING SYSTEMS

22 13 00

22 40 00

23 05 00

23 05 48

DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT

STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR HVAC WORK

VIBRATION ISOLATION

23 05 93

23 07 00

23 09 03

23 21 13

23 25 13

23 31 13

23 34 00

TESTING, BALANCING, AND ADJUSTING

INSULATION AND COVERING

BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PIPING SYSTEMS

HOT WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM - BYPASS FEEDER

DUCTWORK

FANS AND ROOF VENTS

23 37 00

23 52 34

23 81 26

23 81 27

AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES

HOT WATER SEALED COMBUSTION HI-EFF

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM (SINGLE ZONE R410A)

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1

Saint Joseph’s University Project #177901981

5800 City Avenue – Career Development Center Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

SECTION 22 05 00 - STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCE

A. Requirements established within the portions of this project manual titled

Division 1, General Requirements are collectively applicable to the work of this section.

B. Instructions to Bidders, Special Conditions and addenda as issued are part of this specification.

C. Plumbing drawings along with all other project drawings and specifications represent the work of this section.

D. Drawings, Contract, General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions form a part of this section, by reference thereto and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full. Failure to review these sections shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to fully comply with the terms therein.

E. Refer to City of Philadelphia Plumbing Code

1.02 SCOPE

A. Provide labor, material, equipment and supervision necessary to install complete operating plumbing systems as indicated on the drawings and specified herein, including all work at the site and within the proposed construction areas to accomplish the required work.

B. It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to coordinate his work and the work of his subcontractors to insure that all the work is covered. He shall designate who is responsible for various portions of work which may overlap so that there is complete coverage of all required work. It is the position of the owner and the A/E that all work is the responsibility of the mechanical contractor within this division of the work.

C. Contractor shall provide all demolition necessary to remove and replace,

STANDARD PLUMBING 220500 - 1



January 30, 2015 repair, install new or modify existing work whether it be walls, floors, ceilings, structure, mechanical or electrical required to install his work.

Contractor shall replace all work to leave in a finished condition.

D. The plumbing contractor shall remove and/or modify the entire existing plumbing system including fixtures, domestic water piping, soil, waste and vent piping, gas piping, rainwater conductors, hangers, supports and floor drains as required to suite the new floor plans. Pipe, conduit, ductwork and wiring shall be cut back behind wall surfaces, above ceilings, and below floor levels so that a patch can be placed over the opening.

E. All work shown on the drawings and not expressly mentioned in the specifications and all work specified but not shown on the drawings, but necessary for the proper execution of same shall be performed by the contractor. It is not the intent of the drawings and specifications to describe every feature and detail of the work.

F. No additions to the contract amount will be approved for any materials, equipment, or labor to perform additional work unless it can be clearly shown to be beyond the scope and intent of the drawings and specifications.

G. Plumbing contractor's scope of work shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Domestic water system and insulation (See Section 22 11 16, 22 07

00 and 22 40 00).

2. Sanitary and vent system. (See Section 22 13 00)

3. Fuel gas piping.

4.

5.

All other work in Division 22.

Roof penetrations for plumbing work.

6. Demolition of existing work to accommodate new work.

7. Repair existing areas affected by new construction. Patch, repair

8. and finish to match existing.

Fire stopping of penetrations.

1.03 REGULATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS

A. Work shall be performed in accordance with the latest adopted codes, amendments, regulations and ordinances of the authorities having jurisdiction. Observe all safety regulations including the requirements of

OSHA.

B. Obtain and pay for all permits, connection charges, inspections, and certificates required to complete the work.




January 30, 2015

C. Latest editions of any referenced standards shall govern.

D. Contractor shall arrange and pay for all tests and inspections specified herein or required by above agencies and furnish required certificate of inspection to owner.

E. Where the contract documents are more stringent but not in conflict with the applicable codes, the more stringent requirements shall be followed.

1.04 SUBMISSIONS

A. The procedure for submissions of shop drawings shall be as specified in

Division 1, or as a minimum, as indicated below.

B. Furnish submissions of shop drawings and samples of materials and equipment as indicated in these sections, on the drawings, or as directed by the A\E. Submissions will be made in a timely fashion such that adequate time exists to review the drawings, or material, and arrive at the site in accordance with the project schedule.

C. Submissions will not be accepted with work defined as "By Others". Identify contractor by name and with his approval so indicated. Submissions are required prior to purchasing, fabrication, or installation of any material or equipment. Submissions shall be reviewed and certified by the submitting contractor that they are in accordance with the project documents.

D. When requested by the engineer, shop drawings shall be required to be submitted to designated agencies for review and approval prior to submission to the engineer.

E. Contractor shall arrange and pay for all tests and inspections specified herein or required by above agencies and furnish required certificate of inspection to owner.

F. Contractor to forward a copy of submittals which have electrical requirements to the Electrical Contractor (EC) for coordination of voltage, amperage, and phase. Response to be received from EC prior to ordering of equipment by mechanical contractor.

G. Submissions shall include warrantees by the manufacturer for equipment being provided. Submissions for commonly related items such as fixtures, trim, carriers, drains shall be combined in a single brochure with all items being furnished clearly identified.

H. Shop drawings and submittals shall be checked and stamped by the contractor before submitting. They shall conform to measurements made at the site, the contract requirements, and coordinated with all other trades.




I.

January 30, 2015

Specific models in catalog sheets must be identified as well as all options, voltages, phases, etc. identified so as to be clear on what is being provided.

1.05 SITE INSPECTION

A. Visit site, inspect and become aware of all conditions which may affect the work. Investigate utilities, protection requirements for adjacent facilities, storage locations, and access to the construction area.

B. Submission of bid will be deemed evidence of having complied with this request. Contractor may not request additional costs for existing conditions which were evident from inspection of the site.

1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Material and equipment specified shall be deemed as that which the bidders quotation represents the contractor.

B. Once bids are accepted only that material and equipment listed in the specifications or added by addenda shall be acceptable. Substitution information for inclusion in an addenda must be received by the A\E at least 10 days prior to bid opening. If acceptable, an addenda will be issued which will add the additional acceptable manufacturers or materials and be available for all contractors to consider. It shall be a basic premise that a contractor is a lowest bidder because he utilized substituted materials or equipment as opposed to specified materials or equipment.

C. If the contractor submits alternate equipment, manufacturers, systems, methods, or materials, not specifically identified in the specifications, additional review and investigation time may be required by the engineer.

If the engineer determines additional review time is required because of the substitution then this will be a billable service by the engineer at the rate of

$150.00/hr. for such services. Also billable will be any redesign time and revisions to drawings should they be necessary for incorporation into the work. Services will be billable to the contractor making such substitutions and will be payable prior to approval or rejection.

1.07 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and necessary field coordination and adjustment must be provided by the contractor prior to installation. Such deviations to the work to allow for coordination shall be




January 30, 2015 kept to a minimum and any such deviations shall be at no extra cost.

B. When a conflict or contradiction exists either between drawings and specs or between specs or between different drawings or details, the more stringent shall apply.

C. Drawings and specifications are intended to be taken as a whole and each is to supplement the other. It is not intended that all work must be both shown on drawings and specified in the specifications.

D. An item shown on the drawings and not indicated in the specifications is to be understood to be required for the project. An item specified and not shown on the drawings is to be understood to be required for the project.

E. The architects or engineers interpretation of the documents shall be binding upon the contractor. If a question arises, the contractor shall ask for an interpretation prior to bidding and an answer shall be issued as an addendum to all bidders.

F. If a question arises after bidding the A/E interpretation shall govern.

1.08 MEASUREMENTS

A. Before ordering materials or commencing with any work, the contractor shall verify all measurements at the building. Coordination of equipment, materials, spaces, and dimensions are the responsibility of the contractor.

1.09 PROGRESS SCHEDULE

A. Provide a project schedule which shall show start, sequence of each type of work, milestone schedule, and completion of each type of work, with overall completion date.

1.10 COST SCHEDULE

A. Provide a detailed cost breakdown indicating labor and material amounts for various types of work.

B. AIA forms are required for this submission.

1.11 COMPLETION

A. The contractor shall deliver to the owner, with his request for final payment, copies of all manufacturer's guarantees, equipment instructional manuals, a complete set of all final shop drawings, catalog cuts, service




January 30, 2015 contracts, and other items as may be required elsewhere in the documents.

1.12 OFFICE

A. The contractor shall set up his job office (desk) where directed by the owner.

1.13 STORAGE

A. Material shall be stored only where directed by the owner.

1.14 SANITARY

A. The contractor will at his own expense, provide and maintain in a sanitary condition, a portable chemical toilet.

B. Toilet will be located where directed by the owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All material shall be new and of present day manufacture.

B. All material and equipment shall be in conformance with accepted trade standards.

C. Whenever equipment or material is referred to in the singular, such as "the fan", it shall be deemed to apply to as many such items as may be necessary to complete the installation.

D. The word “provide” means “furnish and install complete, tested, and adjusted as necessary with all accessories, covers, escutcheons”. The word “piping” means pipe, fitting, controls, valves and hangers as required for a complete system.

2.02 MOTORS

A. Incorporate latest IEEE and NEMA standards.

B. All copper windings with ball bearings.




January 30, 2015

C. Indoors; drip proof, 40 degree C rise.

D. Outdoors; totally enclosed 55 degree C rise.

E. Motors over 10 HP to be high efficiency with PF in excess of 0.9.

2.03 MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTACTORS

A. Fractional with horsepower up to ½ HP; electrical contract.

B. Polyphase and single phase above ½ HP: this contract.

C. Electrical contractor shall install all starters except for those provided as an integral part of equipment.

D. Polyphase starters shall be magnetic combination type, across-the-line electrically operated, electrically held, three pole assemblies, with arc extinguishing characteristics, silver to silver renewable contacts, 3 pole thermal bi-metallic, red run pilot light, individual phase protection, with overload heaters matched to motors installed and with 4 auxiliary contact,

Hand-off-Auto switch, and control transformer.

E. For single phase motors above ½ HP provide magnetic combination single phase motor starters with overloads, non-fusible disconnect switch, red run pilot light, integral 120 volt control transformer with dual primary fusing auxiliary contacts.

F. Starters shall be as manufactured by G. E., Siemens, Square "D" or

Cutler-Hammer.

2.04 EQUIPMENT START UP

A. Verify that equipment is operating within warranty requirements.

B. Advise owner and A/E at least two days prior.

C. Verify proper operation. Obtain signed statement by manufacturer or his representative that equipment is operating within warranty requirements.

Submit statement to A/E.

2.05 LUBRICATION

A. Lubricate all equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Lubricate prior to start up.

C. Provide one year’s supply of lubricants to the owner.

2.06 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS




January 30, 2015

A. Properly and fully instruct owner’s personnel in the operation and maintenance of all systems and equipment.

B. Insure that the owner's personnel are familiar with all operations to carry on required activities.

C. Such instruction shall be for each item of equipment and each system as a whole.

D. Manual shall include all instructions on operation, maintenance, repair parts list, lubrication requirements, brochures, catalogue cuts, wiring diagrams, control sequences, service requirements, piping diagrams, names and addresses of vendors, suppliers and emergency contacts. Three manuals shall be provided.

E. Provide to the owner any special tools necessary to operate any of the equipment.

2.07 DRAIN PANS

A. All water heaters mounted above the floor shall be provided with drain pans. Drain to suitable discharge point acceptable to owner and A/E. To be visible outfall.

B. Drains shall slope down in direction of flow at 1" per 10 feet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PROTECTION

A. Plug or cap open ends of piping systems and conduit.

B. Stored materials shall be covered to prevent damage by inclement weather, sun, dust, or moisture.

C. Protect all installed work until accepted in place by the owner. Cover plumbing fixtures.

D. Do not install plates, polished metal escutcheons, and other finished devices until masonry, tile, and painting operations are complete or protect otherwise.

E. Protect all existing or new work from operations which may cause damage such as hauling, welding, soldering, painting, insulating, and covering.




January 30, 2015

3.02 WORKMANSHIP

A. Install all work neat, trim, and plumb with building lines.

B. Install work in spaces allocated.

C. Cutting and patching shall be performed by skilled tradesmen normally employed for the work involved.

3.03 EXCAVATION, SHORING, PUMPING, BACKFILLING

A. Perform all excavation required to install the work. Deposit excavated material so as not to create a slide hazard.

B. No work shall be placed on rock. Cushion with 6 " layer of crushed stone.

C. Protect tree roots with burlap covering and maintain moist until backfilled.

D. Base estimates on excavation which will include earth, sand, clay, rubbish, debris, and all other materials up to one cubic yard in size. Boulders or rock larger than one cubic yard which need to be broken up with pneumatic equipment or explosives will be separately negotiated at the time of discovery with the owner and A/E. Do not proceed with rock excavation until an agreement is reached.

E. Maintain excavations free of water.

F. Shore excavations to prevent cave-in in accordance with OSHA regulations and to prevent strains on work put in place until ready to receive backfill.

G. Backfill with clean material and pneumatically tamp in 8" layers. Remove excess material, including rock, from site or as directed by the A/E.

H. Backfill piping trenches within 18" of footings, columns, piers, or grade beams, with concrete. Protect piping from direct contact and adherence to

I. concrete.

Return to original condition any areas disturbed for excavation.

3.04 FASTENERS, HANGERS, AND SUPPORTS

A. Furnish and install all hangers and supports required to suspend, mount, or hang the work.

B. Furnish and install all miscellaneous steel angles, channels, beams, clips, brackets, and anchors to hang or support the work. Provide submissions for review.

C. Install concrete inserts before concrete is poured.

D. Drilled inserts shall not be loaded to more than 1/4 rated capacity with a minimum of 200 lbs.




January 30, 2015

E. Powder driven fasteners shall not be allowed for piping larger than 2", or for equipment. When used they shall not be loaded more than 1/8 rated capacity with a minimum of 200 lbs.

F. All hangers, miscellaneous steel, braces, and supports shall be galvanized, cadmium plated, or painted with corrosion resistant primer and finish coat of epoxy enamel.

G. Piping shall be supported from adjustable clevis type hangers with insulation pipe saddles at not more than 8 foot centers up to 1 1/4" dia. and 10 foot centers above 1 1/4" dia. Piping shall not support other piping.

H. Support vertical piping at floor levels. Piping shall have split rings.

I. Provide and install lintels where required for mechanical work and not indicated on architectural or structural drawings.

J. Furnish steel framing for roof openings and floor openings. Submit details for review.

3.05 SLEEVES

A. All piping passing through floors or walls shall have sleeves unless holes are cored. Sleeves shall be 16 gage galvanized steel in non-bearing walls,

10 gage galvanized steel for bearing walls, and schedule 40 galvanized pipe in floors. Sleeves shall accommodate insulation. This shall not apply to sprinkler piping.

B. Sleeves passing through foundation walls not exposed to interior spaces or sleeves passing through slab on grade may be schedule 40 PVC.

C. Wall sleeves shall finish flush with wall.

D. Floor sleeves shall extend 1 inch above floor.

E. Sleeves in walls between interior spaces and unexcavated, exterior, crawl, or backfilled spaces shall be made watertight with "Link-Seal" modular wall and casing seal. Casing shall be schedule 40 galvanized pipe with anchor flange.

3.06 PLATES

A. Furnish and install chrome plated plates wherever piping passes into finished areas.

B. Plates shall be securely fastened to piping or building construction.

C. Floor plates shall cover one inch floor extension.




January 30, 2015

3.07 OFFSETS, TRANSITIONS, MODIFICATIONS

A. Furnish and install all offsets necessary to install the work and to provide clearance for the other trades.

B. Maintain adequate headroom and clearance as directed by the A/E.

C. Ductwork transitions necessary to accommodate available space or clearance requirements shall be contract requirements.

D. Incidental modifications necessary to the installation of the systems shall be made as necessary and at the direction of the A/E.

E. Rises and drops of piping systems shall be provided as required and where directed to allow for clearances to other construction. Drains shall be installed at no additional cost to the owner. The contractor shall allow for such occurrences in his bid.

F. Piping and equipment shall be so arranged as to not pass in front of windows, doors, access panels, access doors, coil removal or filter removal space or service clearance areas. Do not install within 3'-0" clearance of electrical panel fronts.

3.08 RECESSES

A. Furnish information to the general contractor as to sizes and locations of recesses required to install panels, boxes, grilles, and other equipment or devices which are to be recessed into walls.

B. Make offsets or modifications as required to suit final locations.

3.09 EQUIPMENT SETTING

A. Furnish and install as a minimum, a 4" thick concrete pad beneath all floor mounted equipment in mechanical rooms, boiler rooms, or equipment rooms, or outside on grade.. This shall not apply to residential installations of water heaters and air handling units or furnaces unless detailed on drawings or specified elsewhere.

B. Furnish and install as a minimum, spring vibration isolators under any equipment 5 HP and over and rubber-in-shear vibration isolation under all equipment less than 5 HP. This shall apply to residential installations.

C. Reinforce concrete with No. 4 rods 12" on centers both ways.

D. Pad to have 3/4" dowels into concrete at 1 per 4 square feet.

3.10 LABELING




January 30, 2015

A. All equipment shall be provided with permanent black laminated white core labels with 3/8" letters.

3.11 FLASHING AND COUNTER-FLASHING

A. Roof drains and overflow drains shall have counter-flashing fittings.

General contractor shall provide flashing.

B. Piping and conduit through the roof shall be flashed by the General

Contractor. This contractor shall furnish counter-flashing.

3.12 ACCESS

A. Locate all equipment, valves, devices and controllers which may need service in accessible places.

B. Where access is not available, access panels shall be provided. Furnish prime painted steel access doors to the General Contractor for installation.

C. Access doors shall be 16 gauge frames and 22 gauge steel door. Access doors in fire rated walls shall have a "B" label for 1 ½ hours.

D. Maintain clearances for tube removal, coil pulls, and filter removal.

3.13 WIRING

A. Power wiring shall be provided by the Division 21 Electrical Contractor.

This contractor shall furnish all 3 phase starters, pushbuttons, and controllers necessary to operate the equipment. The Electrical Contractor shall store and install the electrical devices and furnish and install the power wiring.

B. Control wiring shall be furnished and installed under Division 23 portion of the work. Wiring for controls is control wiring whether it is line voltage or low voltage.

C. All wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC.

D. Pushbuttons shall be maintain-contact type.

E. Refer to the electrical specifications for wiring methods.

F. Plenum rated cable is required for control wiring.

3.14 UTILITIES

A. Do not interrupt any utility or service without adequate previous notice and




January 30, 2015 scheduling with the owner.

B. Refer to Division 1 for requirements for providing temporary utilities.

3.15 CUTTING AND PATCHING EXTERIOR SERVICES

A. This contractor shall be responsible for returning disturbed areas to original condition where excavation for utilities has been required.

B. Cut and patch paved areas to match original surfaces.

C. Properly tamp backfill before finishing surfaces.

D. Concrete pavements and curbs shall be formed and poured to match adjacent areas.

E. Grass areas shall be sodded and maintained until established growth is achieved.

3.16 GUARANTEE

A. All work shall be guaranteed to be free from defects for a period of one year of operation from date of acceptance by the owner unless otherwise specified. Material and labor for first year warranty is to be provided.

B. Guarantee shall be extended for all non-operational periods due to failure within the guarantee period.

C. Compressor system components shall be provided with a 5 year factory warranty. Material only for years 2 through 5 is required.

3.17 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver material and equipment in manufacturer’s original cartons or on skids.

B. Store material in dry enclosures or under protective coverings out of way of work progress.

C. Handle so as to prevent damage to product or any surrounding material.

3.18 MANUFACTURERS’ NAMES

A. Manufacturers’ names are included herein to establish those suppliers who may provide products for this project subject to the requirements of the specifications. Although a manufacturer’s name may appear as an acceptable supplier it is not understood that a standard product is acceptable. Products must also meet the technical, performance, and




January 30, 2015 physical requirements of the project as well as being named in the specification. Any deviations from this must be acknowledged at bid time by the supplier and he shall be solely responsible for any and all costs associated with the application of his product in the project.

B. A design cannot be prepared which accommodates the installation of all suppliers and is not intended to do so. If certain modifications must be made to accommodate one particular suppliers equipment it shall be considered the contractors responsibility to arrange for such accommodations and be financially responsible for same.

3.19 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS/CAD DISK

A. At the completion of the work the contractor shall furnish a reproducible as-built drawings and CAD Disk to the A/E for approval. The drawings shall indicate all work installed and its actual size and location. If acceptable, the

A/E will submit the as-built drawings to the owner as record drawings. If not acceptable, the A/E will return the drawing to the contractor to make corrections as required. The contractor will resubmit for approval.

B. The as-built drawings shall indicate measured dimensions of underground lines and other concealed work.

3.20 PENETRATION SEALING

A. All penetrations of fire walls, smoke walls, and floors by pipes or wiring shall be sealed to prevent the flow of gasses or smoke.

B. The sealant shall be foamed in place between the penetrant and the adjacent floor or wall with DOW Corning RTV foam or equivalent by 3M,

Hilti, or Chase foam.

C. The installation shall meet the approval of the authority having jurisdiction.

D. Penetrations through rated surfaces shall have a UL rating equivalent to the adjacent surfaces.

3.21 CUTTING AND PATCHING INTERIOR SURFACES

A. Respective contractor shall install all hangers, supports, pipe sleeves in floors, walls, partitions, ceilings and roof slabs as construction progresses to permit their work to be built into place and to eliminate unnecessary cutting of construction work.




January 30, 2015

B. All cutting of concrete, or other material for the passage of piping through floors, walls, partitions and ceiling shall be done by the respective contractor where necessary to install his work. Respective contractor will close all such openings around piping with materials equivalent to that removed. All exposed surfaces shall be left in suitable condition for refinishing without further work.

C. Contractor shall patch and repair any existing openings created by the demolition work in floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings not being reused for the new construction.

3.22 INVERTS AND ELEVATIONS

A. Indicated inverts and elevations of existing utilities are approximate and based on the best information available.

B. Upon of award of contract, contractor shall verify in the field all such information and report any discrepancies before proceeding with work.

Contractor shall be responsible for extra work caused by his failure to verify inverts and elevations.

3.23 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS

A. Furnish and install final connections to equipment furnished in other parts of the specification or furnished by the owner. Provide drainage connections, vent connections, water connections, fuel gas connections, gas connections to the fixtures or equipment. Plumbing connections shall include valved supplies and trapped waste connections.

3.24 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. The contractor shall be responsible for connecting new systems to existing systems.

B. Arrange for outages with the owner.

C. Contractor shall shut down and drain existing systems.

D. Contractor shall cut in, weld, solder, or thread, and make connections compatible with existing systems.

E. Provide new valves at connections to existing systems.

F. Contractor shall refill existing and fill new systems.

G. Contractor shall purge air from systems, both new and existing.

H. Contractor shall place existing systems back into operation.




I.

January 30, 2015

Contractor shall repair and replace any insulation damaged or removed during connection procedures.

3.25 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Provide 3/8" = 1'-0" scale drawings showing all coordinated ductwork, piping, conduit, and equipment of all trades.

B. The sheet metal shop drawings may be used as the basis of these drawings.

C. Show ductwork, walls, beams, steel, drainage piping, domestic water piping, HVAC piping, sprinkler piping, light fixtures, electrical conduit and equipment.

D. Contact other disciplines and obtain information to identify fully coordinated systems.

E. Submit for review and approval to the A/E.

F. Provide all dimensional data and necessary clearances to other trades for installation of fixtures and equipment within casework and counter tops.

G. Work shall not proceed until coordination is completed and all conflicts, issues, sequences etc...are resolved.

3.26 WELDING

A. All electric power for arc welding shall be supplied by the contractor performing the work.

3.27 VEHICLES

A. Vehicle access to the site will be as directed by the owner.

3.28 RUBBISH DISPOSAL

A. Burning of debris on the site shall not be permitted. All debris, refuse, and waste shall be removed from the premises at regular intervals. No accumulation shall be permitted.

3.29 PROTECTION

A. Maintain all public walks and access ways.

B. Erect and maintain barricades, warning signs, and other protective means




January 30, 2015 as may be directed by the owner for protection of all persons and property from injury or damage.

3.30 SCAFFOLDING

A. The contractor shall at his own expense, install, operate, protect, and maintain temporary services such as scaffolding, material hoists, access walks, etc., as may be required.

3.31 UTILITIES

A. The contractor may use the existing water and electric power for temporary construction needs.

B. The owner will direct where these services may be tapped.

C. Those services that are used during construction, but are to remain, shall be refurbished to as new condition before turning back to the owner.

3.32 CLEANUP

A. Remove all visible temporary tags or labels as well as any protective coverings and wrappings from fixtures and equipment.

B. Remove all spots, stains, soil, paint, spackle, and other foreign matter from all finished work.

C. Clean and polish all plumbing fixtures.

D. Remove all trash and debris from the premises.

3.33 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. Contractor to coordinate all mounting heights with all trades and architect prior to rough-in.

3.34 WORK COMPLETION

A. The contractor shall promptly correct work rejected by the engineer failing to conform to the requirements of the contract documents, whether discovered before or after substantial completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the engineer’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the




January 30, 2015 contractor’s expense.

3.35 SHOP DRAWING REQUIREMENTS

A. The following is a list of required shop drawings for the project. Not all items may be identified and it is the responsibility of the contractor to submit additional shop drawings where indicated in the specifications.

PLUMBING DATE

REC’D

ACTION DATE

REC’D

ACTION

COORDINATION DRAWINGS

VALVES, STRAINERS

BACKFLOW PREVENTORS

MIXING VALVES

PIPING/FITTINGS/LABELING

DRAINS

FIXTURES/TRIM/CARRIERS

INSULATION

A. HANDICAP COVERS

B. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

C. TANKS

D. EQUIPMENT

STORAGE TANKS

WATER HEATERS (ELECTRIC)

HOT WATER RETURN PUMPS

AS-BUILT DRAWINGS/CAD DISK

WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES

OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE

MANUALS




PLUMBING

INSTRUCTIONS

TESTS/CERTIFICATIONS

EMERGENCY AND MANUFACTURER

CONTACTS

DATE

REC’D

END OF SECTION

ACTION DATE

REC’D

Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

ACTION




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

SECTION 22 07 00 - PLUMBING INSULATION AND COVERING


1.01 REFERENCE

A. Refer to Section 22 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section.

B. Refer to IBC Building Codes, City of Philadelphia Plumbing Code, and

ASHRAE 90.1-2004.

1.02 SCOPE

A. The work included in this specification consists of furnishing all labor, materials, accessories, and equipment necessary for the insulation of all plumbing; piping and plumbing equipment. Said work shall be completed in strict accordance with the insulation section of the specifications and applicable drawings.

B. All work is subject to the terms and conditions of the contract.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings which indicate complete material data, a list of materials proposed, and indicate thickness and density of material for individual services.

B. Submit fabrication instructions for pipe fitting and valve insulation.

C. Submit manufacturers joining recommendations for butt joints and longitudinal seams.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Install insulation in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Insulation shall be installed by skilled workmen regularly engaged in insulation work.

C. Protect insulation and covering until accepted in place by the owner.

PLUMBING INSULATION AND COVERING 220700 - 1



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015


2.01 HOT WATER PIPING

A. Includes;

1. Domestic Hot Water Supply

2. Domestic Hot Water Return

B. Material; Fiberglass bonded with resins to form circular pipe sleeves and pipe covering segments with factory applied all service jacket.

C. Fire Safety; U.L. listing flame spread rating of 25 and smoke developed rating of 50.

D. Thermal conductivity of 0.276 at 90 degrees F.

E. Thickness per ASHRAE STD. 90.1-2010:

Piping System Types: PIPE SIZES / INSULATION THICKNESS

Temp Up to 1" Up to 1.5" Up to 4" Up to 8" 8" & Up

1. Hot Water a) Domestic

HW/HWR

100-130 1" 1" 1.5" 1.5" 1.5"

F. Joints; Pressure sealing lap strips for longitudinal joints and minimum 3" pressure sealing butt strips for circumferential joints.

G. Valves and Fittings; Fiberglass insulation of same thickness as pipe with pre-molded fitting covers.

H. Contractor shall insulate all exposed domestic water and drainage piping under all handicapped lavatories and sinks with pre-formed insulation kit

I. with PVC jacket similar to Lav, Guard as manufactured by Truebro. There shall be no sharp or abrasive surfaces under the handicapped lavatories.

Manufacturer: Johns-Manville Micro-Lok, Knauf Lo Smoke PVC.

2.02 COLD WATER PIPING

A. Includes;




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

1. Domestic Cold Water: 1/2" insulation

2. Horizontal Storm Water, both normal and overflow, and underside of

Roof Drains: 1" insulation

3. Fan/coil condensate drains: 1/2" insulation

4.

5.

6.

PVC vent piping in plenum ceilings: 1" insulation

PVC drainage piping in plenum ceilings: 1" insulation

All PVC storm water, both normal and overflow, and underside of roof drains in plenum ceilings: 1" insulation

B. Material; Fiberglass bonded with resins to form circular pipe sleeves with factory applied jacket of kraft paper bonded to aluminum foil, reinforced with fiberglass yarn. Vapor barrier.

C. Fire safety; Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke density rating of

50 or less and a fuel contributed rating of 50 as tested by ASTM E 84-75.

D. Thermal Conductivity; 0.25 at 100 degrees.

E. Joints; Pressure sealing lap strips for longitudinal joints and 3 inch wide wrapping strips for butt joints. Strips shall be sealed with an adhesive meeting NFPA 90 25-50 code such as:

1.

2.

CMC17-465

H. B. Fuller Co., Foster Products Division 85-20

As an option the contractor may utilize pressure sensitive butt strips.

F. Valves and Fittings; Fiberglass insulation of same thickness as pipe with pre-molded fitting covers. Seal edges of fitting cover with vapor barrier mastic adhesive or vapor barrier strip tape which shall overlap the insulation and fitting cover by 2 inches.

G. Manufacturer: Johns-Manville Micro-Lok, Knauf Proto Lo Smoke PVC.

2.03 EXPOSED PIPING

A. All piping exposed shall be insulated per specifications and covered by a

PVC jacket - 25 mil thick, color is to be 2550 white, washable and approved by the USDA & FDA.

B. Manufacturer: Johns-Manville - Zeston 2000, Knauf.

2.04 MANUFACTURERS

A. Johns-Manville, Certain Teed, Owens/Corning, Knauf, Armstrong.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install until all piping systems are tested.

B. Do not install until the building is closed in.

C. Perform work at ambient and equipment temperatures as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer.

D. Work in the area which may damage the insulation shall have been completed prior to the start of insulating. The owner shall not be responsible for subsequent charges arising out of damage to insulation caused by work progressing in the area after insulation has been installed.

E. All insulation shall be continuous through wall, ceilings and floor openings except where fire safe materials are required.

F. Insulation on all cold surfaces must be applied with a continuous unbroken vapor seal. Hangers, supports, anchors, etc. that are secured directly to cold surfaces shall be adequately insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation.

G. Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports, and other protrusions.

H. Secure with tacks or tape as required.

I. Install inserts on all hangers. Inserts between the pipe and pipe hanger shall consist of rigid pipe insulation of thickness equal to the adjoining insulation and shall be provided with vapor barrier where required. Insert length shall be 10" long for pipes up to and including 2-1/2" and 12" for pipes over 2-1/2".

J. Pipe insulation shall have metal shields. The shields shall be installed between hanger support and the pipe insulation. Shield shall be formed to fit the insulation and shall extend up to the center line of the pipe. Shield shall be 10" long for pipes up to and including 2-1/2" and 12" for pipes over

2-1/2"

K. Repair separation of joints or cracking of insulation due to thermal movement or poor workmanship.

L. All insulation shall be secured at sufficient intervals to prevent sagging, gaps, or spaces from occurring. Any repairs necessary for 1 year due to improper installation shall be provided by Contractor at no cost to Owner.

M. Contractor shall insulate all exposed domestic water and drainage piping under all handicapped sinks with pre-formed insulation kit with PVC jacket similar to, Lav-Guard as manufactured by Truebro. There shall be no




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 sharp or abrasive surfaces under the handicapped lavatories.

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Pipe and equipment shall be clean, oil free, and dry prior to the application of insulation.

END OF SECTION




January 30, 2015

SECTION 22 11 12 – PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS


1.01 REFERENCE

A. Refer to section 15000 for requirements which are applicable to this section.

B. Refer to City of Philadelphia Plumbing Code.

C. Refer to ASHRAE handbooks.

D. Where the contract documents are more stringent but not in conflict with the applicable codes, the more stringent requirement shall be followed.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to install a complete operating domestic water system with all devices, appurtenances and accessories to complete the work.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings of all items specified in this section.


A. Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's warranty requirements.

B. Install systems and equipment in accordance with the City of Philadelphia

Plumbing Code.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF/ANSI 61-G and/or NSF/ANSI 372 for valve materials for potable water service. Valves for domestic water must be third party certified.

PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS 221112 - 1



January 30, 2015

1.05 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Type K copper tubing;

Underground domestic CW

B. Type L Copper tubing;

Interior above ground domestic CW, HW, & HWR


2.01 STEEL PIPE - SCHEDULE 40.

A. ASTM A53, Seamless.

B. Fittings; 125 lb cast iron screwed ANSI B16.4 up to 2 1/2 inch. Above 2

1/2 inch shall be flanged, weld neck, 150 lb ANSI B16.5 cast steel.

2.02 STEEL PIPE - GALVANIZED SCHEDULE 40

A. ASTM A53, Seamless galvanized.

B. Fittings; 125 lb galvanized cast iron screwed ANSI B16.4 up to 2 inch.

Above 2 inch shall be flanged, weld neck, 150 lb ANSI B16.5 galvanized cast steel.

2.03. COPPER TUBING

A. Above ground hard drawn seamless type "L" ASTM B-88.

B. Below ground hard drawn seamless type "K" ASTM B-88.

C. Fittings; solder joint, wrought copper, ANSI B-16.22

2.04 VALVES - GENERAL

A. Gate and globe valves shall be repackable under pressure, with gland follower. The temperature/pressure rating shall not be less than the design criteria applicable to the system.

B. Manufacturer; Crane, Nibco, Jamesbury, Apollo, Milwaukee, Grinnell and

Hammond.




January 30, 2015

2.05 GATE VALVES UP TO 2 1/2 INCH - SOLDER END

A. Solid wedge, inside screw, traveling stem, screw-in bonnet.

B. Lead free valves shall be manufactured in accordance with MSS SP-110 and constructed of de-zincification-resistant (DZR) bronze bodies and end pieces and shall be made from a high quality lead free performance bronze alloy per ASTM B584 Alloy C87850. No brass containing more than 15% zinc shall be approved.

C. 200 lb non-shock WOG.

D. All bronze ASTM B62.

E. Application; copper piping systems.

2.06 GATE VALVES OVER 2 1/2 INCH - BRONZE

A. Solid wedge, renewable bronze seat rings, outside screw and yoke, rising stem, bolted bone, flanged.


C. 125 lb saturated steam, 200 lb non-shock WOG.

D. All bronze ASTM B62.


2.07 GLOBE VALVES UP TO 2 1/2 INCH - SOLDER END

A. Renewable composition disc, screw-in bonnet, rising stem.

B. 300 lb non-shock cold water.

C. All bronze ASTM B62.

D. Application; copper piping systems.

2.08 BALL VALVES UP TO 2 1/2 INCH

A. All bronze, threaded.

B. Lead free valves shall be manufactured in accordance with MSS SP-110 and constructed of de-zincification-resistant (DZR) bronze bodies and end pieces and shall be made from a high quality lead free performance bronze




January 30, 2015 alloy per ASTM B584 Alloy C87850. No brass containing more than 15% zinc shall be approved.

C. 150 lb saturated steam, 600 lb non-shock WOG.

D. Teflon seats, packing and gasket, stainless steel ball.

E. Application; Steel or copper piping systems.

2.09 SWING CHECK VALVES UP TO 3 INCH - SOLDER END

A. Regrinding bronze disc.


C. 300 lb non-shock WOG.

D. All bronze, ASTM B62.


2.10 SWING CHECK VALVES OVER 3 INCH - ALL BRONZE

A. Renewable bronze seat ring and composition disc, bolted cover, flanged.


C. All bronze, ASTM B62.

D. 175 lb non-shock cold water.


2.11 STRAINERS

A. Self-cleaning "Y" type screwed end up to 2 inch with machined seats and blow-off outlet, stainless steel screen. All bronze, 150 lb steam 300 lb non-shock WOG, for steel or copper piping systems.

B. Lead free valves shall be manufactured in accordance with MSS SP-110 and constructed of de-zincification-resistant (DZR) bronze bodies and end pieces and shall be made from a high quality lead free performance bronze alloy per ASTM B584 Alloy C87850. No brass containing more than 15%




January 30, 2015 zinc shall be approved.

C. Self-cleaning "Y" type flanged 2 1/2 inch and up with bolted cover flange, blow-off outlet, 125 lb ANSI, brass screen, iron body, for steel piping systems.

D. Self-cleaning "Y" type flanged 2 1/2 inch and up with bolted cover flange, blow-off outlet, brass screen. All bronze construction ASTM B-62 150 lb steam 225 lb non-shock WOG, for copper piping systems.

E. Perforations; .033" pipe size to 2 inch, .057" pipe size 2 1/2 to 4 inch, 1/8

" pipe size 6 inch and up.

F. Manufacturers; Muesco, Sarco, Hoffman, Metraflex, Mueller, or prior approved equal.

2.12 THERMOMETERS

A. Separable socket, inserted into fluid flow, adjustable, hermetically sealed, red mercury, die cast case, baked enamel finish, double strength glass lens, white scale and black graduations.

B. Manufacturer; U.S.Gauge, H.O. Trerice, Moeller, Duro, Ernst.

2.13 GAUGES

A. Phosphor bronze bourdon tube, polypropylene case, gasketed glass crystal, aluminum dial, black graduations, 4 1/2 inch diameter.

B. Installed with bronze gauge cock.

C. Manufacturer; Danton, U.S. Gauge, H.O. Trerice, Moeller.

2.14 TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE PLUGS

A. Furnish and install on the inlet and outlet of all heat exchange devices and terminal equipment, a temperature and pressure insertion device fitting.

B. Provide temperature and pressure reading instrument to owner at completion of the work.

2.15 ISOLATION FITTINGS

A. Insulated dielectric unions to prevent the flow of electric between adjacent sections of piping. Unions shall have the same pressure and temperature ratings of the installed systems.

B. Fittings shall be screwed union type up to 2 inch and flanged type above 2




January 30, 2015 inch. Flanged type shall have isolating gaskets and isolated bolt holes.

C. Manufacturer; Epco Sales Inc., Central Plastics.

2.16 UNIONS

A. All equipment, control valves, and coils shall be provided with union connections up to 2 1/2 inch and flanged connections above 2 1/2 inch.

B. Unions and flanges shall have pressure and temperature ratings equivalent to the fittings in the adjacent piping system. Screwed unions shall be bronze to bronze seat.

2.17 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Flexible connectors shall be provided on the suction and discharge of all base mounted pumps and wherever else indicated on the drawings.

B. Connectors shall be braided hose or reinforced rubber as manufactured by

R.K.L. Control Inc., Anaconda, Flexonics, or Mason Industries.

2.18 PIPE SADDLES

A. Pipe saddles shall be welded to all steel pipe 2 1/2 inches or larger for support of the pipe at hanger locations where the piping conveys hot fluids or steam.

B. The saddles shall be packed with insulation of the same material used for adjacent pipe insulation.

2.19 PIPE ANCHORS AND GUIDES

A. Anchors for retarding and constraining pipe movement shall be installed to maintain the piping in the proper position. Pipe anchors shall be a rigid constraint between the pipe and the building structural system.

B. Where the piping is constrained to move in a designated direction furnish and install pipe alignment guides to control the movement of the pipe. The guides shall be fastened to the building structural system. Guides shall be commercially manufactured by J.J. McNally, Flexonics, or Tube Turns.

C. Two sets of guides shall be installed on each side of an expansion joint.

2.20 SUPPORTS




January 30, 2015

A. Piping shall be supported from structure at intervals not exceeding:

PIPE SIZE

Up to 1"

1 ½"

2"

2 ½"

3"

4"

INTERVAL

COPPER

6'

6'

10'

10'

10'

10'

6"

8"

Other piping to be supported per manufacturer.

B. Hangers shall be copper or copper plated for copper piping, galvanized or corrosion resistant for steel and PVC piping.

C. Provide insulation saddles for insulated piping.

D. Piping supports shall be clevis type hangers.

E. Piping which is 2 1/2" in diameter or larger and has hangers longer than

12" in length shall be seismic braced. Bracing shall be with angle iron stiffeners at 45° angles attached to the structural support and the clevis hanger. See detail on drawings. Bracing shall be at spacing dimensions given above.

2.21 SCREWED PIPE FITTINGS

A. Pipe joints made on screwed pipe shall be sealed with Teflon ribbon wrapped on the threads before assembly.

B. Usage shall be in conformance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

2.22 AIR ELIMINATION VALVE

A. Continuous elimination of air, float activated, remote pressure operated, cast iron and steel, bronze fitted, 125 PSI working pressure.

B. Manufacturer: Amtrol, Armstrong, TACO, B&G, The John Wood Company.

2.23 RELIEF VALVES

A. Furnish and install an ASME pressure relief valve on each closed circuit water circulating system capable of relieving the full heat generating capacity of the system.




January 30, 2015


3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS

A. All piping shall be arranged to drain to a drainable low point. The low point shall be provided with a drain valve at least 1/2 inch and a hose end thread as a minimum. Extensions to floor drains may be required elsewhere in which case the drain line shall gradually slope to the drain and terminate at the drain with a 90 degree elbow.

B. Air vents shall be placed at the high points of all portions of systems which may trap air. This shall apply to piping, equipment, coils, exchangers or any other place that air may collect. At these points install automatic air vents which shall automatically vent the air from the system.

C. Piping shall run square with building lines.

D. Piping shall not be insulated until it is pressure and leak tested and until the building is closed in.

E. Necessary drains, offsets, rises, vents, and drips shall be provided for as part of the contracted work. Where any such rise or drip is necessary the contractor shall install same as part of the work and as directed by the engineer. The drawings are diagrammatic in nature and due to the small scale it is not possible to show all necessary drains, vents, offsets and rises which may be required to properly execute the work and such items shall be provided as needed.

F. Running or close nipples are not allowed.

G. Piping shall not be installed over electrical panels, equipment, transformers, motor control centers, switch, gear, or substations. If absolutely necessary piping may be sleeved to prevent water from falling on electrical gear provided the installation is acceptable to the electrical inspectors.

H. Allow clearances for expansion and contraction. Provide swing ells at connection points so as not to strain piping systems.

I. Exposed insulated risers shall be covered with 22 gauge galvanized steel sleeves from floor to ceiling.

J. All piping shall be installed on the interior conditioned side of the building insulation.

K. Utilize eccentric reducers on steam and water piping systems with tops




January 30, 2015 level for water systems and bottoms level for steam systems.

L. Furnish and install dielectric pipe couplings between sections of ferrous and nonferrous piping systems and between copper or brass equipment and ferrous piping systems.

M. Piping shall be supported from adjustable clevis type hangers at distances specified in Section 15000. Provide sway bracing to prevent horizontal movement of pipe.

3.02 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide stencils or snap-on labels to identify all piping systems.

B. Labels shall indicate the service of the pipe and the direction of flow.

C. Labels shall be required where piping enters and leaves mechanical rooms, at inlets and outlets of equipment, at 25 foot intervals where exposed.

3.03 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. All valves shall be identified except fixture stop valves and terminal device shut off valves.

B. Identification shall consist of a metallic tag chained to the valve with tag number pressed into the metal.

C. Provide a piping system diagram with valve numbers identified. The diagram shall be easily legible, framed in glass, and mounted in the mechanical room or where directed by the owner. Multiple charts may be necessary and required where various piping systems or portions of systems need be identified for simplicity.

3.04 WELDING

A. All concealed black steel piping shall be fusion welded.

B. Welding shall be performed in conformance with the ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code Section IX.

C. Elbows, tees, and branch connections shall be made with welding fittings

ANSI B16.9.

D. Furnish welder test certificates for review. Certificates of successful welder qualification by the following organizations shall be acceptable;

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

ANSI Code for Pressure Piping

National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau




January 30, 2015

Military Specification MIL-STD-248.

E. Weld-o-lets and Thread-o-lets are allowed but shall be a maximum of one size smaller than line size, i.e. a maximum of a 3 inch weld-o-let on a 4 inch pipe.

3.05 SOLDERING AND BRAZING

A. Ream or file pipe or tube to remove burrs.

B. Clean and polish contact surfaces.

C. Apply flux to both male and female surfaces.

D. Insert tube full depth into socket.

E. Bring joint to soldering or brazing temperature in as short a time as possible.

F. Form a continuous solder bead or brazing filler bead around entire circumference of the joint.

G. Tin-lead 50-50 shall not be allowed on the site.

H. Brazed joints of 95-5 tin antimony AWS 5.8 shall be used for refrigerant piping, hot water heating piping, drainage piping, domestic hot, cold, and

I. recirculated water piping.

Flux shall be non-toxic.

3.06 VALVES

A. Valves shall be installed with their stems above the horizontal.

B. Valves shall be installed on the connections to all equipment and control valves to allow for isolation for repair.

C. Valves installed above 7 feet in mechanical rooms shall have chain operators.

D. Check valves shall be installed on the discharge side of pumps and wherever else indicated on the drawings.

3.07 STRAINERS

A. Strainers shall be installed on the suction side of all pumps and at the inlets to all control valves.

B. Provide a blow down valve of at least 1/2 inch size connected to each strainer blow off port.

3.08 GAUGES




January 30, 2015

A. Pressure gauges shall be installed on the suction and discharge side of all pumps inlet and outlet of backflow preventors, and wherever else indicated on the drawings or specified.

3.09 SYSTEM START-UP

A. Fill system and thoroughly flush all sediment, dirt, particles and any other material from the system. Furnish and install necessary hose connections as may be necessary to accomplish.

B. Remove all air from the system. This will require several bleeding sequences to remove all air from the system. Provide all necessary air vents to accomplish. Where existing systems are connected, remove air from the existing system also.

C. Clean all strainers after thorough flushing.

D. Provide chemical treatment for first year of operation including all necessary tests, chemicals, additives and service visits.

END OF SECTION




January 30, 2015

SECTION 22 11 16 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING


1.01 REFERENCE


B. Requirements of the City of Philadelphia Plumbing Code.

C. Requirements of the City of Philadelphia Code, local plumbing code and the authorities having jurisdiction shall be made a part of these specifications.

D. Where the contract documents are more stringent but not in conflict with the applicable codes, the more stringent requirements shall be followed.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and manufacturers data for all materials specified herein.

B. Submit manufacturer’s certificates of conformance with referenced codes.

1.03 WORK INCLUDED

A. Revisions to existing water piping to accommodate renovations with new fixtures.

B. Testing of new piping.

C. Disinfection of new piping.

D. All domestic water piping including extension from present water service.

E. Hot water heaters, piping, circulators, and controls.

F. Testing of all piping systems.

G. Miscellaneous piping and plumbing accessories specified herein or necessary to complete the work.

H. Include all labor, material and provide for the inspection and supervision of the work to insure that installations are correct and complete and that equipment installed is within manufacturer’s warranty requirements.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS 221112 - 1



January 30, 2015

I. Connections to all fixtures and equipment including those furnished by others.


2.01 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Above ground: Hard drawn ASTM B-88 specification for seamless copper water tube, Type "L".

B. Below ground: Annealed soft temper ASTM B-88 specification for seamless copper water tube, Type "K".

C. Fittings wrought copper solder joint ANSI B16.22.

D. Fittings for underground to be bronze heavy flared type.

2.02 SHOCK ABSORBERS

A. Standard: P.D.I. WH-201.

B. Manufacturer: Josam, Zurn, Wade, J. R. Smith.

2.03 HOSE BIBBS

A. Finished areas: Polished chrome plated brass. ½ inch with 3/4 inch hose connection and vacuum breaker.

B. Mechanical areas: Rough brass, ½ inch with 3/4 inch hose connection and vacuum breaker.

2.04 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Non-freeze type, 3/4 inch with exposed hose connection, polished chrome face, loose key, vacuum breaker.

B. Manufacturer; Josam, Zurn, Wade, Smith.

C. Verify wall construction with hydrant locations to assure anti-freeze arrangement and concealed connection.




January 30, 2015

2.05 BACKFLOW PREVENTORS

A. Backflow preventor shall be of the reduced pressure type complete with service valves and strainer similar to Watts Regulator No. 909 SQT.

2.06 WATER SERVICE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE

A. In all services, all bronze, adjustable, Watts Regulator Company, (Model

223S) or B&G.

B. Provide strainer ahead of regulator and gauges on each side of the regulator.

2.07 RECESSED BOX TYPE NON-FREEZE WALL HYDRANT

A. Smith No. 5509 QT cast bronze box with bronze nickel plated face with "T" handle key and bronze casing with concealed vacuum breaker 3/4" universal inlet connection.

2.08 THERMAL EXPANSION ABSORBER

A. Expansion absorber shall be installed in connection with each domestic water heating device consisting of a pre-charged vertical steel tank with polypropylene liner as manufactured by Amtrol, Model AST Extrol.

Selection shall be in accordance with the manufacturer recommendation.

Where necessary, multiple tanks shall be utilized with common header.


3.01 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Extend and connect to all fixtures and outlets requiring water service.

B. Hangers and supports for copper tubing or pipe shall be copper or copper plated steel.

C. After testing, all domestic water piping shall be disinfected as herein




January 30, 2015 specified.

D. Furnish and install shock absorbers on all branches to fixture groups or toilet rooms with flush valves or solenoid valves including equipment which functions with solenoid valves. Install so as to be accessible for maintenance.

E. Furnish and install isolation ball valves at main connections on all branches to groups of fixtures located by separate rooms except in back-to-back arrangements.

F. Furnish and install vacuum breakers on all outlets in the domestic water system which may have a hose attachment including wall hydrants, hose bibbs, and washer connections.

G. All piping shall be installed on the interior conditioned side of the building insulation.

H. Test piping at 150 psi for not less than 4 hours. Drop in pressure shall not be more than 1 psi. Utilize gage graduated in 1 psi increments. If the test is under the jurisdiction of a local inspector his requirements may be used provided they are not less than above. Furnish signed report of test and witness.

3.02 SOLDER JOINTS

A. Utilize 95/5 tin antimony solder ONLY. JOINTS MADE WITH 50/50 SOLDER

WILL BE REQUIRED TO BE REPLACED.

B. See Specification Section 15050 for other details on soldering.

3.03 BACKFLOW PREVENTORS

A. Furnish and install reduced pressure backflow preventors on any domestic water connection to another piping system. Backflow preventers shall be approved by the water company.

B. Systems shall include but not be limited to:

1. Boiler water systems, heating systems.

2. Sprinkler systems.

3. Any system containing chemical water treatment, additives or

4. anti-freeze.

Irrigation system.

C. Provide means for proper disposal of any relief discharge from the backflow




January 30, 2015 preventor.

3.04 CROSS CONNECTION (HOT AND COLD WATER)

A. Equipment or fixtures having single nozzle or valved discharge controls in addition to the normal hot and cold water valved controls shall be provided with individual check valves in the supplies to prevent cross feeding through the fixture connection.

3.05 DISINFECTION

A. After final testing for leaks, all domestic cold, hot and hot recirculation water systems shall be thoroughly flushed to remove all foreign material.

Before placing the system into service, engage a qualified service organization, United Water Treatment Company or approved equal, to disinfect the systems as follows:

1. Isolate existing piping systems, which need to be disinfected.

2. At a point not more than 10 feet downstream from the beginning of the new main, water entering the new main shall receive a dose of chlorine fed at a constant rate such that the water will have not less than 200 mg/L free chlorine or through a 3/4" hose connection, sufficient sodium hypochlorite will be meter pumped into system to produce a free available chlorine residual of not less than 200 mg/L.

3. Proceed upstream from the point of chlorine application opening all faucets and taps until chlorine is detected. Close faucets and connections when chlorine is evident. Tag all faucets and taps with proper labeling to ensure water is not used during sterilization procedure. The chlorine shall be applied continuously for a sufficient period to develop a solid column, or “slug,” of chlorinated water that will, as it moves through the main, expose all interior surfaces to a concentration of approximately 200 mg/L for three hours.

4. When chlorinated water has been brought to every faucet and connections with a minimum of 200 mg/L chlorine, retain this water in system for three hours.

5. Concentrated chlorine shall not be allowed to remain in the system for more than six hours. Also, special procedures shall be used to




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 dispose of heavily concentrated chlorine in an environmentally acceptable and approved manner.

6. As the chlorinated water flows past fittings and valves, related valves, connections and/or hydrants shall be operated so as to disinfect appurtenances and pipe branches.

7. At the end of the retention period, no less than 100 ppm of chlorine shall be present at the extreme end of the system.

8. Proceed to open up all faucets and connections and thoroughly flush all new lines until the chlorine residual in the system is less than 1.0 ppm.

9. Obtain representative water samples from the system for analysis by an approved licensed independent testing laboratory.

10. Water samples for bacteriological analysis shall be collected in sterile bottles treated with sodium thiosulphate as required by Standard

Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater.

11. If all samples tested for coliform organisms are negative, a letter and laboratory report shall be submitted by the contractor to the engineer, certifying successful completion of the disinfection and testing. If any samples tested indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the entire disinfection process shall be repeated.

END OF SECTION




January 30, 2015

SECTION 22 13 00 - DRAINAGE SYSTEMS


1.01 REFERENCE


B. Requirements of the International codes, City of Philadelphia Plumbing

Codes, and authorities having jurisdiction shall be made a part of these specifications.

C. Where the contract documents are more stringent but not in conflict with the applicable codes, the more stringent requirement shall be followed.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Install piping to meet requirements of City of Philadelphia Plumbing Code.

B. Provide manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified.

C. All Piping and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the

Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute.

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificates of conformance to applicable codes.

B. Test Reports: Submit copies of test reports.

C. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Submit "PVC" manufacturer's materials, installation support and expansion joint recommendations for review by Architect/Engineer.


2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS

DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 221300 - 1



January 30, 2015

A. Cast Iron no-hub ASTM-A88 and CISPI-301 with heavy duty banded stainless steel sleeves and rubber sleeve joints for all above ground sanitary drainage and storm drainage piping 2" and larger. Cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall bear the markings of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and conform to CISPI Standard 301. Copper type DWV for up to 1 1/2".

B. City of Philadelphia - All underground shall be service weight bell and spigot cast iron with lead and oakum joints for all underground soil, waste, and storm piping.

2.02 CLEANOUTS

A. Slab on grade; J. R. Smith 433OV with nickel bronze cover and rim.

B. Concrete Floors; J. R. Smith 4020 with nickel bronze cover. Provide flashing flange where floor is waterproofed.

C. Tile Floors; J. R. Smith 4140 with 1/8" recess. Provide flashing flange where floor is waterproofed.

D. Carpet Floors; J. R. Smith 4020 with carpet marker.

E. Walls; J. R. Smith 4510-4725 cover plate chrome finish.

F. Equivalents by Josam, Zurn, Watts and Wade are acceptable.

2.03 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Finished spaces unless otherwise noted on plans; J. R. Smith 2010-A with nickel bronze strainer. Provide trap primer connection and heel proof grate.

Flashing collar. In traffic areas provide heel proof strainer.

B. Unfinished spaces; J. R. Smith 2110 with cast iron grate and flashing flange.

2.04 TRAP PRIMERS

A. Smith No. 2699 cast bronze trap primer with 1/2" connections. Provide primered drains with Smith No. 2695 or 2696 cast iron trap primer adaptors.

B. Trap primers for multiple floor drains shall consist of the appropriate model with distribution unit as manufactured by Precision Plumbing

Products.

C. All trap primers shall be accessibly located and installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.




January 30, 2015

2.05 BACKWATER VALVE

A. The contractor shall provide a backwater valve on any sanitary branch below street level and above the site sanitary main.

B. The valve shall conform to ASME A112.14.1.

C. Signage shall be provided and posted at the location of the valve.

D. Provide a sleeve extension and cover to access the valve below the slab.


3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas to receive piping for:

1. Defects that adversely affect execution and quality of work.

2. Deviations beyond allowable tolerance for piping clearances.

B. Start work only when conditions are satisfactory.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Piping Layout:

1.

2.

3.

Complete installation to present a neat, orderly appearance.

Do not block openings or passageways with piping.

Run piping parallel to walls of building, unless otherwise indicated.

4.

5.

Keep piping free from contact with structure or installed items.

All changes in direction to be made with "Y" branches or 1/8 bends.

6. Provide cleanouts at base of all stacks, at changes in direction of piping and at 50 foot intervals. Cleanouts shall be line size up to 4 inch and 4 inch for piping over 4 inch.

7. The base of interior rainwater conductors connecting to a combination sewer shall be provided with deep seal traps.

B. Workmanship:

1. Examine pipe and fittings before installation and assure no defective materials are incorporated.

2. Keep inside of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris.

3. Installation of cast iron soil pipe to conform to Cast Iron Soil Pipe

Institute Standards Handbook.

C. Placement:




January 30, 2015

1. Vertical Piping: a. Secure at sufficiently close intervals to keep pipe in alignment, and to support weight of pipe and contents. b. Install risers, stacks, etc. as directly as possible to roof. c. Install supports at each floor.

2. Horizontal Piping, Suspended; a. Support at sufficiently close intervals to prevent sagging and to

3. Horizontal Piping, Underground; maintain alignment. Not to exceed: cast iron piping to be supported at pipe joints not to exceed 10'-0" spacing. Copper and steel piping to be supported on 12' spacing. PVC piping to be supported on 4'-0" spacing. Copper tubing up to 1 1/4" to be supported on 6' spacing, over 1 1/4" to be supported on

10'-0" spacing. Other piping to be supported per manufacturer. b. Install hangers and supports at least 18 inches from each joint regardless of pipe length. c. Install hangers at the ends of all runs or branches and at each change of direction or alignment. d. Gasketed or mechanical joints piping shall be securely braced or clamp and rod restrained to prevent horizontal movement where the transition from the vertical of the horizontal occurs.

Branches must be secured to prevent movement in any a. b. direction by use of sway bracing.

Lay piping on firm bed for entire length of trench except where supports are provided.

Employ partial backfilling and cradling to hold pipe in secure position during backfilling operations. c. Firmly brace piping laid on grade prior to embedment in concrete.

3.03 TESTING

A. Disconnect all equipment and devices which may be damaged by test pressures.

B. Plug or cap lines.

C. Test each piping system for leaks in accordance with the local inspectors test code.




January 30, 2015

D. Repair all leaks noted.

E. Minimum test shall be to fill system to top vent stack and not show a drop of more than 3 inches for 1 hour. Test shall be performed before piping is concealed.

F. Secure certificate from municipal inspector of an acceptable test.

END OF SECTION




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

SECTION 22 17 00 - GAS PIPING SYSTEMS


1.01 REFERENCE

A. Refer to section 22 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section.

B. Refer to International Mechanical Code.

C. Refer to requirements of the local gas company. (PGW)

D. Refer to NFPA Pamphlet No. 54.

E. Where the contract documents are more stringent but not in conflict with the applicable codes, the more stringent requirement shall be followed.

F. Refer to International Fuel Gas Code

G. City of Philadelphia Plumbing Code

1.02 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to install a complete natural gas piping system with all devices, appurtenances and accessories to complete the work.

B. Contractor to coordinate new gas meter replacement work with PGW and pay any associated costs. Provide new gas cocks on each side of gas meter and pressure regulator. Install gas meter, pressure regulator, and relief valve in accordance with the requirements of the gas company.

C. Extend service from termination point of the gas company to the building.

D. Provide gas cocks on all branch lines to equipment and appliances to allow for servicing.

E. Provide separate gas pressure regulators on each piece of equipment and appliance to regulate line pressure down to appliance/equipment usage pressure.

F. Arrange for new meter replacement installation with utility supplier (PGW).

G. Contractor shall paint all exterior piping exposed to the outdoors with one coat of primer and two coats of enamel paint. Finish to be selected by architect, and/or as required by the utility company.

GAS PIPING SYSTEMS 221700 - 1



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015


A. Steel pipe schedule 40: ASTM A53 and A106, Interior piping.

B. Plastic pipe schedule 40: ASTM D2513 and D2517, Exterior underground piping.

1.04 PRESSURE REQUIREMENTS

A. Service pressure from main to meter/regulator:

High pressure from Gas Company.

B. Pressure Regulator:

High Pressure to #/square inches or inches water column.

C. Relief Valve:

To relieve full connected load + 25% at a pressure of psig.


2.01 VALVES

A. Valves 2 inch and smaller shall be conventional port, three piece body, blow-out proof stem, chrome ball and Teflon seals, 600 PSI rated and UL listed. Model # T-595-Y-UL as manufactured by NIBCO.

B. Valves over 2 inch shall be Figure 143 with flanged ends as manufactured by Rockwell-Nordstrom.


A. Insulated dielectric unions to prevent the flow of electricity between adjacent sections of piping. Unions shall have the same pressure and temperature ratings of the installed systems.

B. Fittings shall be screwed union type up to 2 inch and flanged type above 2 inch. Flanged type shall have isolating gaskets and isolated bolt holes.

C. Manufacturer; Epco Sales Inc., Central Plastics. UL listed for gas piping service.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

2.03 UNIONS

A. All equipment, control valves, and regulators shall be provided with union connections up to 2 inch and flanged connections above 2 inch.


C. Unions shall be placed between the appliance and its shutoff valve.




2.05 PRESSURE REGULATOR - SERVICE

A. In accordance with utility company requirements.

2.06 PRESSURE REGULATOR - EQUIPMENT/APPLIANCES

A. Individual appliance gas pressure regulators shall be provided for each individual appliance to reduce pressure from line pressure to appliance pressure.

B. Pressure regulators shall be UL listed for gas service.

C. Pressure regulators shall be accessible and protected from physical damage.

D. Exterior regulators shall be approved for outdoor applications.

E. The vent from vented regulators shall be extended to the exterior of the building. Vents shall not terminate near windows or door openings, air intakes, areaways or other confined areas where gas may accumulate or cause gas to re-enter building spaces.

2.07 RELIEF VALVE

A. Install on the low pressure side of each pressure regulator.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

B. Relieve to exterior atmosphere.


3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Branch connections shall be made to the top of horizontal lines. All piping shall be arranged to drain to a drainable low point. The low point shall be provided with a nipple and cap for the removal of moisture.

B. Piping shall run square with building lines.

C. Necessary drains, offsets, rises, vents, and drips shall be provided for as part of the contracted work. Where any such rise or drip is necessary the contractor shall install same as part of the work and as directed by the engineer. The drawings are diagrammatic in nature and due to the small scale it is not possible to show all necessary drains, vents, offsets and rises which may be required to properly execute the work and such items shall be provided as needed. Drips shall be accessible.

D. Running or close nipples are not allowed.

E. Furnish and install dielectric pipe couplings between sections of ferrous and nonferrous piping systems and between copper or brass equipment and ferrous piping systems.

F. Steel piping shall be supported from adjustable clevis type piping up to 1".

Over 1" to be on 10'-0" centers. Refer to manufacturer for piping other than steel.

G. Piping above roof shall be cleaned, primed, and provided with 2 coats of epoxy enamel.

H. Furnish and install an appliance pressure regulator on all equipment unless otherwise indicated.

I. Piping shall not be installed underground beneath buildings.

J. Piping shall be capped immediately after installation.

K. Valves shall not be concealed above ceilings.


A. Provide stencils or snap-on labels to identify gas piping systems.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

B. Labels shall indicate "GAS" and the direction of flow.


3.03 WELDING





ANSI B16.9.







3.04 VALVES



C. Valves shall not be installed above ceilings.

D. An emergency shut off valve to shut off the entire system shall be provided, accessible from outside the building.

3.05 TESTING

A. The gas system shall be tested in accordance with the local gas company and NFPA Pamphlet No. 54.

B. Provide a report of the test procedure utilized indicating test pressure and duration, date, and signatures of witnesses which shall include the owner,

Gas Company official, and representative of the A/E.

C. Sections of piping which will be concealed shall be tested prior to




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 concealment.

D. Test pressure shall be 1.5 times the system working pressure but not less than 3 psi. There shall be no loss in pressure for a ten minute period.

Repair any leaks and retest.

END OF SECTION




January 30, 2015

SECTION 22 40 00 - PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT


1.01 REFERENCE


B. Reference the requirements of the City of Philadelphia Plumbing Code.

C. Where the contract documents are more stringent but not in conflict with the applicable codes, the more stringent requirements shall be followed.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures, drains, trim, supplies, fastening devices, carriers, valves, and traps for a complete installation.

B. Provide connection of all services for soil, waste, vent, cold and hot water.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings of all materials and products described in this section and indicated on the drawings including that listed in the schedule on the drawings.

B. Fixture submittals shall include all trim associated with the china. They shall be incorporated in a single brochure with the items being furnished clearly identified.


A. All fixtures shall be unmarked, uncracked, true, and level. All shall be warranted to not craze, color, or scale.

B. Installations shall conform to the City of Philadelphia Plumbing Code.

C. Install all materials and equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and within the warranty requirements.

D. All handicapped fixtures and their installation shall conform to the

American's with Disabilities Act and Fair Housing Amendments Act (Public

Law 101-336).

PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 1



January 30, 2015


2.01 TRAPS

A. Fixture traps shall be approved self-cleaning type with clean-outs.

B. Traps shall be chrome plated cast brass.

C. Traps for lavatories shall be 1 1/4" x 1 1/2" size.

2.02 TRIM

A. All trim including faucets, waste fittings, strainers, valves, supplies,

nipples, and escutcheons shall be chrome plated cast brass.

B. Exposed water supply pipes shall be chrome plated brass with loose key angle stops.

C. Fixtures shall be selected for low water consumption and limited to 1.6 gallons per flush on toilets, 2.2 gpm for faucets, and 2.5 gpm for showers.

D. Public toilet room faucets shall be self-closing metering type when not indicated for the handicapped. Handicapped faucets shall conform to ADA requirements. Provide an approved temperature limiting device that conforms to ASSE 1070.

E. All lavatories in public toilet rooms shall have grid type strainers.

F. Waste connections for handicapped lavatories shall be offset. Contractor is to insulate all exposed domestic water and waste piping with pre-fab PVC jacketed assemblies.

G. For fixtures requiring flush valves, they shall be of the low consumption type. Selection shall be for use with the specified fixture.

H.

‘Eco-drive’ sensor operated flush valves and faucets shall include regenerating battery system.

I.

Water cooler shall have a bottle filler on the low station.

2.03 CARRIERS

A. All wall hung fixtures shall be provided with floor mounted carriers.

B. Floor mounted carriers shall have short pattern foot supports.

C. Carriers for lavatories shall be concealed arm type.




January 30, 2015

2.04 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fixtures; Kohler, American-Standard, Crane.

B. Seats; Church, Olsonite, Sperzel, Benke, Bemis.

C. Carriers; Josam, Zurn, Wade, J.R. Smith, Watts.

D. Faucets; TOTO

E. Supplies and Traps; McGuire, Brass Craft, Central Brass, Kohler,

American-Standard.

F. Mop Receptors; Crane/Fiat, Stern/Williams.

G. Domestic Water Heaters-Electric; Rheem Bradford White, State.

H. Flush Valves - Sloan Royal

I. Insulation for handicapped lavatory and sink connections insulations -

Truebro McGuire “pro-wrap”.

2.05 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Furnish and install vacuum breakers on all fixtures, trim, or faucets arranged for the connection of hoses. Vacuum breaker shall be located on the discharge side of the valve.

B. Vacuum breakers shall be chrome plated brass where exposed and rough brass where concealed.

C. Install vacuum breakers on wall hydrants, hose bibbs, janitor sinks and wherever else required by code.

2.06 DOMESTIC WATER HEATER - ELECTRIC

A. Size and capacity as indicated on drawing.

B. 2 1/2 inch thick polyurethane insulation R 20.

C. To exceed ASHRAE 90.1B and HUD requirements.

D. Adjustable controls conforming to U.L., and NEMA.

E. Glass lined tank. Anode rods, ASME pressure and temperature relief valve, baked enamel finish, high temperature cutout.

F. 10 year warranty.

G. Plastic lined nipples, drain valve, individually factory tested.

H. Non-simultaneous operation of dual heating elements.

2.07 WATER HEATER DRAIN PAN




January 30, 2015

A. Pan shall be galvanized steel - 24 gauge with a minimum height of 1 ½”.

B. Each pan shall have a 3/4" drain to an acceptable point.

2.08 HEATER WARRANTIES

A. Provide extended warranties of 5 years for commercial and 10 years for residential heaters.

2.09 CIRCULATORS

A. Circulating pumps shall be in-line, centrifugal, close coupled with mechanical seals, all bronze construction similar to TACO or Bell and

Gossett.

B. Pump shall be controlled by adjustable, immersion type Aquastat,

Honeywell.

2.10 WATER CLOSET CARRIER SELECTION.

A. Carrier fitting configuration shall be suitable for the stack location shown on the drawings. Carriers to permit handicapped mounting of fixtures shall be utilized where required.

2.11 FLOOR MOUNTED FLOOR OUTLET WATER CLOSET CONNECTION

A. Smith No. 9230 cast bronze closet flange assembly complete with 5/16" bronze bolts, chromium plated nuts and washers and approved gasket.

2.12 WALL HUNG BLOWOUT URINALS ON FLOOR MOUNTED SUPPORT

A. Smith No. 0629, 0630, 0632, or 0633 urinal support with adjustable coupling assembly. Face plate shall be supported by extra heavy cast iron base support which shall be securely bolted to floor construction.

2.13 WALL HUNG BLOWOUT AND WASH-OUT URINALS ON FLOOR MOUNTED

SUPPORT

A. Smith No. 0600 series urinal support. Uprights shall be high-strength steel with block bases securely bolted to floor construction.




January 30, 2015

2.14 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER WALL SUPPORT

A. Smith No. 0830 floor mounted support electric water cooler support.

Uprights shall be high strength steel with block bases securely bolted to floor construction.

2.15 FLAT-SLAB LAVATORIES-CONCEALED ARMS ON FLOOR SUPPORT

A. Lavatories shall be punched for Smith No. 0700-E fixture support. Fixture support shall have chromium plated threaded escutcheons and concealed arms with positive mechanical locking device. Arms shall be fully adjustable after installation of finished wall. Uprights shall be high-strength steel with block bases securely bolted to floor construction.


3.01 INSTALLATIONS

A. Plumbing fixtures shall be installed in a manner to afford easy access for cleaning. Where practical, all piping from fixtures shall run in the most direct route to the wall.

B. Furnish and install all waste connections, traps, water supplies, final connections, etc., to equipment furnished under other portions of the specifications.

C. Make final connections to all soil, waste, vent, and water piping to the fixtures.

D. Fixtures shall be set level and in proper alignment with adjacent walls and fixtures.

E. All wall hung fixture carriers to be securely anchored to the slab.

F. Attach floor mounted water closets to floor with wax seal and lag screws.

Do not use lead flashing to hold closet in place.

G. Securely bolt all fixtures to the building construction and unless special hangers are indicated, provide hangers and/or carriers designed specifically for the fixtures by the fixture manufacture.

H. Caulk all wall hung fixtures between fixture and wall with sealant specified in Section 07900. Provide sealant at all points where mop receptor meets walls and floor.



Water Closet:

Standard

Handicapped

Urinal:

Standard

Handicapped

15 inches to top of bowl rim

17 - 19 inches to top of seat



Project #177901981


January 30, 2015

I. Install electric water coolers with "P" trap and water shutoff valve within cabinet.

J. Contractor shall insulate all exposed domestic water and drainage piping under all handicapped lavatories and sinks with pre-formed insulation kit with PVC jacket similar to, Lav-Guard as manufactured by Truebro. There shall be no sharp or abrasive surfaces under the handicapped lavatories.

K. Contractor shall provide an offset tailpiece for the handicapped lavatory's drain piping to create space for wheelchair access.


A. Mount fixtures with the following heights above finished floor, except where noted otherwise.

Lavatory:

Standard

Handicapped

Drinking Fountain:

Standard

Handicapped

31 inches to top of basin rim

34 inches to top of basin rim or 29 inches to underside of basin apron

40 inches to top of basin rim

36 inches to bubbler outlet

Water Closet Tank Type - Trip Lever

Standard

Handicapped

Per manufacturer

Locate on tank side toward wide side of stall.

END OF SECTION




January 30, 2015

DIVISION 23 - HVAC

SECTION 23 05 00 - STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR HVAC


1.01 REFERENCE

A. Requirements established within the portions of this project manual titled


B. Instructions to Bidders, Special Conditions and addenda as issued are part of this specification.

C. Mechanical, Plumbing, and HVAC drawings along with all other project drawings and specifications represent the work of this section.


1.02 SCOPE

A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to disconnect and remove the existing heating system in its entirety including, but not limited to; radiators, piping, boilers, pumps, baseboard radiation, ductwork, HVAC equipment, controls, supports, hangers, and all associated insulation, equipment pads, and accessories. Patch and repair openings in walls, floors, and ceilings, for piping and equipment that was removed.

Pipe, conduit, ductwork and wiring shall be cut back behind wall surfaces, above ceilings, and below floor levels so that a patch can be placed over the opening.

B. Provide labor, material, equipment and supervision necessary to install complete operating mechanical systems as indicated on the drawings and specified herein, including all work at the site and within the proposed construction areas to accomplish the required work.

STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR HVAC 230500 - 1



January 30, 2015

C. It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to coordinate his work and the work of his subcontractors to insure that all the work is covered. He shall designate who is responsible for various portions of work which may overlap so that there is complete coverage of all required work. It is the position of the owner and the A/E that all work is the responsibility of the mechanical contractor within this Division of the work.

D. Contractor shall provide all demolition necessary to remove and replace, repair, install new or modify existing work whether it be walls, floors, ceilings, structure, mechanical or electrical required to install his work.

Contractor shall replace all work to leave in a finished condition.

E. All work shown on the drawings and not expressly mentioned in the specifications and all work specified but not shown on the drawings, but necessary for the proper execution of same shall be performed by the contractor. It is not the intent of the drawings and specifications to describe every feature and detail of the work.

F. No additions to the contract amount will be approved for any materials, equipment, or labor to perform additional work unless it can be clearly shown to be beyond the scope and intent of the drawings and specifications.

E.

HVAC contractor's scope of work shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Air distribution system, associated ductwork, devices, equipment and insulation.

2. Heating hot water system and insulation.

3. Condensate drainage system (air conditioner units). Condensate pumps.

4. Roof penetrations for mechanical work and all associated roof work.

5. Exhaust systems.

6. Gas fired split systems.

7. Demolition of existing work for new work.

8. Test Balance & Adjust.

9. Repair existing areas affected by the new construction. Patch, repair and finish to match existing.

10. Building automation system and automatic temperature controls.

11. Water treatment and conditioning systems as well as chemicals and additives for one year from date of acceptance including: a. Hot water heating system

12. All other work identified in Division 23 and/or on the mechanical drawings except that identified as plumbing or fire protection work.




January 30, 2015

13. Contractor shall not utilize new HVAC equipment for temporary heating purposes. Temporary heating is to be provided as described under the architect’s general conditions. Contractor is to protect all

HVAC equipment during construction and cover all ductwork openings. .

14. Fire stopping of penetrations.

1.03 REGULATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS

A. Work shall be performed in accordance with the latest adopted codes, amendments, regulations and ordinances of the authorities having jurisdiction. Observe all safety regulations including the requirements of

OSHA.

B. Obtain and pay for all permits, connection charges, inspections, and certificates required to complete the work.

C. Latest editions of any referenced standards shall govern.

D. Contractor shall arrange and pay for all tests and inspections specified herein or required by above agencies and furnish required certificate of inspection to owner.

E. Where the contract documents are more stringent but not in conflict with the applicable codes, the more stringent requirements shall be followed.

1.04 SUBMISSIONS









January 30, 2015


F. Contractor to forward a copy of submittals which have electrical requirements to the Electrical Contractor (EC) for coordination of voltage, amperage, and phase. Response to be received from EC prior to ordering of equipment by mechanical contractor.

G. Submissions shall include warrantees by the manufacturer for equipment being provided. Submissions for commonly related items such as fixtures, trim, carriers, drains shall be combined in a single brochure with all items being furnished clearly identified.

H. Shop drawings and submittals shall be checked and stamped by the contractor before submitting. They shall conform to measurements made at the site, the contract requirements, and coordinated with all other trades.

I. Specific models in catalog sheets must be identified as well as all options, voltages, phases, etc. identified so as to be clear on what is being provided.


A. Visit site, inspect and become aware of all conditions which may affect the work. Investigate utilities, protection requirements for adjacent facilities, storage locations, and access to the construction area.

B. Submission of bid will be deemed evidence of having complied with this request. Contractor may not request additional costs for existing conditions which were evident from inspection of the site.

1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Material and equipment specified shall be deemed as that which the bidder’s quotation represents.

B. Once bids are accepted only that material and equipment listed in the specifications or added by addenda shall be acceptable. Substitution information for inclusion in an addenda must be received by the A\E at least 10 days prior to bid opening. If acceptable, an addenda will be issued which will add the additional acceptable manufacturers or materials and be available for all contractors to consider. It shall be a basic premise that a contractor is a lowest bidder because he utilized substituted materials or equipment as opposed to specified materials or equipment.




January 30, 2015

C. If the contractor submits alternate equipment, manufacturers, systems, methods, or materials, not specifically identified in the specifications, additional review and investigation time may be required by the engineer.



D.

If the contractor elects to submit alternate equipment, manufacturers, systems, methods, or materials, not specifically identified in the drawings and specifications, it is the contractor’s responsibility to coordinate the work with other trades and pay for any associated costs with the substitution or change.


A. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and necessary field coordination and adjustment must be provided by the contractor prior to installation. Such deviations to the work to allow for coordination shall be kept to a minimum and any such deviations shall be at no extra cost.

B. When a conflict or contradiction exists either between drawings and specs or between specs or between different drawings or details, the more stringent shall apply.

C. Drawings and specifications are intended to be taken as a whole and each is to supplement the other. It is not intended that all work must be both shown on drawings and specified in the specifications.

D. An item shown on the drawings and not indicated in the specifications is to be understood to be required for the project. An item specified and not shown on the drawings is to be understood to be required for the project.

E. The architects or engineers interpretation of the documents shall be binding upon the contractor. If a question arises, the contractor shall ask for an interpretation prior to bidding and an answer shall be issued as an addendum to all bidders.

F. If a question arises after bidding the A/E interpretation shall govern.

1.08 MEASUREMENTS

A. Before ordering materials or commencing with any work, the contractor




January 30, 2015 shall verify all measurements at the building. Coordination of equipment, materials, spaces, and dimensions are the responsibility of the contractor.



1.10 COST SCHEDULE



1.11 COMPLETION

A. The contractor shall deliver to the owner, with his request for final payment, copies of all manufacturer's guarantees, equipment instructional manuals, a complete set of all final shop drawings, catalog cuts, service contracts, and other items as may be required elsewhere in the documents.

1.12 OFFICE


1.13 STORAGE


1.14 SANITARY






January 30, 2015


2.01 GENERAL

A. All material shall be new and of present day manufacture.

B. All material and equipment shall be in conformance with accepted trade standards.

C. Whenever equipment or material is referred to in the singular, such as "the fan", it shall be deemed to apply to as many such items as may be necessary to complete the installation.

D. The word “provide” means “furnish and install complete, tested, and adjusted as necessary with all accessories, covers, escutcheons”. The word “piping” means pipe, fitting, controls, valves and hangers as required for a complete system.

2.02 MOTORS

A. Incorporate latest IEEE and NEMA standards.

B. All copper windings with ball bearings.

C. Indoors; drip proof, 40 degree C rise.

D. Outdoors; totally enclosed 55 degree C rise.

E. Motors over 10 HP to be high efficiency with PF in excess of 0.9.


A. Fractional with horsepower up to ½ HP; electrical contract.

B. Polyphase and single phase above ½ HP: this contract.

C. Electrical contractor shall install all starters except for those provided as an integral part of equipment.

D. Polyphase starters shall be magnetic combination type, across-the-line electrically operated, electrically held, three pole assemblies, with arc extinguishing characteristics, silver to silver renewable contacts, 3 pole thermal bi-metallic, red run pilot light, individual phase protection, with overload heaters matched to motors installed and with 4 auxiliary contact,

Hand-off-Auto switch, and control transformer.

E. For single phase motors above ½ HP provide magnetic combination single phase motor starters with overloads, non-fusible disconnect switch, red run pilot light, integral 120 volt control transformer with dual primary fusing




January 30, 2015 auxiliary contacts.

F. Starters shall be as manufactured by G. E., Siemens, Square "D", Cerus or

Cutler-Hammer.


A. Verify that equipment is operating within warranty requirements.

B. Advise owner and A/E at least two days prior.



2.05 LUBRICATION

A. Lubricate all equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Lubricate prior to start up.

C. Provide one year’s supply of lubricants to the owner.


A. Properly and fully instruct owner’s personnel in the operation and maintenance of all systems and equipment.


C. Such instruction shall be for each item of equipment and each system as a whole.

D. Manual shall include all instructions on operation, maintenance, repair parts list, lubrication requirements, brochures, catalogue cuts, wiring diagrams, control sequences, service requirements, piping diagrams, names and addresses of vendors, suppliers and emergency contacts. Three manuals shall be provided.

E. Provide to the owner any special tools necessary to operate any of the equipment.

2.07 DRAIN PANS

A. Provide auxiliary galvanized steel condensate drain pan with 1" MPT drain connection for all interior fan coil units, cooling coils, heat pumps, and any other cooling equipment requiring condensate removal. Drain to suitable




January 30, 2015 discharge point acceptable to owner and A/E. Drain lines shall be separate and independent of A/C unit drain system unless provided with interlocked water sensing switch.

B. All water heaters mounted above the floor shall be provided with drain pans. Drain to suitable discharge point acceptable to owner and A/E. To be visible outfall.

C. Drains shall slope down in direction of flow at 1" per 10 feet.


3.01 PROTECTION

A. Cover duct openings during construction.

B. Plug or cap open ends of piping systems and conduit.

C. Stored materials shall be covered to prevent damage by inclement weather, sun, dust, or moisture.

D. Protect all installed work until accepted in place by the owner. Cover plumbing fixtures and lighting fixtures.

E. Do not install plates, polished metal escutcheons, thermostats, and other finished devices until masonry, tile, and painting operations are complete or protect otherwise.

F. Protect all existing or new work from operations which may cause damage such as hauling, welding, soldering, painting, insulating, and covering.

3.02 WORKMANSHIP

A. Install all work neat, trim, and plumb with building lines.

B. Install work in spaces allocated.

C. Cutting and patching shall be performed by skilled tradesmen normally employed for the work involved.


A. Perform all excavation required to install the work. Deposit excavated material so as not to create a slide hazard.

B. No work shall be placed on rock. Cushion with 6 " layer of crushed stone.




January 30, 2015

C. Protect tree roots with burlap covering and maintain moist until backfilled.

D. Base estimates on excavation which will include earth, sand, clay, rubbish, debris, and all other materials up to one cubic yard in size. Boulders or rock larger than one cubic yard which need to be broken up with pneumatic equipment or explosives will be separately negotiated at the time of discovery with the owner and A/E. Do not proceed with rock excavation until an agreement is reached.

E. Maintain excavations free of water.

F. Shore excavations to prevent cave-in in accordance with OSHA regulations and to prevent strains on work put in place until ready to receive backfill.

G. Backfill with clean material and pneumatically tamp in 8" layers. Remove excess material, including rock, from site or as directed by the A/E.

H. Backfill piping trenches within 18" of footings, columns, piers, or grade beams, with concrete. Protect piping from direct contact and adherence to

I. concrete.

Return to original condition any areas disturbed for excavation.

3.04 FASTENERS, HANGERS, AND SUPPORTS

A. Furnish and install all hangers and supports required to suspend, mount, or hang the work.

B. Furnish and install all miscellaneous steel angles, channels, beams, clips, brackets, and anchors to hang or support the work. Provide submissions for review.

C. Install concrete inserts before concrete is poured.

D. Drilled inserts shall not be loaded to more than 1/4 rated capacity with a minimum of 200 lbs.

E. Powder driven fasteners shall not be allowed for piping larger than 2", or for equipment. When used they shall not be loaded more than 1/8 rated capacity with a minimum of 200 lbs.

F. All hangers, miscellaneous steel, braces, and supports shall be galvanized, cadmium plated, or painted with corrosion resistant primer and finish coat of epoxy enamel.

G. Piping shall be supported from adjustable clevis type hangers with insulation pipe saddles as indicated in the piping system specification sections. Piping shall not support other piping.

H. Support vertical piping and ductwork at floor levels. Piping shall have split

I. rings. Ductwork shall have 1 1/2" angle iron frames.

Provide and install lintels where required for mechanical work and not




January 30, 2015 indicated on architectural or structural drawings.

J. Furnish steel framing for roof openings and floor openings. Submit details for review.

3.05 SLEEVES

A. All piping passing through floors or walls shall have sleeves unless holes are cored. Sleeves shall be 16 gage galvanized steel in non-bearing walls,

10 gage galvanized steel for bearing walls, and schedule 40 galvanized pipe in floors. Sleeves shall accommodate insulation. This shall not apply to sprinkler piping.

B. Sleeves passing through foundation walls not exposed to interior spaces or sleeves passing through slab on grade may be schedule 40 PVC.

C. Wall sleeves shall finish flush with wall.

D. Floor sleeves shall extend 1 inch above floor.

E. Sleeves in walls between interior spaces and unexcavated, exterior, crawl, or backfilled spaces shall be made watertight with "Link-Seal" modular wall and casing seal. Casing shall be schedule 40 galvanized pipe with anchor flange.

3.06 PLATES

A. Furnish and install chrome plated plates wherever piping passes into finished areas.

B. Plates shall be securely fastened to piping or building construction.

C. Floor plates shall cover one inch floor extension.

3.07 OFFSETS, TRANSITIONS, MODIFICATIONS

A. Furnish and install all offsets necessary to install the work and to provide clearance for the other trades.

B. Maintain adequate headroom and clearance as directed by the A/E.

C. Ductwork transitions necessary to accommodate available space or clearance requirements shall be contract requirements.

D. Incidental modifications necessary to the installation of the systems shall be made as necessary and at the direction of the A/E.

E. Rises and drops of piping systems shall be provided as required and where directed to allow for clearances to other construction. Drains shall be installed at no additional cost to the owner. The contractor shall allow for




January 30, 2015 such occurrences in his bid.

F. Ductwork, piping, conduit, and equipment shall be so arranged as to not pass in front of windows, doors, access panels, access doors, coil removal or filter removal space or service clearance areas. Do not install within

3'-0" clearance of electrical panel fronts.

3.08 RECESSES

A. Furnish information to the general contractor as to sizes and locations of recesses required to install panels, boxes, grilles, and other equipment or devices which are to be recessed into walls.

B. Make offsets or modifications as required to suit final locations.


A. Furnish and install as a minimum, a 4" thick concrete pad beneath all floor mounted equipment in mechanical rooms, boiler rooms, or equipment rooms, or outside on grade.. This shall not apply to residential installations of water heaters and air handling units or furnaces unless detailed on drawings or specified elsewhere.

B. Furnish and install as a minimum, spring vibration isolators under any equipment 5 HP and over and rubber-in-shear vibration isolation under all equipment less than 5 HP. This shall apply to residential installations.

C. Reinforce concrete with No. 4 rods 12" on centers both ways.


3.10 LABELING

A. All equipment, panels, controls, safety switches, and devices shall be provided with permanent black laminated white core labels with 3/8" letters.

B. This shall also apply to all controllers, remote start/stop push buttons, equipment cabinets, and where directed by the A/E.

C. This shall not apply to local room thermostats and light switches.

3.11 FLASHING AND COUNTERFLASHING

A. Piping and conduit through the roof shall be flashed by the General

Contractor. This contractor shall furnish counterflashing.




January 30, 2015

B.

Ductwork through the roof and roof mounted duct connected equipment shall be provided with prefabricated roof curbs. General contractor shall flash. This contractor shall counterflash.

C.

Structural dunnage for roof mounted equipment shall be flashed and counterflashed. Prefabricated roof curbs may be utilized.

3.12 ACCESS

A. Locate all equipment, valves, devices and controllers which may need service in accessible places.

B. Where access is not available, access panels shall be provided. Furnish prime painted steel access doors to the General Contractor for installation.

C. Access doors shall be 16 gauge frames and 22 gauge steel door. Access doors in fire rated walls shall have a "B" label for 1 ½ hours.

D. Maintain clearances for tube removal, coil pulls, and filter removal.

3.13 WIRING

A. Power wiring shall be provided by the Division 26 Electrical Contractor.

This contractor shall furnish all 3 phase starters, pushbuttons, and controllers necessary to operate the equipment. The Electrical Contractor shall store and install the electrical devices and furnish and install the power wiring.

B. Control wiring shall be furnished and installed under Division 23 portion of the work. Wiring for controls is control wiring whether it is line voltage or low voltage.

C. All wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC.

D. Pushbuttons shall be maintain-contact type.

E. Refer to the electrical specifications for wiring methods.

F. Plenum rated cable is required for control wiring.

3.14 UTILITIES

A. Do not interrupt any utility or service without adequate previous notice and scheduling with the owner.

B. Refer to Division 1 for requirements for providing temporary utilities.

3.15 CUTTING AND PATCHING EXTERIOR SERVICES




January 30, 2015

A. This contractor shall be responsible for returning disturbed areas to original condition where excavation for utilities has been required.

B. Cut and patch paved areas to match original surfaces.

C. Properly tamp backfill before finishing surfaces.

D. Concrete pavements and curbs shall be formed and poured to match adjacent areas.

E. Grass areas shall be sodded and maintained until established growth is achieved.

3.16 GUARANTEE

A. All work shall be guaranteed to be free from defects for a period of one year of operation from date of acceptance by the owner unless otherwise specified. Material and labor for first year warranty is to be provided.


C. Compressors and refrigeration system components shall be provided with a

5 year factory warranty. Material only for years 2 through 5 is required.

3.17 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


B. Store material in dry enclosures or under protective coverings out of way of work progress.

C. Handle so as to prevent damage to product or any surrounding material.


A. Manufacturers’ names are included herein to establish those suppliers who may provide products for this project subject to the requirements of the specifications. Although a manufacturer’s name may appear as an acceptable supplier it is not understood that a standard product is acceptable. Products must also meet the technical, performance, and physical requirements of the project as well as being named in the specification. Any deviations from this must be acknowledged at bid time by the supplier and he shall be solely responsible for any and all costs associated with the application of his product in the project.

B. A design cannot be prepared which accommodates the installation of all




January 30, 2015 suppliers and is not intended to do so. If certain modifications must be made to accommodate one particular suppliers equipment it shall be considered the contractors responsibility to arrange for such accommodations and be financially responsible for same.

3.19 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS/cad disk

A. At the completion of the work the contractor shall furnish a reproducible as-built drawings/CAD disk to the A/E for approval. The drawings shall indicate all work installed and its actual size and location. If acceptable, the

A/E will submit the as-built drawings to the owner as record drawings. If not acceptable, the A/E will return the drawing to the contractor to make corrections as required. The contractor will resubmit for approval.



A. All penetrations of Natatorium walls, fire walls, smoke walls, and floors by ducts, pipes, conduit, or wiring shall be sealed to prevent the flow of gasses or smoke.

B. The sealant shall be foamed in place between the penetrant and the adjacent floor or wall with DOW Corning RTV foam or equivalent by 3M,

Hilti, or Chase foam.

C. The installation shall meet the approval of the authority having jurisdiction.

D. Penetrations through rated surfaces shall have a UL rating equivalent to the adjacent surfaces.

E. All other penetrations of walls either above ceilings or exposed shall be closely sealed around the penetration with caulking or packing to prevent flow of air or sound through the wall.

3.21 CUTTING AND PATCHING INTERIOR SURFACES

A. Respective contractor shall install all hangers, supports, pipe sleeves in floors, walls, partitions, ceilings and roof slabs as construction progresses to permit their work to be built into place and to eliminate unnecessary cutting of construction work.

B. All cutting of concrete, or other material for the passage of piping and ductwork through floors, walls, partitions and ceiling shall be done by the




January 30, 2015 respective contractor where necessary to install his work. Respective contractor will close all such openings around piping, ductwork, and conduit with materials equivalent to that removed. All exposed surfaces shall be left in suitable condition for refinishing without further work.

C. Contractor shall patch and repair any existing openings created by the demolition work in floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings not being reused for the new construction.

3.22 INVERTS AND ELEVATIONS

A. Indicated inverts and elevations of existing utilities are approximate and based on the best information available.

B. Upon of award of contract, contractor shall verify in the field all such information and report any discrepancies before proceeding with work.

Contractor shall be responsible for extra work caused by his failure to verify inverts and elevations.

3.23 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS

A. Furnish and install final connections to equipment furnished in other parts of the specification or furnished by the owner. Provide drainage connections, vent connections, water connections, fuel gas connections, duct connections, gas connections to the fixtures or equipment. Plumbing connections shall include valved supplies and trapped waste connections.

3.24 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. The contractor shall be responsible for connecting new systems to existing systems.

B. Arrange for outages with the owner.

C. Contractor shall shut down and drain existing systems.

D. Contractor shall cut in, weld, solder, or thread, and make connections compatible with existing systems.

E. Provide new valves at connections to existing systems.

F. Contractor shall refill existing and fill new systems.

G. Contractor shall purge air from systems, both new and existing.

H. Contractor shall place existing systems back into operation.

I. Contractor shall repair and replace any insulation damaged or removed during connection procedures.




January 30, 2015

3.25 BOILER ROOM DRAWING

A. Mechanical contractor shall provide a 3/8" = 1'0" scale drawing of the

Mechanical Room showing all mechanical, ductwork, floor drains, plumbing, fire protection equipment and electrical equipment to exact scale with dimensions on pads, equipment, etc. Show two cross sections at important points.

B. Obtain information from other subs.

C. Submit for review and approval.

D. Submit to Harrisburg Department of L & I for boiler installation approval.

3.26 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Provide 3/8" = 1'-0" scale drawings showing all coordinated ductwork, piping, conduit, and equipment of all trades.

B. The sheet metal shop drawings may be used as the basis of these drawings.

C. Show ductwork, walls, beams, steel, drainage piping, domestic water piping, HVAC piping, sprinkler piping, light fixtures, electrical conduit and equipment.

D. Contact other disciplines and obtain information to identify fully coordinated systems.

E. Submit for review and approval to the A/E.

F. Provide all dimensional data and necessary clearances to other trades for installation of fixtures and equipment within casework and counter tops.

G. Work shall not proceed until coordination is completed and all conflicts, issues, sequences etc., are resolved.

3.27 WELDING


3.28 VEHICLES





January 30, 2015


A. Burning of debris on the site shall not be permitted. All debris, refuse, and waste shall be removed from the premises at regular intervals. No accumulation shall be permitted.

3.30 PROTECTION


B. Erect and maintain barricades, warning signs, and other protective means as may be directed by the owner for protection of all persons and property from injury or damage.

3.31 SCAFFOLDING


3.32 UTILITIES



C. Those services that are used during construction, but are to remain, shall be refurbished to as new condition before turning back to the owner.

3.33 CLEANUP



C. Clean and polish all plumbing fixtures.

D. Remove all trash and debris from the premises.


A. Contractor to coordinate all mounting heights with all trades and architect




January 30, 2015 prior to rough-in.

B. Maximum thermostat mounting height (top of thermostat) in accordance with ADA

1. Side reach: 48" A.F.F.

2. Forward reach: 48" A.F.F.


A. The contractor shall promptly correct work rejected by the engineer failing to conform to the requirements of the contract documents, whether discovered before or after substantial completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the engineer’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the contractor’s expense.


A. The following is a list of required shop drawings for the project. Not all items may be identified and it is the responsibility of the contractor to submit additional shop drawings where indicated in the specifications.

HVAC DATE

REC’D

ACTION DATE

REC’D

ACTION

COORDINATION DRAWINGS

BOILER

PUMPS

PIPING FLEX CONNECTION

SUCTION DIFFUSER

TRIPLE DUTY VALVE

AIR SEPARATOR

EXPANSION TANK




HVAC

GAUGES

THERMOMETERS

AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES

VALVES - ALL TYPES

STRAINERS

CHECK VALVES

PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE

STACK, BREECHING

PIPING

VIBRATION ISOLATION

INSULATION

A. Piping

B. Ductwork

C. Equipment

SHEET METAL DRAWINGS

BOILER ROOM DRAWINGS

CABINET UNIT HEATERS (HW)

FANS (EXHAUST)

GAS FIRED SPLIT SYSTEMS

FURNACES

FIRE DAMPERS

VOLUME DAMPERS

GRILLES, REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS

LOUVERS/ROOF CAPS

DATE

REC’D

STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR HVAC

ACTION DATE

REC’D

Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

ACTION

230500 - 20



HVAC DATE

REC’D

EQUIPMENT CURBS

AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE

CONTROL

A.

DEVICES

B.

WIRING DIAGRAMS

C.

SEQUENCES

TEST, BALANCE AND ADJUST

REPORT

AS-BUILT DRAWINGS/CAD DISK

WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES

OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE

MANUALS

INSTRUCTIONS

EMERGENCY AND MANUFACTURER

CONTACTS

END OF SECTION

ACTION DATE

REC’D

Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

ACTION




January 30, 2015

SECTION 23 05 48 - VIBRATION ISOLATION


NOTE: CONTRACTOR IS TO FURNISH AND INSTALL A VIBRATION ISOLATING

DEVICE ON ALL MACHINE, MOTOR, AND CIRCULATING PIECES OF

EQUIPMENT.

IF A VIBRATION ISOLATING DEVICE IS OMITTED FROM THE DRAWINGS, THE

CONTRACTOR IS TO MAKE AN ALLOWANCE TO INSTALL ONE.

1.01 REFERENCE


1.02 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to select, provide, and install vibration isolation devices as described herein and required for equipment on the project.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings of all isolators, rails, hangers, mountings, connectors, hoses, and anchors specified herein.



B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.


VIBRATION ISOLATION 230548 - 1



January 30, 2015

2.01 NEOPRENE PADS

A. Floor mounted air handling units or furnaces shall be mounted on neoprene waffle pads. Pads shall be 5/16" thick type "W" as manufactured by Mason

Industries Vibration Eliminator Company or Amber Booth.

B. Application: Floor mounted furnaces and A/C units of 2000 CFM or less.

2.02 NEOPRENE MOUNTINGS

A. Double deflection neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.35". All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered to avoid corrosion and have friction pads both top and bottom so they need not be bolted to the floor. Bolt holes shall be provided for these areas where bolting is required. On equipment such as small vent sets and close coupled pumps, steel rails shall be used above the mountings to compensate for the overhang.

B. Mountings shall be type ND or rails type DNR as manufactured by Mason

Industries, Inc. or equivalent by Vibration Eliminator Company or Amber

Booth.

C. Application: Base mounted pumps up to 5 Hp slab on grade, air handling units slab on grade.

2.03 SPRING MOUNTINGS

A. Spring type isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing and complete with 1/4" neoprene acoustical friction pads between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflections, compressed spring height and solid spring height.

B. Mountings shall be type SLF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. or equivalent by Vibration Eliminator Company or Amber Booth.

C. Application: Base mounted pumps not slab on grade and less than 5 Hp, base mounted pumps slab on grade 7 ½ HP and up. Air handling units not slab on grade.

2.04 SPRING AND NEOPRENE HANGERS




January 30, 2015

A. Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring and 0.3" deflection neoprene element in series. The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod insulation bushing that passes through the hanger box lower hole. Hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring.

Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include a scale drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree capability.

B. Hangers shall be type 30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. or equivalent by Vibration Eliminator Company or Amber Booth.

C. Application: Below 5 ton horizontal suspended air handling units, in-line exhaust fans.

2.05 PRE-COMPRESSED SPRING AND NEOPRENE HANGERS

A. Vibration hangers shall be spring and neoprene as described above, but they shall be pre-compressed to the rated deflection so as to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load.

Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale.

B. Hangers shall be type PC3ON as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. or equivalent by Vibration Eliminator Company or Amber Booth.

C. Application: Horizontal air handling units above 5 ton capacity.


3.01 NEOPRENE PADS

A. Cut pads of size to fit base area of equipment. Install between roof curb or floor and equipment base.

3.02 NEOPRENE MOUNTINGS

A. Neoprene mountings are for indoor application only. When the equipment




January 30, 2015 has a flush drain pan or tank on the bottom, they may be inverted so that the rectangular rubber covered steel baseplate provides support over a large area.

3.03 SPRING MOUNTINGS

A. Install units with spring mountings with a minimum of 1" static deflection and available 50 per cent travel to solid. Level units and adjust isolators for proper deflection.

B. Isolators to be selected by vibration isolating company engineers for critical applications.

C. Roof mounted equipment shall be mounted on roof curbs with galvanized spring mountings between curbs and equipment bases.

3.04 SPRING AND NEOPRENE HANGERS

A. Hangers shall have a maximum rated deflection of 1.18" for equipment 20 lbs. and under and 1.75" for equipment over 20 lbs.

B. Average neoprene deflection shall be between 0.35" and 0.4".

3.05 PRECOMPRESSED SPRING AND NEOPRENE HANGERS

A. Hangers shall have a maximum rated deflection of 1.18" for equipment 20 lbs. and under and 1.75" for equipment over 20 lbs.

B. Average neoprene deflection shall be between 0.35" and 0.4".

END OF SECTION




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, BALANCING AND ADJUSTING FOR HVAC


1.01 CONDITIONS

A. HVAC equipment shall be completely installed and in continuous operation prior to testing, balancing, and adjustment.

B. Test, balance, and adjust shall be performed when outside conditions approximate design conditions.

C. Make at least two inspections of the mechanical systems during construction to verify that balancing procedures may be accomplished.

D. Refer to Section 23 05 00 for additional requirements of this section.

E. Should corrective measures caused by faulty installation require retesting, adjusting, and balancing, such work shall be at no additional expense to the Owner.

F. A complete set of approved mechanical-equipment shop drawings shall be obtained from the Mechanical Contractor. A complete set of as-built mechanical drawings shall be provided by the Mechanical Contractor.

G. All TBA work, is to be performed in compliance with the Standard

Procedure Manual published by the TBA organization affiliated with the

Contractor.

H. Contractor to identify TB&A subcontractor within 30 days after award of

I.

Contractor.

Testing, Balancing and Adjusting contractor to coordinate and perform balancing of the HVAC systems with the mechanical contractor prior to ceilings being closed up and scaffolding being removed.

1.02 ENGINEER QUALIFICATIONS

A. Include proof of registration in the state of building location and record of at least five years of experience in the mechanical contracting industry engaged in HVAC testing, balancing, and adjusting.

B. The testing, balancing, and adjustment organization shall be a certified member of NEBB or AABC and all testing, balancing, and adjusting shall be in accordance with the associated standards. Such firm shall have at least

TESTING, BALANCING, AND ADJUSTING 230593 - 1



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 one certified TB&A supervisor.

1.03 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Contractor shall provide all necessary instrumentation, tools, ladders, etc. to complete his work.

B. Instrumentation shall be in accordance with AABC, NEBB, or SMACNA requirements and shall be calibrated to the accuracy standards demanded by these organizations. Copies of current calibration certificates shall be available to the Engineer on request.

C. Flow-measuring hoods (manufactured, not fabricated) will be acceptable for measurement of ceiling diffuser performance only.

D. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for safekeeping of all instrumentation during the course of work.

1.04 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCE

A. Contractor shall adjust all equipment in accordance with the capacities shown on the drawings, with permissible tolerances as follows:

Supply fans

Return exhaust fans

+5% to 10%

+5% to 10%

Diffusers/supply grilles

Return grilles

Exhaust grilles

1.05 SHEAVE CHANGE

0% to +10%

0% to -10%

0% to -10%

A. Allow for one sheave change for each of the HVAC systems to be tested and adjusted. Replacement sheave shall be furnished and installed by the mechanical contractor. Sheave shall be adjusted by the TBA contractor.


3.01 AIR SYSTEMS

A. Furnish all labor, materials, instruments, and equipment to test, adjust,




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 and balance systems in accord with the values shown on the drawings.

B. Provide total and static pressure readings, traverse at fan inlets and outlets.

C. Provide temperature measurements of inlets and outlets of HVAC units, DB and WB both heating and cooling.

D. Measure and record amps, rpm, at fans and HVAC units.

E. Provide two sets of data, one during design heating temperatures, and one during design cooling temperatures. (Allow for 2 passes for each heating and cooling season.)

F. Provide heating and air conditioning unit performance measurements determining total BTU's available during heating and cooling.

G. Measure quantity of outside air in CFM at minimum damper position.

H. Any holes or openings which were made for test readings are to be sealed.

I.

Repair any insulation disturbed by TB&A procedures.

Identify Total CFM as sum of diffusers, registers, and grilles for each supply, return, and exhaust system.

J. In all cases, air volumes shall be adjusted by means of manual dampers in the ductwork, not by integral dampers in the terminal outlets or inlets.

K. Duct damper positions shall be marked with permanent ink markers or black spray paint after the final setting has been made.

L. If the unit cannot reach design with furnished sheave, notify mechanical contractor to furnish and install a suitable sheave such that design can be reached.

3.02 WATER SYSTEMS

A. Furnish all material, labor, instruments, and equipment to test, adjust, and balance the systems in accordance with the values shown on the drawings.

B. Set and adjust GPM’s of terminal units to the values indicated.

C. Read pump pressures, GPM’s, amps, volts, and identify operating point on the impeller curve.

D. Contractor shall obtain the specified gpm requirement through all circulating pumps, primary and secondary coils, unit heaters, heat exchangers and radiation by adjustment to the specified pressure drop shown on the equipment schedules.

E. Measurement of inlet and outlet pressures shall be made with needle-stem pressure gauge inserted in the test plugs on each piece of the equipment.

F. Contractor shall adjust all gpm through flow-meter readings in his final report.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

G. Allow for 2 passes for each pump and HW terminal unit.

3.03 CEILING ACCESS

A. As pertains purely to T&A work, Contractor shall be fully responsible for removal and reinstallation of ceiling tile and replacement of any tile damaged by T&A technicians.

3.04 SUBMISSION OF REPORTS

A. Submit reports on approved forms.

B. Submit three reports to A/E for review and acceptance.

C. Report shall be certified by an AABC or NEBB member and bear the seal of the organization.

END OF SECTION




January 30, 2015

SECTION 23 07 00 - HVAC INSULATION AND COVERING


1.01 REFERENCE


B. Insulation to be in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1.

1.02 SCOPE

A. The work included in this specification consists of furnishing all labor, materials, accessories, and equipment necessary for the insulation of all heating and air conditioning systems. Said work shall be completed in strict accordance with the insulation section of the specifications and applicable drawings.

B. All work is subject to the terms and conditions of the contract.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings which indicate complete material data, a list of materials proposed, and indicate thickness and density of material for individual services.

B. Submit fabrication instructions for pipe fitting and valve insulation.

C. Submit manufacturers joining recommendations for butt joints and longitudinal seams.


A. Install insulation in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Insulation shall be installed by skilled workmen regularly engaged in insulation work.

C. Protect insulation and covering until accepted in place by the owner.

INSULATION AND COVERING 230700 - 1



January 30, 2015


2.01 HOT WATER PIPING

A. Includes;

1. Heating Hot Water Supply

2. Heating Hot Water Return

B. Material; Fiberglass bonded with resins to form circular pipe sleeves and pipe covering segments with factory applied all service jacket.

C. Fire Safety; U.L. listing flame spread rating of 25 and smoke developed rating of 50.

D. Thermal conductivity of 0.276 at 90 degrees F.

E. Thickness per ASHRAE STD. 90.1-2010:

Piping System Types: PIPE SIZES / INSULATION THICKNESS

Temp Up to 1" Up to 1.5" Up to 4" Up to 8" 8" & Up

1. Hot Water a) Heating

HW

140-200 1.5" 1.5" 2" 2" 2"

F. Joints; Pressure sealing lap strips for longitudinal joints and minimum 3" pressure sealing butt strips for circumferential joints.

G. Valves and Fittings; Fiberglass insulation of same thickness as pipe with pre-molded fitting covers.

H. Contractor shall insulate all exposed domestic water and drainage piping under all handicapped lavatories and sinks with pre-formed insulation kit with PVC jacket similar to Lav,Guard as manufactured by Truebro. There shall be no sharp or abrasive surfaces under the handicapped lavatories.

Manufacturer: Johns-Manville Micro-Lok, Knauf Lo Smoke PVC. I.

2.02 COLD WATER PIPING

A. Includes;

1. Air handling unit and/or fan/coil condensate drains: 1/2" insulation

2. PVC piping in plenum ceilings: 1" insulation




January 30, 2015

B. Material; Fiberglass bonded with resins to form circular pipe sleeves with factory applied jacket of kraft paper bonded to aluminum foil, reinforced with fiberglass yarn. Vapor barrier.


50 or less and a fuel contributed rating of 50 as tested by ASTM E 84-75.

D. Thermal Conductivity; 0.25 at 100 degrees.

E. Joints; Pressure sealing lap strips for longitudinal joints and 3 inch wide wrapping strips for butt joints. Strips shall be sealed with an adhesive meeting NFPA 90 25-50 code such as:

1.

2.

CMC17-465

H. B. Fuller Co., Foster Products Division 85-20

As an option the contractor may utilize pressure sensitive butt strips.

F. Valves and Fittings; Fiberglass insulation of same thickness as pipe with pre-molded fitting covers. Seal edges of fitting cover with vapor barrier mastic adhesive or vapor barrier strip tape which shall overlap the insulation and fitting cover by 2 inches.

G. Manufacturer: Johns-Manville Micro-Lok HP, Knauf Proto Lo Smoke PVC.

2.04 DUCT INSULATION - INTERIOR - CONCEALED

A. Includes: All supply and outside air ductwork.

1. Supply ductwork in unconditioned spaces.

2. Return ductwork in unconditioned spaces.

NOTE: Refer to Section 23 31 13 which defines Lining Requirements.

Insulation indicated is in addition to internal lining.

B. Material; Flexible vapor seal duct insulation with foil scrim kraft facing consisting of aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass scrim to a U.L. rated kraft, 0.75 lb. density, .02 perms.


50 or less as tested by ASTM E 84-75.

D. In conditioned space thickness is 2" inches, equaling an installed “R” value of 4.2. In unconditioned space/outdoors, thickness is 3", equaling an installed “R” value of 8.3.

E. Application; All joints shall be sealed with a 3 inch wide strip of same material applied with H. B. Fuller Co., Foster Products Division 85-75. For ducts over 18" wide insulation shall be secured on bottom at 18" centers to reduce sagging.

F. Manufacturer: Johns-Manville 800 Series Flexible Spin-Glass.




January 30, 2015

2.05 DUCT INSULATION - INTERIOR - EXPOSED

A. Same as above accept 6 PCF density with FSK facing, 0.02 perms.

B. Secured with fasteners, 2 rows per side at 12" centers.

2.06 DUCT INSULATION - EXTERIOR

A. Includes;

1. Supply ductwork exposed to the outside.

2. Return ductwork exposed to the outside.

B. Material; Rigid vapor seal duct insulation board with foil scrim kraft facing consisting of aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass scrim to a U.L. rated kraft, 6 lb. density.



D. Thermal Conductivity; 0.24 at 75 degrees F (R value: 8.3).

E. Thickness; 2 inches.

F. Application; All joints shall be sealed with at least a 3 inch wide strip of same material applied with H. B. Fuller Co., Foster Products Division

85-75. Apply in a downward direction to shed water.

G. The jacket shall be secured in place with loops of No. 16 copper clad wire on not greater than 4 inch centers or 1/2 inch x .015 aluminum bands on not greater than 6 inch centers.

H. Provide exterior waterproof and watertight enclosure. EPDM roofing material applied to exterior insulation lapped and sealed per manufacturer’s instructions.

2.07 EQUIPMENT INSULATION

A. Includes;

1. HVAC Units in Attic Spaces

2. Supply fans in attic spaces

3. Return fans in attic spaces

4. Water storage tanks

5.

6.

Air Separators

Pumps

B. Material; Spun glass inorganic glass fiber insulation bonded by a thermosetting resin with aluminum foil reinforced with fiber glass yarn and laminated to a fire-resistant kraft. 6 lb. density. Provide vapor barrier on




January 30, 2015 all equipment that will have cold surfaces.



D. Thermal conductivity; 0.24 at 100 degrees F.

E. Application; All joints shall be sealed with a 3 inch wide strip of same material applied with H. B. Fuller Co., Foster Products Division 85-75.

F. Manufacturer: Johns-Manville 800 Series Non-Flexible Spin-Glass or approved equal.

G. Thickness: 1 1/2" on equipment in mechanical rooms and in ceiling spaces, 3" on equipment in unconditioned attic spaces.

2.08 REFRIGERANT PIPING

A. Includes;

1.

2.

Refrigerant lines - interior

Refrigerant lines - exterior

B. Material; Elastomeric thermal insulation with exposed closed cell structure, pipe size 1 ½" or less = 1", pipe size larger than 1 ½" = 1 ½" (interior and exterior).



D. Thermal conductivity not to exceed .25 BTU per inch/h-Ft

2

-°F.

E. Joints; Butt joints and seams are to be sealed with contact adhesive as per manufacturer’s specifications. Seams are to be sealed with an adhesive meeting NFPA 90 25-50 such as CMC 17-465, H. B. Fuller Co., Foster

Products Division 85-20 or approved equal. As an option the contractor may utilize pressure sensitive butt strips. Seal all edges.

F. Manufacturer: Armacell AP Armaflex or approved equal.

2.09 BREECHING

A. Includes; All breeching

B. Material; High temperature asbestos free molded rigid insulation that is insoluble in water.

C. Fire safety; Flame spread rating of 0 and a smoke density rating of 0 as tested by ASTM E 84-75.

D. Thermal conductivity; 0.39 at 400 degrees F.

E. Thickness; 2" for all breeching.

F. Manufacturer: Johns-Manville Thermo-12 or approved equal.




January 30, 2015

2.10 MANUFACTURERS

A. Johns-Manville, Certain Teed, Owens/Corning, Knauf, Armstrong.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install until all piping systems and ductwork are tested.

B. Do not install until the building is closed in.

C. Perform work at ambient and equipment temperatures as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer.

D. Work in the area which may damage the insulation shall have been completed prior to the start of insulating. The owner shall not be responsible for subsequent charges arising out of damage to insulation caused by work progressing in the area after insulation has been installed.

E. All insulation shall be continuous through wall, ceilings and floor openings except where fire safe materials are required.

F. Insulation on all cold surfaces must be applied with a continuous unbroken vapor seal. Hangers, supports, anchors, etc., that are secured directly to cold surfaces shall be adequately insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation.

G. Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports, and other protrusions.

H. Secure with tacks or tape as required.

I. Install inserts on all hangers. Inserts between the pipe and pipe hanger shall consist of rigid pipe insulation of thickness equal to the adjoining insulation and shall be provided with vapor barrier where required. Insert length shall be 10" long for pipes up to and including 2-1/2" and 12" for pipes over 2-1/2".

J. Pipe insulation shall have metal shields. The shields shall be installed between hanger support and the pipe insulation. Shield shall be formed to fit the insulation and shall extend up to the center line of the pipe. Shield shall be 10" long for pipes up to and including 2-1/2" and 12" for pipes over

2-1/2"

K. Repair separation of joints or cracking of insulation due to thermal movement or poor workmanship.




January 30, 2015

L. All insulation shall be secured at sufficient intervals to prevent sagging, gaps, or spaces from occurring. Any repairs necessary for 1 year due to improper installation shall be provided by Contractor at no cost to Owner.

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Pipe, duct, and equipment shall be clean, oil free, and dry prior to the application of insulation.

END OF SECTION




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

SECTION 23 09 03

SAINT JOSEPH’S UNIVERSITY

BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.00 SAINT JOSEPH’S UNIVERSITY REQUIREMENTS

A.

No additional software shall be required to operate, program, or troubleshoot equipment.

B.

All thermostats shall be programmable to provide a +/- 3 degree adjustment by the occupant from the Building Automation System setpoint. Thermostats shall not have occupancy override unless otherwise noted in the specifications.

C.

Samples (snapshots) of the graphics shall be included in the ATC submittal.

D.

All building alarms must be sent to the local building alarm page and campus alarm page accessed from the campus site plan. Generic alarms are not acceptable and must indicate the reason the alarm has been generated.

E.

The ATC contractor shall provide two (4 hr.) training sessions – one during the heating

(winter) season and one during the cooling (summer) season.

F.

The user shall have the ability to adjust scheduling blocks for unit, floor (residential halls only), building, and the entire campus in addition to the individual zones. (i.e., occupied/unoccupied).

G.

An icon in the Navigation Bar shall display the pdf’s of as-built control diagrams with sequence of operations for all systems within the building/system being viewed. This shall open in a pop-up window.

H.

Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for a complete and operating control system to be integrated with Saint Joseph’s University Campus

Honeywell Tridium System, utilizing Direct Digital Controls as shown on the drawings and as described herein. Drawings are diagrammatic only.

I.

Saint Joseph’s University shall be capable of remotely controlling, monitoring, accessing all equipment and systems controls described in this section and the drawings from their

Central Facilities Office on Main Campus. All equipment and systems shall match and

J.

be compatible with the Campus Honeywell Tridium System.

Contractor to obtain pricing from Saint Joseph’s University controls vendor (and include in his bid) for integration work between this building and the campus Honeywell Tridium

System and provide standard campus mapping and graphics integration. Contractor to match SJU Campus graphics and standards.

K.

Programmed into the Server, passwords will need to be issued by SJU to the contractor prior to programming. No additional users shall be created by vendor.

L.

Contractor to provide a hyperlink to the SJU Campus Map to open up the building floor plan showing areas under control (via the BAS).


15900 - 1



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

M.

All wiring to be plenum rated in concealed areas and in EMT conduit where exposed or subject to damage.

N.

All CAT 6 data wiring must be installed by a SJU approved telecommunications contractor. Controls contractor is responsible for obtaining the services of the telecommunications contractor for any required data drops.

O.

Provide emergency shut down for all fan forced systems on emergency shut down page on BAS.

P. Additional Graphics Requirements.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Building floor plan display should be color coded for each particular zone. (ie

AHU zone: Area should be shaded differently than other zones.) Thermostat locations shall be identified.

Building floor plan to display current temperatures of those rooms.

Notification of a “blinking” red light shall be displayed when an area is in alarm.

If a controller is offline or lost power, a default value of last known value should not be displayed. It should be defined as “offline” and an alarm should be programmed into the system to notify that system is “offline.” Unit temperature display shall become yellow.

From the building area floor plan graphic, there should be hyperlink created that 5.

6. allows one to proceed to HVAC equipment page for equipment serving that area.

Equipment should have an automated graphic display showing a status of equipment. This should be confirmed by both status and command values.

The dampers should be displayed in the position that they are physically in. 7.

8.

9.

Set points should be displayed on the graphics.

Ability to override commands of valves, dampers, fans to be provided to allow system corrections and/or troubleshooting.

10. All programmed schedules to be accessible from the main floor plan page. Allow for click and change ability to modify schedules based on calendar year changes.

11. Pages shall have hyperlinks to navigate to campus home page, building home page, and adjacent floors within the building.

12. In lieu of building specific outdoor temperature and humidity sensors, BAS shall reference the National Weather Service, Philadelphia International Airport. This does not apply to equipment with integral OA Temp/RH sensors.

1.01 SUMMARY

A.

Scope: Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment for a complete and operating Building

Automation System (BAS) utilizing Direct Digital Controls as shown as drawings and as described herein. Drawings are diagrammatic only. All controllers furnished in this section shall communicate on a peer-to-peer open protocol bus (s) such as LonTalk or

BacNet.

1.

The intent of the specification is to provide to the owner a BAS system(s) running the Niagara AX ™ open NICS framework and be truly “open” at all levels.

“Open” by definition includes “Sourcing” and “Product,” and “Service” and

“Expansion.” Any contractor or integrator “certified” on Niagara AX platform must be able to work on any device or network controller or supervisor without


15900 - 2



2.

3.

Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 having to use other vendors or software to access parts of the network. This can best be described as an “open source,” “open protocol,” “open controller,” “open supervisor” system with “open maintenance” and “system expansion.”

BAS Systems that meet “Open definition”: a.

Manufacturers: Honeywell Inc. b.

Control Contractor Requirement:

1) Honeywell ACI or ACS – Certified Contractor.

2) Minimum of (2) certified WEBS AX employees.

3) Minimum of (5) WEBS ax installations with system supervisor c.

interface.

4) Located within 100 miles of project site.

Preapproved Honeywell ACI and ACS contractors for WEBs-AX™

“installation.”

Open NIC Statement

Niagara

AX includes a licensing model that provides OEMs with the ability to define the various levels and types of Niagara interoperability their product will support. There are two primary interactions the NICs address – the sharing of data between stations (JACEs – WEBs-AX™ and Supervisors) and the ability for a tool (i.e.,Work Place AX) to engineer a station.

The NICS provides a structure (or schema) that OEMs can use to define the various levels and types of Niagara interdependability their products will support. The NICs definitions are contained in the license file which is checked by a station or tool when it starts up.

Every licensed station and tool has a (BrandID). This field holds a text descriptor that the OEM chooses as the identifier its product line and each station can have only one BrandID entry.

Station Compatibility “In”

The field is a list of brands that this local station will allow Niagara AX™ data to come in from – “this is the list of brands that can accept data from.”

Station Compatibility “Out”

This Field is a list of brands that this local station will allow Niagara AX™ data to be shared with.

Total Compatibility “In”

This field is a list of brands that this station will allow to be connected to it for engineering of its applications.

Total Compatibility “Out”

This field is a list of brands that this tool is allowed to connect to and engineer.


15900 - 3



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

For a BAS System(s) running Niagara AX™ from NICs framework and be truly

“Open” at all levels …

Example: No connectivity restrictions:

The station and tool “NICs” would be as follows:

Property Value

Station Compatibility In

Station Compatibility Out

Total Compatibility In

Total Compatibility Out

All

All

All

All

5.

6.

4.

7.

8.

System architecture shall fully support a multi-vendor environment and be able to integrate third party systems via existing vendor protocols including, as a minimum, LonTalk, BACnet, and Modbus. Non LonTalk communication protocol for specific pieces of equipment must be approved on a case by case basis.

System architecture shall provide secure Web access using MS Internet Explorer from any computer on the owner’s LAN.

All control devices furnished with this Section shall be programmable directly from the Niagara-AX™ Workbench upon completion of this project. The use of configurable or programmable controllers that require additional software tools for post-installation maintenance shall not be acceptable.

Any control vendor that must provide additional BAS server software shall be unacceptable. Only systems that utilize the WEBs Niagara AX™ Framework shall satisfy the requirements of this section.

The BAS server shall host all graphic files for the control system. All graphics and navigation schemes for this project shall match those that are on the

9. existing campus Niagara-AX framework server

OPEN NIC STATEMENTS - All NiagaraAX software licenses shall have the following NiCS: “accept.station.in=*”; “accept.station.out=*”and

“accept.wb.in=*”and “accept.wb.out=*”. All open NIC statements shall follow Niagara Open NIC specifications

10. All JACE hardware products used on this project must be Made in the USA or come through the Tridium Richmond, VA shipping facility. JACE hardware products not meeting these requirements will not be allowed.

B. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for a complete and operating control system to be integrated with Saint Joseph’s University Campus

Honeywell Tridium System, utilizing Direct Digital Controls as shown on the drawings and as described herein. Drawings are diagrammatic only.

C. Saint Joseph’s University shall be capable of remotely controlling, monitoring, accessing all equipment and systems controls described in this section and the drawings from their

Central Facilities Office on Main Campus. All equipment and systems shall match and be compatible with the Campus Honeywell Tridium System.

D. Contractor to obtain pricing from Saint Joseph’s University controls vendor (and include in his bid) for integration work between this building and the campus Honeywell Tridium


15900 - 4



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

System and provide standard campus mapping and graphics integration. Contractor to match SJU Campus graphics and standards.

E. All control wiring regardless if it is line or low voltage shall be the ATC contractor’s electrical subcontractor responsibility. ATC contractor to allow for electrical contractor compensation for any line voltage work.

F. Drawings of the BAS network and associated systems are diagrammatic only and any apparatus not shown, but required to make the system operative to the complete satisfaction of the owner/engineer shall be furnished and installed without additional cost.

G. All wiring to be plenum rated in concealed areas and in EMT conduit where exposed or subject to damage.

H. Programmed into the Server, passwords will need to be issued by SJU to the contractor prior to programming.

I.

J.

Contractor to provide a hyperlink to the SJU Campus Map to open up the building floor plan showing areas under control (via the BAS).

This contractor shall conform to the General and Supplementary Conditions Provisions under Division 1 of the Specifications. (where applicable)

K. This contractor shall conform to the Specifications Section 15000: Mechanical General

Provisions.

L. Approved Manufacturers: Honeywell, Vykon

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A.

The entire BAS shall be comprised of interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers communicating via LonMark™/LonTalk™ and/or BACnet™ communication protocols to a Network Area Controller (NAC). Temperature Control System products shall be by approved manufacturer that meet and fully comply with the intent of Sections 1.1, A.1.

B.

The BAS shall consist of controllers, sensors, thermostats, control valves, dampers and operators, indicating devices, interface equipment and other apparatus and accessories required to operate mechanical systems, and perform functions specified.

C. The BAS shall be comprised of Network Area Controller(s) (NAC) within the facility.

The NAC shall connect to the owner’s local or wide area network, depending on configuration. Access to the systems, either locally in this building or remotely from a control site or sites, shall be accomplished through standard WEB browsers, supported

MS Internet Explorer via Internet and/or local area network. Each NAC shall communicate to LonMark™/LonTalk™ (ILC) and/or BACnet™ (IBC) controllers and other open protocol system/devices provided under Division 15, Division 16, etc.

D. The BAS as provided in this Division shall be based on a hierarchical architecture incorporating the Niagara AX Frameware™. All control devices furnished shall be programmable directly from Tridium AX™ Workbench, WEBs Station AX™ or WEB

Pro AX™ upon completion of this project. WEBs-AX™ “open” license embedded user interface “UI.”

E. All wireless equipment must be pre-approved by SJU IT Department.

1.03 SPECIFICATION NOMENCLATURE - Acronyms used in this specification are as follows:


15900 - 5



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

Actuator Control device that opens or closes valve or damper in response to control signal.

AI

AO

Analog

Analog Input

Analog Output

Continuously variable state over stated range of values

BAS

DDC

Discrete

DI

DO

FC

Building Automation System

Direct Digital Control

Binary or digital state

Discrete Input

Discrete Output

Failed Closed position of control device or actuator.

Devices move to closed position on loss of control signal or

FO energy source.

Fail open (position of control device or actuator). Device moves to open position on loss of control signal or energy

GUI source.

Graphical User Interface

HVAC Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning

IDC

ILC

Interoperable Digital Controller

Interoperable Lon Controller

LAN Local Area Network

Modulating Movement of a control device through an entire range of values, proportional to an infinitively variable input value.

Motorized Control device with actuator

NAC

NC

Network Area Controller

Normally closed position of switch after control signal is removed or normally closed position of manually operated

NO valves or dampers.

Normally open position of switch after control signal is removed; or the open position of a controlled valve or damper after the control signal is removed; or the usual position of a manually operated valve.

OSS Operating System Server, host for system graphics, alarms, trends, etc.

Operator Same as actuator

PC Personal Computer

Peer-to-Peer Mode of communication between controllers in which each device connected to network has equal status and each

P

PI share its database values with all other devices connected to network.

Proportional control; control mode with continuous linear relationship between observed input signal and final controlled output element.

Proportional-Integral control, control mode with continuous proportional output plus additional change in output based


15900 - 6



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

PICS

PID on both amount and duration of change in controller variable (reset control).

BACnet Product Interoperability Compliance Statement.

Proportional-Integral-Derivative control, control mode with continuous correction of final controller output element versus input signal based on proportional error, its time history (reset) and rate at which it’s changing (derivative).

Analog or discrete instrument with addressable database Point value.

WAN Wide Area Network

TCS Temperature Control Systems

FMCS Facility Management Control System

CD

NICS

Compact Disc

NIAGARA AX™ Compatibility Statement – see Part 1.1.3

IBC Interoperable BACnet Controller

I/O Points AI, AO, DI, DO

ACI Honeywell designation acronym: Authorized Control

Integrator.

ACS

BCS

WBI

Honeywell designation acronym: Automation Control

Specialist

Honeywell designation acronym: (See ACS)

WEB Browser Interface

POT

PMI

OOT

ASD

ISO-9001

Portable Operator’s Terminal

Power Measurement Interface

Object Oriented Technology

Honeywell Designation: Authorized System Distributor

Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development,

Production, Installation and Servicing.

PEC

ASC

AUC

SNC

Programmable Equipment Controllers

Application Specific Controllers

Advance Unitary Controllers

System Network Controller

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer

OBDB Open Database Connectivity

SQL Structured Query Language

1.04 DIVISION OF WORK

A. The BAS contractor shall be responsible for all controllers (IDC and IBC), control devices, control panels, controller programming, controller programming software, controller input/output and power wiring and controller network wiring.

B. The BAS contractor shall be responsible for the Network Area Controller(s) (NAC), software and programming of the NAC, graphical user interface software (GUI), development of all graphical screens, Web Browser pages, setup of schedules, logs and


15900 - 7



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 alarms, LonWorks network management and connection of the NAC to the local or Wide

Area Network.

1.05 AGENCY AND CODE APPROVALS

A.

All products of the BAS shall be provided with the following agency approvals.

Verification that the approvals exist for all submitted products shall be provided on request, with the submittal package. Systems or products not currently offering the following approvals are not acceptable.

1.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC), Rules and Regulations,

Volume II – July 1986 Part 15 Class A Radio Frequency Devices

2.

3.

4.

FCC, Part 15, Subpart J, Class A Computing Devices.

UL 504 – Industrial Control Equipment

UL 506 – Specialty Transformers

5.

UL 910 – Test Method for Fire and Smoke Characteristics of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Used in Air-Handling Spaces

6.

7.

8.

UL 916 – Energy Management Systems All

UL 1449 – Transient Voltage Suppression

Standard Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical –

Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts.

9.

EIA/ANSI 232-E – Interface Between Data Technical Equipment and

Data Circuit Terminal Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data

Interchange.

10.

EIA 455 – Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables,

Transducers, Connecting and Terminating Devices.

11.

IEEE C62.41 – Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

12.

IEEE 142- Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and

Commercial Power Systems

13. NEMA 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (SIC)

14. NEMA ICS 1 – Industrial Control Systems

15. NEMA ST 1 – Specialty Transformers

16. NCSBC Compliance, Energy Performance of Control System shall meet or surpass the requirements of ASHRAE/IESNA 90l.1 – 1999

1.06 SOFTWARE OWNERSHIP

A.

The owner shall have full ownership and full access rights for all network management, operating system server, engineering and programming software required for the ongoing maintenance and operation of the BAS.

1.07 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. BAS Contractor shall conform to the general and supplemental condition provisions under Division 15000 and this specification.


15900 - 8



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

1.08 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING AND SHIPPING TO OEM FACTORY.

A.

Provide factory shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device.

Maintain cartons through shipping, storage, and handling as required to prevent equipment damage. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from the weather.

B.

Factory mounted Components: Where control devices are specified in this section or other specifications such as (equipment) to be factory mounted, the BAS shall arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment manufacturer. He will have responsibility of

“tagging” control hardware prior to shipping if requested by equipment supplier. The

BAS contractor will have the option of either down-loading program(s) prior to shipping or installing programs after mechanical equipment has been installed at site, unless specific instructions are specified under 1.5C Equipment Interface.


A.

Single source Responsibility of BAS.

1.

The BAS Contractor shall be responsible for the complete installation and proper operations of the control system specified.

The control system contractor shall exclusively be in regular and customary business of design, installation and service of computerized building management systems similar in size and

2.

3.

complexity to the system specified. Subcontracting the “Single Service

Responsibility” tasks to others covering any of the following: design and submission, graphics, software programming, field check, demonstrating operating compliance and warranty including using Automation System

Distributor is not accepted.

The Control System Contractor shall have a full service DDC office within 50 miles of the project site. This office shall be staffed with applications’ engineers, software engineers, and field technicians. This office shall maintain parts inventory and shall have all testing and diagnostic equipment to support their work, as well as staff trained in the use of this equipment.

The manufacturers of the BAS digital controllers shall, if necessary, provide documentation supporting compliance with ISO-9001.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

BAS SERVER & WEB BROWSER GUI

2.01 SYSTEM OVERVIEW


15900 - 9



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

A. Saint Joseph’s University currently has a BAS server based on Niagara-AX framework.

The BAS Contractor shall integrate with this existing server and provide a uniform interface that matches the existing graphic and navigation.

B. The BAS Contractor shall provide system software based on server/thin-client architecture, designed around the open standards of web technology. The BAS server shall communicate using Ethernet and TCP/IP. Server shall be accessed using a web browser over Owner intranet and remotely over the Internet.

C. The intent of the thin-client architecture is to provide the operator(s) complete access to the BAS system via a web browser. The thin-client web browser Graphical User

Interface (GUI) shall be browser and operating system agnostic, meaning it will support

Microsoft and Firefox browsers, and Windows as well as non-Window operating systems. No special software, other than free public domain programs such as “JAVA

VIRTUAL MACHINE” shall be required to be installed on PC’s used to access the BAS via a web browser.

D. The BAS server software must support at least the following server platforms (Windows, and/or Linux). The BAS server software shall be developed and tested by the manufacturer of the system stand-alone controllers and network controllers/routers.

E. The web browser GUI shall provide a completely interactive user interface and must offer and be configured with the following features as a minimum:

1.

Trending.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Scheduling.

Electrical demand limiting.

Duty Cycling.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Download Memory to field devices.

Real time ‘live’ Graphic Programs.

Tree Navigation.

Parameter change of properties.

Setpoint Adjustments.

10.

Alarm/Event Information.

11.

Configuration of operators.

12.

Execution of global commands.

13. Add, delete, and modify graphics and displayed data

F. Software Components: All software shall be the most current version. All software components of the BAS system software shall be provided and installed as part of this project .BAS software components shall include:

G. BAS Server Database: The BAS server software shall utilize a JAVA Database

Connectivity (JDBC) compatible database such as: MS SQL 8.0, Oracle 8i or IBM DB2,

BAS systems written to Non-Standard and/or Proprietary databases are NOT acceptable.

H. Database Open Connectivity: The BAS server database shall allow real time access of

I. data via the following standard mechanisms:

1.

2.

3.

Open protocol standard like SOAP

OLE/OPC (for Microsoft Client’s/Server platform only)

Import/Export of the database from or to XML (Extensible Mark-up Language)

The installed system shall provide secure password access to all features, functions and data contained in the overall BAS.


15900 - 10



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

J. Communication Protocol(s): The native protocol of the BAS server software shall be

TCP/IP over Ethernet. Proprietary protocols over TCP/IP are NOT acceptable.

K. Thin Client – Web Browser Based : The GUI shall be thin client or browser based and shall meet the following criteria:

1.

Web Browser’s for PC’s: Only the latest version of Microsoft/Firefox will be required as the GUI, and a valid connection to the server network. No installation of any custom software shall be required on the operator’s GUI workstation/client. Connection shall be over an intranet or the Internet.

2.

Secure Socket Layers: Communication between the Web Browser GUI and BAS server shall offer encryption using 128-bit-encryption technology within Secure

Socket Layers (SSL). Communication Protocol shall be Hyper-Text Transfer

Protocol (HTTP)

2.02 WEB BROWSER GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE

A.

Web Browser Navigation: The Thin Client web browser GUI shall provide a comprehensive user interface. Using a collection of web pages, it shall be constructed to

“feel” like a single application, and provide a complete and intuitive mouse/menu driven operator interface. It shall be possible to navigate through the system using a web browser to accomplish requirements of this specification. The Web Browser GUI shall

(as a minimum) provide for navigation, and for display of animated graphics, schedules, alarms/events, live graphic programs, active graphic setpoint controls, configuration menus for operator access, reports, and reporting actions for events.

B.

Login: On launching the web browser and selecting the appropriate domain name or IP address, the operator shall be presented with a login page that will require a login name and password. Navigation in the system shall be dependent on the operator’s role privileges, and geographic area of responsibility.

C.

Navigation: Navigation through the GUI shall be accomplished by clicking on appropriate building on a campus site plan.

1. Upon navigating to the site, the page shall be broken into two areas, a Navigation

Bar and General Area.

D.

Navigation Bar: The Navigation Bar shall provide General information of the site and basic navigation functions. It is to be located along the top of the page and shall display the following.

1.

2.

General information such as current time, outdoor temperature/humidity, building name, and page name.

Navigation information that shall be provided is link back to site plan, to site histories, site specific alarm panel, building schedules, and the sites main home page. a. b.

Alarm Panel: This shall display the current number of unacknowledged alarms for the site and when selected, open the alarm panel in a popup window.

Histories: This shall display the histories for the current site being viewed and open in a popup window.


15900 - 11



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 c. Sequence of Operation: This shall display the sequence of operations for all equipment within the site being viewed. This shall open in a pop-up window.

E.

General Area: The general area is the main display area for the site. It shall contain information such as floor plans and equipment details.

1. Floor Plans: The floor plan shall be created from CAD backgrounds and shall provide a general overview of the building floors that shows building room

2. numbers and corresponding space temperatures and access to the equipment pages.

Equipment pages: The views of equipment shall either be provided in a popup window or on the main general area depending on size of graphic need. a. It shall display a general layout of the equipment and display all points created for the equipment. The user shall also have access to set points and be able to adjust with a simple click. Refer to section 2.04 for additional user adjustment requirements.

F.

Action Pane: The Action Pane shall provide several functional views for each HVAC or mechanical/electrical subsystem specified. A functional view shall be accessed by clicking on the corresponding button.

1.

Graphics: Using graphical format suitable for display in a web browser, graphics shall include aerial building/campus views, color building floor-plans, equipment drawings, active graphic setpoint controls, web content, and other valid HTML elements. The data on each graphic page shall automatically refresh.

2.

Properties: Shall include graphic controls and text for the following: Locking or overriding objects, demand strategies, and any other valid data required for setup.

Changes made to the properties pages shall require the operator to depress an

3.

‘accept/cancel’ button.

Schedules: Shall be used to create, modify/edit and view schedules based on the systems geographical hierarchy (using the navigation bar).

4.

Alarms: Shall be used to view alarm information geographically (using the navigation bar), acknowledge alarms, sort alarms by category, actions and verify

5.

reporting actions.

Trends: Shall be used to display associated trend and historical data, modify

6.

colors, date range, axis and scaling.

Logic – Live Graphic Programs: Shall be used to display ‘live’ graphic programs of the control algorithm, (micro block programming) for the mechanical/electrical

7.

system selected in the navigation tree.

Other actions such as Print, Help, Command, and Logout shall be available via a dropdown window.

G.

Color Graphics: The Web Browser GUI shall make extensive use of color in the graphic pane to communicate information related to set points and comfort. Animated .gifs or jpgs, vector scalable, active setpoint graphic controls shall be used to enhance usability.

Graphic tools used to create Web Browser graphics shall be non-proprietary and conform to the following basic criteria:

1.

Display Size: The GUI workstation software shall graphically display in 1024 by

768 pixels 24 bit True Color.


15900 - 12



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

2.

3.

General Graphic: General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local landmarks

Color Floor Plans: Floor plan graphics shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in a range of colors based on temperature. Difference from set point Red = temperature above set point; Blue = temperature below set

4.

point; additionally, Yellow = lost communication, Dark Red = alarm as selected by Owner. Provide a visual display of temperature relative to their respective set points. The colors shall be updated dynamically as a zone’s actual comfort condition changes.

Mechanical Components: Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of components. Selected I/O points being controlled or monitored for each piece of equipment shall be displayed with the appropriate engineering units. Animation shall be used for rotation or moving mechanical components to

5.

indicate status of equipment.

Minimum System Color Graphics: Color graphics shall be selected and displayed via a web browser for the following: a.

Each piece of equipment monitored or controlled including each terminal b.

unit.

Each building c.

Each floor and zone controlled

H.

Hierarchical Schedules: Utilizing the Navigation Bar displayed in the web browser GUI, an operator (with password access) shall be able to define a Normal (occupied/ unoccupied), holiday or override schedule for an individual piece of equipment or room, or choose to apply a hierarchical schedule to the entire system, site or floor area. For example, Independence Day ‘Holiday’ for every level in the system would be created by clicking at the top of the geographic hierarchy defined in the Navigation Bar. No further operator intervention would be required and every control module in the system would be automatically downloaded with the ‘Independence Day’ Holiday. All schedules that affect the system/area/equipment highlighted in the Navigation Bar shall be shown in a summary schedule table and graph.

1.

Schedules: Schedules shall comply with the LonWorks and Bacnet standards,

(Schedule Object, Calendar Object, Weekly Schedule property and Exception

Schedule property) and shall allow events to be scheduled based on: a.

Types of schedule shall be Normal, Holiday or override b.

c.

d.

A specific date.

A range of dates.

Any combination of Month of Year (1-12, any), Week of Month (1-5, last, any), Day of Week (M-Sun, Any). e.

Wildcard (example, allow combinations like second Tuesday of every month).

2.

Schedule categories: The system shall allow operators to define and edit scheduling categories (different types of “things” to be scheduled; for example, lighting, HVAC occupancy, etc.). The categories shall include: name,


15900 - 13



I.

Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

3.

4.

description, icon (to display in the hierarchy tree when icon option is selected) and type of value to be scheduled.

Schedule Groups: In addition to hierarchical scheduling, operators shall be able to define functional groups, comprised of an arbitrary group of areas/rooms/equipment scattered throughout the facility and site. For example, the operator shall be able to define an ‘individual tenant’ group – who may occupy different areas within a building or buildings. Schedules applied to the

‘tenant group’ shall automatically be downloaded to control modules affecting spaces occupied by the ‘tenant group.”

Intelligent Scheduling: The control system shall be intelligent enough to automatically turn on any supporting equipment needed to control the environment in an occupied space. If the operator schedules an individual room

5.

in a VAV system for occupancy, for example, the control logic shall automatically turn on the VAV air handling unit, chiller, boiler, and/or any other equipment required to maintain the specified comfort and environmental conditions within the room.

Partial Day Exceptions: Scheduled events shall be able to accommodate a time range specified by the operator (i.e., board meeting from 6 pm to 9 pm overrides

6.

normal schedule for conference room).

Schedule Summary Graph: The schedule summary graph shall clearly show

Normal versus Holiday versus Override Schedules, and the net operating schedule that results from all contributing schedules. Note: In case of priority conflict between schedules at the different geographic hierarchy, the schedule for the more detailed geographic level shall apply.

7.

The user shall have the ability to adjust scheduling blocks for the entire building in addition to individual zones.

Alarms: Alarms associated with a specific system, area, or equipment selected in the

Navigation Bar, shall be displayed in the Action Pane by selecting an ‘Alarms’ view.

Alarms, and reporting actions shall have the following capabilities:

1.

Alarms View: Each Alarm shall display an Alarms Category (using a different icon for each alarm category), date/time of occurrence, current status, alarm report, and a bold URL link to the associated graphic for the selected system, area or equipment. The URL link shall indicate the system location, address and other pertinent information. An operator shall easily be able to sort events, edit event templates and categories, acknowledge or force a return to normal in the Events

2.

3.

View as specified in this section.

Alarm Categories: The operator shall be able to create, edit or delete alarm categories such as HVAC, Maintenance, Fire, or Generator. An icon shall be associated with each alarm category, enabling the operator to easily sort through multiple events displayed.

Alarm Templates: Alarm template shall define different types of alarms and their associated properties. As a minimum, properties shall include a reference name, verbose description, severity of alarm, acknowledgement requirements, and high/low limit and out of range information.


15900 - 14



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Alarm Areas: Alarm Areas enable an operator to assign specific Alarm

Categories to specific Alarm Reporting Actions. For example, it shall be possible for an operator to assign all HVAC Maintenance Alarm on the 1 st

floor of a building to email the technician responsible for maintenance. The Navigation

Bar shall be used to setup Alarm Areas in the Graphic Pane.

Alarm Time/Date Stamp: All events shall be generated at the DDC control module level and comprise the Time/Date Stamp using the standalone control module time and date.

Alarm Configuration: Operators shall be able to define the type of Alarm generated per object. A ‘network’ view of the Navigation Tree shall expose all objects and their respective Alarm Configuration. Configuration shall include assignment of Alarm, type of Acknowledgement and notification for return to normal or fault status.

Alarm Summary Counter: The view of Alarm in Graphic Pane shall provide a numeric counter, indicating how many Alarms are active (in alarm); require acknowledgement, and total number of Alarms in the BAS Server database.

Alarm Auto-Deletion: Alarms that are acknowledged and closed shall be autodeleted from the database and archived to a text file after an operator defined period.

Alarm Reporting Actions: Alarm Reporting Actions specified shall be automatically launched (under certain conditions) after an Alarm is received by the BAS server software. Operators shall be able to easily define these Reporting

Actions using the Navigation Bar and Graphic Pane through the web browser

GUI. Reporting Actions shall be as follows: a.

Print: Alarm information shall be printed to the BAS server’s PC or a networked printer. b.

Email: Email shall be sent via any POP3-compatible e-mail server (most

Internet Service Providers use POP3). Email messages may be copied to several email accounts. Note: Email reporting action shall also be used to support alphanumeric paging services, where email services support c.

pagers.

File Write: The ASCII File write reporting action shall enable the operator to append operator defined alarm information to any alarm through a text file. The alarm information that is written to the file shall be completely definable by the operator. The operator may enter text or attach other data point information (such as AHU discharge temperature and fan condition upon a high room temperature alarm). d.

Write Property: The write property reporting action updates a property e.

value in a hardware module.

SNMP: The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) reporting f.

action sends an SNMP trap to a network in response to receiving an alarm.

Run External Program: The Run External Program reporting action launches specified program in response to an event.

10. All building alarms must be sent to the campus alarm page accessed from the campus site plan.


15900 - 15



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

J.

Trends: Trends shall both be displayed and user configurable through the Web Browser

GUI. Trends shall comprise analog, digital or calculated points simultaneously. A trend log’s properties shall be editable using the Navigation Bar and Graphic Pane.

1.

Viewing Trends: The operator shall have the ability to view trends by using the

Navigation Bar and selecting a Trends button in the Graphic Pane. The system

2.

shall allow y- and x- axis maximum ranges to be specified and shall be able to simultaneously graphically display multiple trends per graph.

Local Trends: Trend data shall be collected locally by Multi-Equipment/Single

Equipment general-purpose controllers, and periodically uploaded to the BAS server. Trend data, including run time hours and start time date and start time date shall be retained in non-volatile module memory. Systems that rely on a gateway/router to run trends are NOT acceptable.

3.

Resolution: Sample intervals shall be as small as one second. Each trended point will have the ability to be trended at a different trend interval. When multiple points are selected for displays that have different trend intervals, the system will

4.

automatically scale the axis. Provide 15 minute intervals for all trending points unless otherwise noted.

Dynamic Update: Trends shall be able to dynamically update at operator-defined intervals.

Zoom/Pan: It shall be possible to zoom-in on a particular section of a trend for more detailed examination and ‘pan through’ historical data by simply scrolling the mouse.

5.

6.

Numeric Value Display: It shall be possible to pick any sample on a trend and have the numerical value displayed.

Copy/Paste: The operator must have the ability to pan through a historical trend and copy the data viewed to the clipboard using standard keystrokes (i.e.,

CTRL+C, CTRL+V).

K. Security Access: Systems that Security access from the web browser GUI to BAS server shall require a Login Name and Password. Access to different areas of the BAS system shall be defined in terms of Roles, Privileges and geographic area of responsibility as specified:

1.

Roles: Roles shall reflect the actual roles of different types of operators. Each role shall comprise a set of ‘easily understood English language’ privileges.

Roles shall be defined in terms of View, Edit and Function Privileges. a.

View Privileges shall comprise: Navigation, Network, and Configuration

Trees, Operators, Roles and Privileges, Alarm/Event Template and

Reporting Action. b.

Edit Privileges shall comprise: Setpoint, Tuning and Logic, Manual c.

Override, and Point Assignment Parameters.

Function Privileges shall comprise: Alarm/Event Acknowledgment

Control Module Memory Download, Upload, Schedules, Schedule

Groups, Manual Commands, Print, and Alarm/Event Maintenance.

2. Geographic Assignment of Roles: Roles shall be geographically assigned using a similar expandable/collapsible Navigation Bar. For example, it shall be possible


15900 - 16



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 to assign two HVAC Technicians with similar competencies (and the same operator defined HVAC Role) to different areas of the system.

2.03 GRAPHICAL PROGRAMMING

A.

The system software shall include a Graphic Programming Language (GPL) for all DDC control algorithms resident in all control modules. Any system that does not use a drag and drop method of graphical icon programming shall not be accepted. All systems shall a GPL is a method used to create a sequence of operations by assembling graphic microblocks that represent each of the commands or functions necessary to complete a control sequence. Microblocks represent common logical control devices in conventional control systems, such as relays, switches, high signal selectors, etc., in addition to the more complex DDC and energy management strategies such as PID loops and optimum start. Each microblock shall be interactive and contain the programming necessary to execute the function of the device it represents.

B.

Graphic programming shall be performed while on screen and using a mouse; each microblock shall be selected from a microblock library and assembled with other microblocks necessary to complete the specified sequence. Microblocks are then interconnected on screen using graphic “wires,” each forming a logical connection. Once assembled, each logical grouping of microblocks and their interconnecting wires then form a graphic function block which may be used to control any piece of equipment with a similar point configuration and sequence of operation.

C.

GPL Capabilities: The following is a minimum definition of the capabilities of the

Graphic Programming software:

1.

Function Block (FB): Shall be a collection of points, microblocks and wires which have been connected together for the specific purpose of controlling a piece of HVAC equipment or a single mechanical system.

2.

Logical I/O: Input/Output points shall interface with the control modules in order to read various signals and/or values or to transmit signal or values to controlled devices.

3.

Microblocks: Shall be software devices that are represented graphically and maybe connected together to perform a specified sequence. A library of

4.

5.

6.

7.

microblocks shall be submitted with the control contractors bid.

Wires: Shall be Graphical elements used to form logical connections between microblocks and between logical I/O.

Reference Labels: Labels shall be similar to wires I that they are used to form logical connections between two points. Labels shall form a connection by reference instead of a visual connection, i.e., two points labeled ‘A’ on a drawing are logically connected even though there is no wire between them.

Parameter: A parameter shall be a value that may be tied to the input of a microblock.

Properties: Dialog boxes shall appear after a microblock has been inserted which has editable parameters associated with it. Default parameter dialog boxes shall contain various editable and non-editable fields, and shall contain ‘push buttons for the purpose of selecting default parameter settings.


15900 - 17



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

8.

Icon: An icon shall be graphic representation of a software program. Each graphic microblock has an icon associated with it that graphically describes its

9.

function.

Menu-bar Icon: Shall be an icon that is displayed on the menu bar on the GPL screen, which represents its associated graphic microblock.

10.

Live Graphical Programs: The Graphic Programming software must support a

‘live’ mode, where all input/output data, calculated data, and set points shall be displayed in a ‘live real-time mode.

D. Additional Graphics Requirements.

1. Building floor plan display should be color coded for each particular zone. (ie

2.

3.

4.

AHU zone: Area should be shaded differently than other zones.)

Building floor plan to display current temperatures of those rooms.

Notification of a “blinking” red light shall be displayed when an area is in alarm.

If a controller is offline or lost power, a default value of last known value should not be displayed. It should be defined as “offline” and an alarm should be programmed into the system to notify that system is “offline.” Unit temperature display shall become yellow.

From the building area floor plan graphic, there should be hyperlink created that 5.

6. allows one to proceed to HVAC equipment page for equipment serving that area.

Equipment should have an automated graphic display showing a status of equipment. This should be confirmed by both status and command values.

The dampers should be displayed in the position that they are physically in. 7.

8.

9.

Set points should be displayed on the graphics.

Ability to override commands of valves, dampers, fans to be provided to allow system corrections and/or troubleshooting.

10. All programmed schedules to be accessible from the main floor plan page. Allow for click and change ability to modify schedules based on calendar year changes.

11. Pages shall have hyperlinks to navigate to campus home page, building home page, and adjacent floors within the building.

E. Contractor prior to programming the system graphics, shall obtain approved SJU equipment templates to keep SJU Campus graphics consistent.

2.04 GRAPHIC EXAMPLES:

A. Navigation


15900 - 18



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015


15900 - 19



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

A.


15900 - 20



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

2.05 Best Practices:

A. Local building supervisor:

1. The local supervisor shall have its time synced with the campus server.

2.

3.

The passwords for the platform and admin station shall be per SJU standard.

Histories and alarm extensions will reside at this level and then sent up to server.

B. Campus Supervisor:

1. Local building PX pages shall reside in a folder named for the building and shall

2. not depend on files outside of this for display.

New supervisors shall be added to the scheduled backup for of station.

2.06 LONWORKS NETWORK MANAGEMENT

A.

Systems requiring the use of third party LonWorks network management tools shall not be accepted.


15900 - 21



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

B.

Network management shall include the following services: device identification, device installation, device configuration, device diagnostics, device maintenance and network variable binding.

C.

The network configuration tool shall also provide diagnostics to identify devices on the network, to reset devices, and to view health and status counters within devices.

D.

These tools shall provide the ability to “learn” an existing LonWorks network, regardless of what network management tool(s) were used to install the existing network, so that existing LonWorks devices and newly added devices are part of a single network management database.

E.

The network management database shall be resident in the Network Area Controller

(NAC), ensuring that anyone with proper authorization has access to the network management databases at all times. Systems employing network management databases that are not resident, at all times, within the control system, shall not be accepted.

2.07 OPEN, INTEROPERABLE, INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURE

A.

The intent of this specification is to provide a peer-to-peer networked, stand-alone, distributed control system utilizing the LonWorks technology communication protocol and/or BACnet in one open, interoperable system.

B.

The supplied computer software shall employ object-oriented technology (OOT) for representation of all data and control devices within the system

C.

All components and controllers supplied under this contract shall be true “peer-to-peer” communicating devices. Components or controllers requiring “polling” by a host to pass data shall not be acceptable.

D.

The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all data using Java enabled browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs.

An Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) or Structured Query Language (SQL) compliant server database is required for all system database parameter storage. This data shall reside on the existing Operating System Server currently located in the

Facilities Office on the LAN. Systems requiring proprietary database and user interface programs shall not be acceptable.

E.

A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and to manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer’s internal intranet network. Systems employing a “flat” single tiered architecture shall not be acceptable.

1.

Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 5 seconds for network connected user interfaces.

2.

Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 60 seconds for remote or dialup connected user interfaces.

2.08 LIBRARY


15900 - 22



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

6.

5.

A. A Standard library of objects shall be included for development and setup of application logic, user interface displays, system services, and communication networks.

B. The objects in this library shall be capable of being copied and pasted into the user’s data base and shall be organized according to their function. In addition, the user shall have the capability to group objects created in their application and store the new instances of these objects in a user-defined library.

C. In addition to the standard libraries specified here, the supplier of the system shall maintain an on-line accessible (over the Internet) Library, available to all registered users to provide new or updated objects and applications as they are developed.

D. All control objects shall conform to the control objects specified in the BACnet specification.

E. The library shall include applications or objects for the following functions, at a minimum:

1. Scheduling Object. The schedule must conform to the schedule object as defined in the BACnet specification, providing 7 day plus holiday and temporary scheduling features and a minimum of 10 on/off events per day.

2.

Data entry to be by graphical sliders to speed creation and selection of onoff events.

Calendar Object. The calendar must conform to the calendar object as defined in the BACnet specification, providing 12 month calendar features

3.

4. to allow for holiday or special event data entry. Data entry to be by graphical “point and click” selection. This object must be linkable” to any or all scheduling objects for effective event control.

Duty Cycling Object. Provide a universal duty cycle object to allow repetitive on/off time control of equipment as an energy conserving measure. Any number of these objects may be created to control equipment at varying intervals.

Temperature Override Object. Provide a temperature override object that is capable of overriding equipment turned off by other energy saving programs (scheduling, duty cycling, etc.) to maintain occupant comfort or for equipment freeze protection.

Start-Stop Time Optimization Object. Provide a start-stop time optimization object to provide the capability of starting equipment just early enough to bring space conditions to desired conditions by the scheduled occupancy time. Also, allow equipment to be stopped before the scheduled unoccupancy time just far enough ahead to take advantage of the building’s “flywheel” effect for energy saving. Provide automatic tuning of all start/stop time object properties based on the previous day’s performance.

Demand Limiting Object. Provide a comprehensive demand-limiting object that is capable of controlling demand for any selected energy utility

(electric, oil, and gas). The object shall provide the capability of monitoring a demand value and predicting (by use of a sliding window


15900 - 23



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 prediction algorithm) the demand at the end of the user defined interval period (1-60 minutes). This object shall also accommodate a utility meter time sync pulse for fixed interval demand control. Upon a prediction that will exceed the user defined demand limit (supply a minimum of 6 per day), the demand limiting object shall issue shed commands to either turn off user specified loads or modify equipment set points to effect the desired energy reduction. If the list of sheddable equipment is not enough to reduce the demand to below the set point, a message shall be displayed on the users screen (as an alarm) instructing the user to take manual actions to maintain the desired demand. The shed lists are specified by the user and shall be selectable to be shed in either a fixed or rotating order to control which equipment is shed the most often. Upon suitable reductions

5. in demand, the demand-limiting object shall restore the equipment that was shed in the reverse order in which it was shed. Each sheddable object shall have a minimum and maximum shed time property to effect both equipment protection and occupant comfort.

F. The library shall include control objects for the following functions. All control objects shall conform to the objects as specified in the BACnet specification.

1. Analog Object – Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. Allow high, low and failure limits to be assigned for alarming. Also, provide a time delay filter property to prevent nuisance alarms caused by temporary excursions above or below

2.

3.

4. the user defined alarm limits.

Analog Output Object – Minimum requirement is to comply with the

BACnet standard for data sharing.

Binary Input Object – Minimum requirement is to comply with the

BACnet standard for data sharing. The user must be able to specify either input condition for alarming. This object must also include the capability to record equipment run-time by counting the amount of time the hardware input is in an “on” condition. The user must be able to specify either input condition as the “on” condition.

Binary Output Object – Minimum requirement is to comply with the BAC net standard for data sharing. Properties to enable minimum on and off time for equipment protection as well as interstart delay must be provided.

The BACnet Command Prioritization priority scheme shall be incorporated to allow multiple control applications to execute commands on this object with the highest priority command being invoked. Provide sixteen levels of priority as a minimum. Systems not employing the

BACnet method of contention resolution shall not be acceptable.

PID Control Loop Object – Minimum requirement is to comply with the

BACnet standard for data sharing. Each individual property must be adjustable as well as to be disabled to allow proportional control only, or proportional with integral control, as well as proportional, integral and derivative control.


15900 - 24



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

8.

6.

7.

9.

Comparison Object – Allow a minimum of two analog objects to be compared to select either the highest, lowest, or equality between the two linked outputs. Also, allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation.

Math Object – Allow a minimum of four analog objects to be tested for the minimum or maximum, or the sum, difference, or average of linked objects. Also, allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation.

Custom Programming Objects – Provide a blank object template for the creation of new custom objects to meet specific user application requirements. This object must provide a simple BASIC-like programming language that is used to define object behavior. Provide a library of functions including math and logic functions, string manipulation, and e-mail as a minimum. Also, provide a comprehensive on-line debug tool to allow complete testing of the new object. Allow new objects to be stored in the library for re-use.

Interlock Object – Provide an interlock object that provides a means of coordination of objects within a piece of equipment such as an Air

Handler or other similar types of equipment. An example is to link the return fan to the supply fan such that when the supply fan is started, the return fan object is also started automatically without the user having to issue separate commands or to link each object to a schedule object. In addition, the control loops, damper objects, and alarm monitoring (such as return air, supply air, and mixed air temperature objects) will be inhibited from alarming during a user-defined period after start-up to allow for stabilization. When the air handler is stopped, the interlocked return fan is also stopped, the outside air damper is closed, and other related objects within the air handler unit are inhibited from alarming thereby eliminating nuisance alarms during the off period.

10. Temperature Override Object – Provide an object whose purpose is to provide the capability of overriding a binary output to an “On” state in the event a user specified high or low limit value is exceeded. This object is to be linked to the desired binary output object as well as to an analog object for temperature monitoring, to cause the override to be enabled.

This object will execute a Start command at the Temperature Override level of start/stop command priority unless changed by the user.

11. Composite Object – Provide a container object that allows a collection of objects representing an application to be encapsulated to protect the application from tampering, or to more easily represent large applications.

This object must have the ability to allow the user to select the appropriate parameters of the “contained” application that are represented on the graphical shell of this container.


15900 - 25



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

G. The object library shall include objects to support the integration of devices connected to the Network Area Controller (NAC). At a minimum, provide the following as part of the standard library included with the programming software:

1. LonMark/LonWorks devices. These devices shall include, but not be limited to, devices for control of HVAC, lighting, access, and metering.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Provide Lon Mark manufacturer-specific objects to facilitate simple integration of these devices. All network variables defined in the

LonMark profile shall be supported. Information (type and function) regarding network variables not defined in the LonMark profile shall be provided by the device manufacturer.

For devices not confirming to the LonMark standard, provide a dynamic object that can be assigned to the device based on network variable information provided by the device manufacturer. Device manufacturer shall provide an XIF file, resource file and documentation for the device to facilitate device integration.

For BACnet devices, provide the following objects at a minimum: a.

Analog In b.

Analog Out c.

Analog Value d.

Binary e.

Binary In f.

Binary Out g.

Binary Value h.

Multi9-State In i.

Multi-State Out j.

Multi-State Value k.

Schedule Export l.

Calendar Export m.

Trend Export n.

Device

For each BACnet object, provide the ability to assign the object a BACnet device and object instance number.

For BACnet devices, provide the following support at a minimum. a.

Segmentation b.

Segmented Request c.

Segmented Response d.

Application Services e.

Read Property f.

Read Property Multiple g.

Write Property h.

Who-has i.

I-have j.

Who-is k.

I-am l.

Media Types


15900 - 26



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 m.

Ethernet n.

BACnet IP Annex J o.

MSTP p.

BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD) function q.

Routing

Note: Depending on the project configuration and requirements, it may be desired to integrate data from devices that are not LonMark or BACnet. These could include industrial or plant floor devices such as PLC’s. Because of the many drivers available, a common method of providing this integration is:

Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE), MODBUS (DDEE), Ole for Process Control

(OPC).

2.09 NETWORK AREA CONTROLLER (NAC) / SYSTEM NETWORK

CONTROLLER (SNC)

A.

These controllers are designed to manage communications between the programmable equipment controllers (PEC), application specific controllers (ASC), and advanced unitary controllers (AUC) which are connected to its communications trunks, manage communications between itself and other system network controllers (SNC) and with any operator workstations (OWS) that are part of the BAS, and perform control and operating strategies for the system based on information from any controller connected to the BAS.

B.

The controllers must be fully programmable to meet the unique requirements of the facility it must control.

C.

The controllers must be capable of peer-to-peer communications with other SNC’s and with any OWS connected to the BAS, whether the OWS is directly connected, connected via modem or connected via the Internet.

D.

The communication protocols utilized for peer-to-peer communications between SNC’s will be Niagara AX, BACnet TCP/IP and SNMP. Use of proprietary communication protocol for peer-to-peer communications between SNC’s is not allowed.

E.

The SNC shall be capable of executing application control programs to provide:

1.

2.

Calendar functions

Scheduling

3.

4.

5.

6.

Trending

Alarm monitoring and routing

Time synchronization.

7.

Integration of LonWorks, BACnet, and ModBus controller data.

Network management functions for all SNC, PEC and ASC based devices.

F.

The SNC must provide the following hardware features as a minimum:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

One Ethernet Port-10/100 Mdps

One RS-232/485 port

One LonWorks Interface Port – 78KB FTT-10A

Battery Backup

Flash memory for long term data backup (if battery backup or flash memory is not supplied, the controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte storage capacity)


15900 - 27



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

G.

The SNC shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall support a minimum of 16 simultaneous users.

H.

The SNC shall provide alarm recognition, storage, routing, management and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers.

I.

The SNC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether connected to a local network or remote via dial-up, telephone connection, or wide-area network.

1.

Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement requirements including but not limited to: a.

Alarm b.

c.

Return to normal

To default

2.

Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user: a.

b.

c.

d.

Screen message text

Email of complete alarm message to multiple recipients.

Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message.

Graphics with flashing alarm object(s).

3.

The following shall be recorded by the SNC for each alarm (at a minimum): a.

Time and date. b.

c.

Equipment (air handler #, accessway, etc.)

Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement.

J.

Programming software and all controller “Setup Wizards” shall be embedded into the

SNC.

K.

Operator Touch Screen Interface

Provide a color graphic display touch screen operator interface mounted on panel face as indicated on drawings. The Operator Touch Screen Interface shall serve as the user interface to the entire TCS and shall allow the monitoring and the control of all systems points without the use of a mouse or keyboard.

Access to the system shall be permission-based, configurable permission access levels based on operator’s role.

Information on the color graphic display shall be dynamic and automatically updated

2.10 PROGRAMMABLE EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER (PEC)

A.

HVAC control shall be accomplished using LonMark™ based devices where the application has a LonMark™ profile defined. Where LonMark™ devices are not available for a particular application; devices based on LonMark™ shall be acceptable.

For each LonWorks™ device that does not have LonMark™ certification, the device supplier must provide an XIF file for the device. The controller platform shall provide options and advanced system functions, programmable and configurable using Niagara

AX Framework™, that allow standard and customizable control solutions required in executing the “Sequence of Operation.”

B.

All PECs shall be application programmable and shall at all times maintain their

LonMark™ certification. All control sequences within or programmed into the ILC shall


15900 - 28



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 be stored in non-volatile memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a battery to be retained.

C.

The PECs shall communicate with the SNC at a baud rate of not less than 78.8K baud.

The PEC shall provide LED indication of communication and controller performance to the technician, without cover removal.

D.

The following integral and remote Inputs/Outputs shall be supported per each PEC:

1.

2.

Four integral dry contact digital inputs.

Six integral analog inputs (configurable as 0-10V, 0-10,000 ohm or, 20K NTC).

3.

4.

Three integral 4-20 ma analog outputs.

Eight integral 24 Vac Triac digital outputs, configurable maintained or floating motor control outputs.

5.

One integral 20 Vdc, 65-mA power supply for auxiliary devices.

E.

Each PEC shall have expansion ability to support additional I/O requirements through the use of remote Input/Output modules.

2.11 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS (ASC’S)

A.

Application Specific Controllers (ASC’s) shall be standalone EEPROM based configured to perform the sequences specified, and with I/O selected for the application. All unitary

DDC controllers shall support the LonMark™ Functional Profile for the given application. ASC’s shall be tested and listed under UL916 for computing devices. ASC enclosures shall be flame retardant compact plastic conforming to UL94-V5 for plenum mounting or plated steel. Each ASC shall be provided with face mounted LED type annunciation to continually display its operational mode: power, normal, or in an alarm state. As an alternative to the face mounted integral LED, the control contractor shall provide relay driven pilot lights mounted at the AC location, which shall provide the specified annunciation. ASC’s shall be configured for DIN rail mounting using industry standard clip on adapters or direct panel mounted. The controller shall be programmable and configurable using Niagara AX Framework™ and provide control solutions as required to executing the “Sequence of Operation.”

1.

Input/Output Module a.

Provide a remote Input/Output module that connects sensors and actuators onto the field bus network for use by the NAC, ILC and ASC DDC

Controllers. I/O Device shall support LonMark standard network communication technology for controller-to-controller communications.

I/O Device shall have extended operating temperature rating from -40F to

+150F so Device can be mounted directly in wiring cabinet of monitored appliances.

2.12 ADVANCED UNITARY CONTROLLER

A.

The advanced unitary controller (AUC) platform shall be designed specifically to control

HVAC – ventilation, filtration, heating, cooling, humidification, and distribution.

Equipment includes: water service heat pumps, air handlers, heat pumps, natural convection units. The controller platform shall provide options and advanced system


15900 - 29



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 functions, programmable and configurable using Niagara AX Framework™, that allows standard and customizable control solutions required in executing the “Sequence of

Operation.”

B.

Minimum Requirements:

1.

The Controller shall be fully programmable with full functionality on any Niagara

2.

AX brand platform. a.

Support downloads to the controller from any brand of Niagara AX platform. b.

c.

d.

e.

Support uploads from the controller to any brand of Niagara AX platform.

Support simulation/debug mode of the controller.

Maintain native GUI.

Native function-block programming within the Niagara AX environment.

The controller shall be capable of either integrating with other devices or stand alone operation.

3.

The controller shall have two microprocessors. The Host processor contains onchip FLASH program memory, FLASH information memory, and RAM to run the main HVAC application. The second processor for network communications.

4.

Controller memory minimum requirements include: a.

FLASH Memory Capacity: 60 Kilobytes with 8 Kilobytes for application program. b.

c.

FLASH Memory settings retained for ten years.

RAM: 2 Kilobytes.

The controller shall have an FTT transformer-coupled communications port interface for common mode-noise rejection and DC isolation.

5.

The controller shall have an internal time with the ability to automatically revert from a master time clock on failure. a.

Operating Range: 24 hour, 365 day, multi-year-calendar including day of week and configuration for automatic day-light savings time adjustment to b.

c.

occur on configured start and stop dates.

Accuracy: +/- minute per month at 77° F (25° C).

Power Failure Backup: 24 hours at 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C).

6.

The controller shall have Significant Event Notification, Periodic Update capability, and Failure Detect when network inputs fail to be detected within their configurable time frame.

7.

The controller shall have an internal DC power supply to power external sensors. a.

Power Output: 20 VDC +/- 10% at 75 Ma

8.

The controller shall have visual indication (LED) of the status of the devise: a.

b.

c.

d.

e.

f.

Controller operating normally.

Controller in process of download.

Controller in manual mode under control of software tool.

Controller lost it configuration.

Now power to controller, low voltage, or controller damage.

Processor and/or controller are not operating.

9.

The minimum controller Environmental ratings: a.

Operating Temperature Ambient Rating: -40° to 150° F (-40 to 65.5° C).


15900 - 30



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 b.

c.

Storage Temperature Ambient Rating: -40° to 150° F (-40 to 65.5° C).

Relative Humidity: 5% to 95% non-condensing.

10.

The controller shall have the additional approval requirements, listings, and approvals: a.

UL/cUL (E87741) listed under UL916 (Standard for Open Energy

Management Equipment) with plenum rating. b.

c.

d.

e.

CSA (LR95329-3) Listed

Meets FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class B (radiated emissions) requirements.

Meets Canadian standard C108.8 (radiated emissions).

Conforms requirements European Consortium standard EN 61000-6-1;

2001 (EU Immunity) f.

Conforms requirements European Consortium standard EN 61000-6-3;

2001 (EU Emission)

11.

The controller housing shall be UL plenum rated mounting to either a panel or

DIN rail (standard EN50022; 7.5mm x 35 mm).

12.

The controller housing shall have a mix of digital inputs (DI), digital Triac

Outputs (DO), analog outputs and universal inputs (UI). a.

Analog outputs (AO) shall be capable of being configured as digital outputs (DO). b.

Input and Output wiring terminals shall be removable from the controller without disconnecting the wiring. c.

Input and Output wiring terminals shall be designated with color coded d.

labels.

Universal inputs shall be capable of being configured as binary inputs, resistive inputs, voltage inputs (o-10 VDC), or current inputs (4-20mA).

13.

The controller shall provide for “user defined’ Network Variables (NV) for customized configurations and naming using Niagara AX Framework™.

14.

The controller shall provide “ continuous ” automated loop tuning with Adaptive

Integral Algorithm Control Loop.

15.

The controller platform shall have standard HVAC application programs that are modifiable to support both the traditional and specialized “sequence of f.

g.

h.

i.

operations” as outline in Section 4. a.

Discharge air control and low limit. b.

c.

d.

e.

Pressure-dependent dual duct without flow mixing.

Variable air volume with return flow tracking.

Economizer with differential enthalpy.

Minimum airflow coordinated with CO

2.

Unit ventilator cycle (1,2,3) 2-pipe.

Unit ventilator cycle (1,2,3) 2-pipe with face/bypass

Unit ventilator cycle (1,2,3) 4-pipe.

Unit ventilator cycle (1,2,3) 4-pipe with EOC valve.

2.13 ENERGY ANALYSIS AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SOFTWARE

1.12.1 Operating System: The Energy Suite shall run Windows 7 or latest version.


15900 - 31



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

The Energy Suite shall employ browser-based functionality for ease of navigation. It shall include a tree view (similar to Windows Explorer) allowing users to view and manipulate underlying systems without the need for dedicated workstations or client software. In addition, menu-pull downs, and toolbars shall employ buttons, commands and navigation to permit the user access to real-time analysis, computations, and reports with a minimum knowledge and basic computing skills.

The Energy Suite shall support, as needed, unlimited point and meter capacity.

The Energy Suite shall provide a comprehensive M&V Tool that meets International

Performance Measurement and Verification Protocol (IPMVP) guidelines.

Energy and Enterprise Profiler. The profile shall provide extensive reporting flexibility allowing users to profile any data point over any period of time. The user shall be able to trend and analyze energy, temperature, production, and facility data with, at a minimum, the following reports:

Aggregation Analysis. Computes consumption and demand along with load factor for a point or group of points.

Average Daily Profile. Displays an average 24 hour period for any day or combination of days.

Enterprise Ranking. Ranks energy usage in the enterprise to identify the most and least efficient buildings.

Equipment Operation. Displays runtime and runtime percentage for digital points.

Exceptions. Allows user to compare data values versus a baseline or against a defined range of values.

Load Duration. Identifies the length of time that a demand exceeds a certain level.

Point Trending. Performs statistical analysis to determine correlations, standard deviations, slope, regression line, and mean.

Relative Contribution. Determines how sub meters or multiple main meters contribute to total energy within or between sites.

Spectrum Summary. Utilizes pattern recognition to quickly identify anomalies with inconsistent patterns indicating a need for more detail analysis.

Correlation. Shows the correlation between two data logs to determine if any relationship exists between them.


15900 - 32



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

Cost Profiler. The profile shall provide extensive reporting flexibility allowing users to compare energy costs based on metered interval data and applicable rate structures. The user shall be able to benchmark facilities, identify inefficiencies, implement changes, and measure the cost impact of energy reduction strategies to proactively manage budgets and calculate accurate cost projections. In addition, the user shall be able to compare different procurement strategies and rate structures without actually switching energy providers or rates. Provide at a minimum the following reports:

Bill Reconciliation. Compare utility invoices to calculated values to identify billing errors. User can establish a historical baseline with manually entered date from utility invoices.

Cost Contribution. Determine how meters, whether sub meters within a building or main meters across an enterprise, contribute to the aggregate energy expense.

Cost Ranking. Ranks meters to determine the most costly. Normalize data based on outside air temperature and floor area.

Budget Report. User can enter budgets or use historically generated data, then compare against actual costs and make projections for reporting periods.

What-If Analyzer. Enables prediction of future costs. User can manipulate consumption patterns and demand levels to project savings from various strategies.

Rate Comparison. Analyze alternative rates and energy providers. Determine the effect of an energy strategy prior to implementation.

2.14 OTHER CONTROL SYSTEM HARDWARE

A.

Motorized control dampers that will not be integral to the equipment shall be furnished by the BAS contractor. Control damper frames shall be constructed of galvanized, steel, formed into changes and welded or riveted. Dampers shall be galvanized, with nylon bearings. Blade edge seals shall be vinyl. Blade edge and tip seals shall be included for all dampers. Blades shall be 16-guage minimum and 6 inches wide maximum and frame shall be of welded channel iron. Damper leakage shall not exceed 10 CFM per square foot, at 1.5-inches water gauge static pressure.

B.

Control damper actuators shall be furnished by the BAS Contractor. Two-position or proportional electric actuators shall be direct-mount type sized to provide a minimum of

5 in-lb torque per square foot of damper area. Damper actuators shall be spring return type. Operators shall be heavy-duty electronic type for positioning automatic dampers in response to control signal. Motor shall be of sufficient size to operate damper positively and smoothly to obtain correct sequence as indicated. All applications requiring proportional operation shall utilize truly proportional electric actuators.


15900 - 33



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

C.

Control Valves: Control valves shall be 2-way or 3-way pattern as shown and constructed for tight shutoff at the pump shut-off head or steam relief valve pressure.

Control valves shall operate satisfactorily against system pressures and differentials.

Two position valves shall be ‘line’ size. Proportional control valves shall be sized for a maximum pressure drop for a maximum pressure drop of 5.0 psi at rated flow (unless otherwise noted or scheduled on the drawings). Valves with sizes up to and including 2 inches shall be “screwed’ configuration and 2-1/2 inch and larger valves shall be

“flanged” configuration. All control valves, including terminal unit valves, less than 2 inch shall be globe valves. Electrically-actuated control valves shall include spring return type actuators sized for tight shut-off against system pressures (as specified above) and, when specified, shall be furnished with integral switches for indication of valve position

(open-closed). Pneumatic actuators for valves, when utilized, shall be sized for tight shut-off against system pressures (as specified above).

D.

Dynamic Pressure-Regulating Control Valves

The valve and actuator combination product family shall be a factory assembled and tested unit.

E.

Wall Mount Room Temperature sensors: Each room temperature sensor shall provide temperature indication to the digital controller, provide the capability for a software-

I.

limited occupant set point adjustment (warmer-cooler slider bar or switch) and limited operation override capability. Room temperature Sensors shall be 20,000-ohm thermistor type with a temperature range of -40 to 140 degrees F. The sensor shall be complete with a decorative cover and suitable for mounting over a standard electrical utility box. These devices shall have an accuracy of 0.5 degrees, F., over the entire range.

F.

Duct-mounted and Outside Air Temperature Sensors: 20,000-ohm thermistor temperature sensors with an accuracy of ±0.2°C. Outside air sensors shall include an integral sun shield. Duct-mounted sensors shall have an insertion measuring probe of a length appropriate for the duct size, with a temperature range of -40 to 160 degrees F.

The sensor shall include a utility box and a gasket to prevent air leakage and vibration noise. For all mixed air and preheat air applications, install bendable averaging duct sensors with a minimum 8 – foot long sensor element. These devices shall have accuracy of 0.5 degrees F, over the entire range.

G.

Humidity sensors shall be thin-film capacitive type sensor with on-board nonvolatile memory, accuracy to plus or minus two percent (2%) at 0 to 90% RH, 12 – 30 VDC input voltage, analog output (0-10 VDC or – 20 mA output). Operating range shall be 0 to

100% RH and 32 59 140 degree F. Sensors shall be selected for wall, duct or outdoor type installation as appropriate.

H.

Current Sensitive Switches: Solid state, split core current switch that operates when the current level (sensed by the internal current transformer) exceeds the adjustable trip point. Current switch to include an integral LED for indication of trip condition and a current level below trip set point.

Differential Analog (duct) Static Pressure Transmitters provide a pressure transmitter with integral capacitance type sensing and solid-state circuitry. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 1% of full range; range shall be selected for the specific application. Provide zero and span adjustment capability. Device shall have integral static pickup tube.


15900 - 34



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

J.

Differential Air Pressure Switches: Provide SPDT type, UL-approved, and selected for the appropriate operating range where applied. Switches shall have adjustable set points and barbed pressure tips.

K.

Water Flow Switches: Provide a SPST type contact switch with bronze paddle blade, size for the actual pipe size at the location. If installed outdoors, provide a NEMA-4 enclosure. Flow switch shall be UL listed.

L.

Temperature Control Panels: Furnish temperature control panels of code gauge steel with locking doors for mounting all devices as shown. All electrical devices within a control panel shall be factory wired. Control panel shall be assembled by the BAS in a UL-

Certified 508A panel shop. A complete set of ‘as-built’ control drawings (relating to the controls within the panel) shall be furnished within each control panel.

M.

Pipe and Duct Temperature sensing elements: 20,000-ohm thermistor temperature sensors with and accuracy of ±1% accuracy. Their range shall be -5 to 250°F. Limited range sensors shall be acceptable provided they are capable of sensing the range expected for the point at the specified accuracy. Thermal wells with heat conductive gel shall be included.

N.

Low Air Temperature Sensors: Provide SPST type switch, with 15 to 55 degrees F., range, vapor-charged temperature sensor. Honeywell model L482A, or approved equivalent.

O.

Relays: Start/stop relay model shall provide either momentary or maintained switching action as appropriate for the motor being started. All relays shall be plugged in, interchangeable, mounted on a subbase and wired to numbered terminals strips. Relays installed in panels shall all be DPDT with indicating lamp. Relays installed outside of controlled devices shall be enclosed in a NEMA enclosure suitable for the location.

Relays shall be labeled with UR symbol. RIB-style relays are acceptable for remote enable/disable.

P.

Emergency Stop Switches: Provide toggle-type switch with normally-closed contact.

Switch shall be labeled “AIR HANDLER EMERGENCY SHUTOFF, NORMAL –

OFF.”

Q.

Transducers: Differential pressure transducers shall be electronic with a 4-20 mA output signal compatible to the Direct Digital Controller. Wetted parts shall be stainless steel.

Unit shall be designed to operate in the pressure ranges involved.

R.

Control Power Transformers: Provide step-down transformers for all DDC controllers and devices as required. Transformers shall be sized for the load, but shall be sized for

50 watts, minimum. Transformers shall be UL Listed Class 2 type, for 120VAC/24VAC operation.

S.

Line voltage protection: All DDC system control panels that are powered by 120 VAC circuits shall be provided with surge protection. This protection is in addition to any internal protection provided by the manufacturer. The protection shall meet UL, ULC

149, IEEE C62.41B A grounding conductor, (minimum 12 AWG), shall be brought to each control panel.

2.14 ELECTRICAL DEMAND AND CONSUMPTION

A. Demand Measurement


15900 - 35



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

1.

2.

Input device: Current sensing transducer.

Output device: BAS DDC system.

B. Action

1. Monitor demand amps and KW.

2. Accumulate and totalize consumption in KW hrs.

3.

4.

Monitor power factor - power factor.

Sequence equipment to limit KW.

C. Display:

1.

2.

3.

4.

KW

Amps

KW Hrs.

PF

D. Exhaust Fans: DDC system digital output starts/stops fans.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SUBMITTALS

A.

The materials, equipment and software design shall be submitted as follows:

1.

Control Contractor shall submit qualifications as outlined in Part 1, 1.1.A.2.b

Control contractor requirement including: a.

Names of Tridium certified employees in your employ today. b.

c.

List (5) WEBs-AX™/ WEBs-AX™ Supervisor projects of similar size.

Location of principal place of business that would respond to service requests the first year. d.

Letter from Honeywell Regional representative stating your company is in good standing with the ACI and ACS Program. e.

Requirements (a thru d above) shall be submitted to project engineer for review for approval. No work shall be allowed without written approval.

2.

3.

All information shall be handled in confidence and not for distribution to third parties. f.

Requirements of Quality Assurance (1.10) shall apply fully also and acknowledge in written form.

One copy of shop drawings or the entire control system shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturers’ catalog data sheets and installation instructions, samples of written controller checkout sheets and performance verification procedures for applications similar in scope shall be included for approval.

Shop drawings shall also contain complete wiring I/O point list for each system, schematic diagrams, sequences of operations, control system bus layout and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a system. Shop drawings shall be approved before any


15900 - 36



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 equipment is installed. Please allow 10 days for submission, review and return by engineer.

4.

5.

All dampers and actuator valves and actuator shall be sized and submitted with shop drawing. Schedule shall include: a.

Identification tag all dampers/valves. b.

c.

d.

e.

Location all damper/valves.

Damper and/or Valve type.

Actuator size and type.

Damper and/or valve pressure drop.

Submittal shall also a “sample of prior art” for project of the graphics. This webbased interface with the network via dynamic color shall include a flowchart (site map) indicating how the graphics are to be linked to one another for system navigation.

Minimum depiction for graphics for project: a.

Building picture and site plot plan (aerial or ground view provided by owner). b.

c.

d.

Building floor plan.

Each mechanical system.

Control devices depicted by point-and-click graphics.

Note:

Floor plan shall indicate each mechanical zone with different colors shaded as required to depict which zones are not maintaining temperature/humidity/pressure/CO

2, etc programmable levels/limits and which zones are in alarm.

Provide animated graphic for each system component including rooftop units, air handling units, UAV terminals, fan powered terminals, exhaust fans, supply fans, hot water systems – boilers, hot water pumps; chilled water systems – chillers, cold water pump condenser water pumps, cooling towers, etc.

The graphics are intended to be 20% - 30% complete at this stage with changes to be based on review comments from the engineer and/or owner.

B. Upon completion of the work, provide a complete set of as-built drawings on compact disk (CD). Additionally, all control device furnished with this section shall be programmable directly from Tridium AX™ workbench.

C. Upon completion of this project, the following copies of software shall be included on

CD for the owner:

1.

The BAS contractor shall use the “contract CD to owner – software package” to simulate all software application programs to ensure such programs are free from design errors and they accurately accomplish the application(s) sequence-ofoperation. This simulation shall include the WEBs-AX™ embedded tool in controller allowing for the capability of other Niagara factory certified contractor(s) access to the programming capability. The simulation shall be demonstrated before the owner/engineer at time and place arranged by the owner. Allow for a minimum of (4) hours for the demonstration and software


15900 - 37



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

2.

3.

changes resulting from the demonstration the owner feels should be changed/enhanced, etc. will/may result in another demonstration if so requested by owner. These changes will be made at no additional expense to owner.

One copy of the “as-built” drawings shall be provided in addition to the document on compact disk. All “as-built” drawings shall also be installed into the FMCS server in a dedicated directory. For each JACE™ (WEBs-AX™ ) the station shall be copied to supervisor and distribution file copy back-up and written to CD to owners’ hands.

Control contractor shall provide “quote” to owner to install mechanical equipment service information such as, spare parts list, mechanical service contractors, etc into FMCS server as a dedicated directory. Owner, working with engineer, shall develop specification requirements for control contractor. Control contractor shall include (8) hours of technical support, including updating information as requested by owner, covering the time interval of the warranty period.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A.

Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and as detailed on the project drawing set.

B.

Line and low voltage electrical connections to control equipment show specified or show on the control diagrams shall be furnished and installed by the Control System Contractor in accordance with these specifications.

C.

Equipment furnished by the Mechanical Contractor that is normally wired before installation shall be furnished completely wired. Control wiring normally performed in the field will be furnished and installed by the Control System Contractor.

D.

All control devices mounted on the face of control panels shall be clearly identified as to function and system served with permanently engraved phenolic label.

E.

Installation of Network

1.

Ethernet a.

The network shall employ Ethernet LAN architecture, as defined by IEEE

802.3. The Network Interface shall be fully Internet Protocol (IP) compliant allowing connection to currently installed IEEE 802.3,

2.

3.

b.

Compliant Ethernet Networks.

The network shall directly support connectivity to a variety of cabling types. As a minimum provide the following connectivity: 10 Base 2

(ThinNet RG-58 A/U Coaxial cabling with BNC connectors, 10 Base T

(Twisted-Pair-RJ-45 terminated UTP cabling).

LonWorks a.

The network shall employ LonTalk communications FTT-10.

BACnet ms/tp a. The network shall employ BACnet MS/TP EIA-485-A Standard. b. The MS/TP EIA-485 network shall use shielded, twisted-pair cable with a characteristic impedance between 100 and 130 ohms.


15900 - 38



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

4.

Third Party Interfaces: Contractor shall integrate real-time data from building systems by other trades and databases originating from other manufacturers as specified and required to make the system work as one system.

F.

Installation of Digital Controllers and Programming

1.

Provide a separate digital control panel for each major piece of equipment, such as air handling unit, chiller, pumping unit etc. Points used for control loop reset such as outdoor air, outdoor humidity, or space temperature could be located on

2.

any of the remote control units.

Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and trend logging. There shall be a minimum of 25 percent of available memory free for

3.

future use.

System point names shall be modular in design, permitting easy operator interface

4.

without the use of a written point index.

Provide software programming for the applications intended for the systems specified, and adhere to the strategy algorithms provided.

5.

Provide graphics for each piece of equipment and floor plan in the building. This includes each chiller, cooking tower, air handling unit, fan, terminal unit, boiler, pumping unit etc. These graphics shall show all points dynamically as specified in the point list.

3.03 IT MANAGER’S GUIDE TO NIAGARA

Tridium has developed a document that addresses many of the issues that IT managers have relating to Tridium’s Niagara AX Framework™ and platform and station connections.

See www. tridium.com for document.

3.04 WIRING

A.

All control wiring and power wiring to the control panels, NAC, computers and network components shall be the responsibility of this contractor.

B. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any applicable local codes. All FMCS wiring shall be installed in the conduit types specified unless otherwise allowed by the National Electrical Code or applicable local codes.

3.05 START UP

A.

The BAS contractor shall verify that all wiring is properly connected and free of all shorts and ground faults. Verify that all connections are tightened appropriately.

Calibrate each device as required by the manufacturer’s recommendations.

B.

Verify that the digital output devices operate properly and that the normal positions are correct.

C.

Verify that all analog output devices are functional, that start point and span are correct, and that direction and normal positions are correct including fail-safe positions. The contractor shall check all control valves and automatic dampers to ensure proper action


15900 - 39



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 and closure. The contractor shall make any necessary adjustment to valve stem and damper blade travel.

D.

Complete software shall be installed and tested (dry run) prior to start-up.

E.

Software technician shall observe and fine tune all control loops.

F.

Alarms and interlocks:

1.

Check each alarm separately by including an appropriate signal at a value that will trip the alarm.

2.

Interlocks shall be tripped using field contracts to check the logic, as well as to ensure that the fail-safe condition for all actuators is in the proper direction.

G.

Interlock actions shall be tested by simulating alarm conditions to check the initiating value of the variable and interlock action.

H.

Return the system to a normal operating state after each phase of start-up, commissioning and demonstration. Any points overridden, devices place in manual position, setpoint

I.

adjusted, etc. are to be restored to normal operation condition prior to acceptance.

Connection to the Internet must be tested and communication confirmed.

3.06 SYSTEM VALIDATION AND DEMONSTRATION

A.

As part of final system acceptance, a System Demonstration is required (see below).

Prior to start of this Demonstration, the contractor is to perform a complete validation of all aspects of the Controls and Instrumentation System.

B.

Validation

1.

Prepare and submit for approval a Validation Test Plan including Test Procedures for the performance verification tests. Test Plan shall address all specified functions of the Engineering Control Center and all specified sequences of operation. Explain in detail actions and expected results used to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this specification. Explain the method for simulating the necessary conditions of operation used to demonstrate performance of the system. Test plan shall include a Test Check List to be used by the

Installer’s agent to check and initial that each test has been successfully completed. Deliver Test Plan documentation for the performance verification tests to the Architect or Owner’s Representative, 30 calendar days prior to start of

2.

performance verification tests. Provide draft copy of operation and maintenance manual with performance verification test.

After approval of the Validation Test Plan, Installer shall carry out all tests and procedures therein. Installer shall completely check out, calibrate, and test all connected hardware and software to insure that system performs in accordance with approved specifications and sequences of operation submitted. Installer shall complete and submit Test Check List

C.

Demonstration

1.

System operation and calibration to be demonstrated by the Installer in the presence of the Architect or Owner’s representative on random samples of equipment as dictated by the Owner’s representative. Should random sampling


15900 - 40



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

2.

indicate improper commissioning, the owner reserves the right to subsequently witness complete calibration of the system at no additional cost to the owner.

Demonstrate to authorities that all required safeties and life safety functions are fully functional and complete.

Make accessible personnel to provide necessary adjustments and corrections to 3.

4.

systems as directed by balancing agency.

Witnessed validation demonstration of Operator’s Terminal functions shall f.

g.

h.

consist of: a.

Running each specified report. b.

Display and demonstrate each data entry to show site specific customizing capability. Demonstrate parameter changes. c.

Step through penetration tree, display all graphics, demonstrate dynamic update, and direct access to graphics. d.

e.

Execute digital and analog commands in graphic mode.

Demonstrate DDC loop precision and stability via trend logs of inputs and outputs 6 loops minimum.

Demonstrate BAS performance via trend logs and command trace.

Demonstrate scan, update, and alarm responsiveness.

Demonstrate spreadsheet/curve plot software, and its integration with database. i.

j.

Demonstrate on-line user guide, and help function and mail facility.

Demonstrate digital system configuration graphics with interactive upline and downline load, and demonstrate specified diagnostics. k.

Demonstrate multitasking by showing dynamic curve plot, and graphic construction operating simultaneously via split screen. l.

Demonstrate class programming with point options of beep duration, beep rate, alarm archiving, and color banding.

3.07 PROJECT CLOSEOUT - ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A.

Upon completion of the installation, the BAS Contractor shall load all system software and start-up system. The BAS Contractor shall perform all necessary calibration, testing and de-bugging and perform all required operational checks to insure that the system is functioning in full accordance with these specifications.

B.

System Acceptance: Satisfactory completion is when the BAS Contractor has performed successfully all the required testing to show performance compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents to the satisfaction of the Owner’s

Representative. System acceptance shall be contingent upon completion and review of all corrected deficiencies.

3.08 OPERATOR TRAINING

A.

During system commissioning and at such time acceptable performance of the Control

System hardware and software has been established, the BAS Contractor shall provide on-site operator instruction to the owner’s operating personnel. Operator instruction shall


15900 - 41



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 be done during normal working hours and shall be done during normal working hours and shall be performed by a competent representative familiar with the system hardware, software and accessories.

B.

The BAS Contractor shall provide 4 hours of comprehensive training in two separate sessions (8 hours total) for system orientation, product maintenance and troubleshooting, programming and engineering, if not provided under a previous contract at the site using the same brand and type of controllers within the previous 3 years.

C.

Train the designated staff or representative to enable them to do the following:

1.

Day-to-Day Operations: a.

Proficiently operate the system. b.

c.

d.

Understand control system architecture and configuration.

Understand BAS system components

Understand system operation, including BAS system control and optimizing routines (algorithms). e.

f.

g.

h.

Operate the workstation and peripherals.

Log on and off the system.

Access graphics, point reports, and logs.

Adjust and change system set points, time schedule, and holiday i.

schedules.

Recognize malfunctions of the system by observation of the printed copy j.

k.

and graphical visual signals.

Understand system drawings and Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

Understand job layout and location of control components. l.

Access data from BAS controllers and application specific controllers. m.

Operate portable operator terminals.

2.

d.

e.

f.

g.

Advanced Operators: a.

Make and change graphics on the workstation. b.

Create, delete, and modify alarms, including annunciation and routing of these. c.

Create, delete, and modify point trend logs and graphic or print these both on an ad-hoc basis and at user-definable intervals.

Create, delete, and modify reports.

Perform BAS system field checkout procedures.

Perform BAS controller unit operation and maintenance procedures.

Perform workstation and peripheral operation and maintenance h.

i.

procedures.

Perform BAS diagnostic procedures.

Configure hardware including PC boards, switches, communication, and

3.

j.

I/O points.

Adjust, calibrate, and replace system components.

System Managers/Administrators a.

Interface with job-specific, third party operator software. b.

Add new users and understand password procedures.

D. Sessions shall be scheduled so that at least one training session shall occur during heating season and one during cooling season.


15900 - 42



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

3.09 WARRANTY PERIOD SERVICES

A.

Equipment, materials and workmanship incorporated into the work shall be warranted for a period of one year from the time of system acceptance by owner.

B.

Within this period, upon notice by the Owner, any defects in the BAS due to faulty materials, methods of installation or workmanship shall be promptly repaired or replaced by the Control System Contractor at no expense to the Owner.

C.

Maintenance of Computer Software Programs: The BAS Contractor shall maintain all software during the warranty period. In addition, all factory or sub-vendor upgrades to software shall be added to the systems, when they become available, at no additional cost. New products are not considered upgrades in this context.

D.

Maintenance of Control Hardware: The Control System Contractor shall inspect, repair, replace, adjust and calibrate, as required, the controllers, control devices and associated peripheral units during the warranty period. The Control System Contractor shall then furnish a report describing the status of the equipment, problem areas (if any) noticed during service work and description of the corrective actions taken. The report shall clearly certify that all software is functioning correctly.

E.

Service Period: Calls for service by the Owner shall be honored within 24 hours and are not to be considered as part of routine maintenance.

F.

Service Documentation: A copy of the service report associated with each ownerinitiated service call shall be provided to the owner.

3.10 WARRANTY ACCESS: Verify with owner(s) and/or IT representative on the model of service access into your BAS system for the warranty period. This access shall cover diagnostics and troubleshooting.

A.

The Owner shall grant to the BAS Contractor reasonable access to the BAS during the warranty period. Remote access to the BAS (for the purpose of diagnostics and troubleshooting, via the Internet, during the warranty period) will be allowed.

3.11 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A.

See Part 1 for requirements. O&M manuals shall include the following elements, as a minimum.

1.

As-built control drawings for all equipment.

2.

3.

4.

5.

As-built Network Communication Diagram.

General description and specifications for all components.

Completed Performance Verification Sheets.

Completed Controller Checkout/Calibration sheets.

6. (1) Copy of “Owner’s CD” as specified in Section 15000.

7. All equipment manufacturers/suppliers shall provide in writing (and documented if requested by the Owner) a NICS statement indication the interface with their equipment has no connectivity restrictions.


15900 - 43



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

The station and tool “NICS” would be as follows:

Property

Station Compatibility In

Station Compatibility Out

Total Compatibility In

Total Compatibility Out

Value

All

All

All

All

3.12 CONTRACT EQUIPMENT PROFILE UNDER BAS CONTRACT

The following listed equipment shall be under direct control or monitored by the specified automated systems. Project BAS contractor, under this division, is responsible for all listed equipment and all other equipment references under the specifications and/or mechanical plans for automation interface. NICS full connectivity without restrictions shall apply:

PART 4 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

4.01 GENERAL

A. All occupied, unoccupied and morning warm-up periods and all temperature set points for all spaces and systems, shall be defined by the Central DDC System and be full adjustable from Central DDC System PC.

B. The Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate with the Controls Contractor.

C. The Mechanical Contractor shall submit cuts of all of the mechanical equipment to be controlled, to the Controls Contractor for review prior to ordering the equipment.

D. Refer to ATC Diagrams on drawings for additional information.

E. Controls Contractor shall provide all sensors, services, etc. as required to perform the following sequences of operation.

END OF SECTION


15900 - 44



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

SECTION 23 21 13 – HVAC PIPING SYSTEMS


1.01 REFERENCE


B. Refer to International Mechanical Code.

C. Refer to ASHRAE handbooks.

D. Where the contract documents are more stringent but not in conflict with the applicable codes, the more stringent requirement shall be followed.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to install a complete operating heating and cooling system and domestic water system with all devices, appurtenances and accessories to complete the work.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings of all items specified in this section.

B. Grooved joint couplings and fittings may be shown on drawings and product submittals, and shall be specifically identified by the manufacturer’s style or series designation.



B. Install systems and equipment in accordance with the City of Philadelphia

Plumbing Code.

C. All grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same

HVAC PIPING SYSTEMS 232113 - 1



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 manufacturer as the grooved components. a. All castings used for coupling housings, fittings, and valve bodies shall be date stamped for quality assurance and traceability.


A. Steel pipe schedule 40: Heat pump S&R 2" and below with threaded fittings. a. Steel pipe schedule 40, with grooved joints for Victaulic fittings.

Heating HWS & R

B. Type L Copper Tubing:

A/C Condensate Piping


2.01 STEEL PIPE - SCHEDULE 40.

A. ASTM A53, Seamless.

B. Fittings; 125 lb cast iron screwed ANSI B16.4 up to 2 1/2 inch. Above 2

1/2 inch shall be flanged, weld neck, 150 lb ANSI B16.5 cast steel; 2" with grooved joints for Victaulic fittings.

2.02 STEEL PIPE - GALVANIZED SCHEDULE 40

A. ASTM A53, Seamless galvanized.

B. Fittings; 125 lb galvanized cast iron screwed ANSI B16.4 up to 2 inch.

Above 2 inch shall be flanged, weld neck, 150 lb ANSI B16.5 galvanized cast steel; 2" with grooved joints for Victaulic fittings.

2.03. COPPER TUBING

A. Above ground hard drawn seamless type "L" ASTM B-88.

B. Below ground hard drawn seamless type "K" ASTM B-88.

C. Fittings; solder joint, wrought copper, ANSI B-16.22, or ANSI B-16.18 cast bronze.

D. 2" with copper-tubing sized grooved joints for Victaulic fittings.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

2.04 GROOVED JOINT COUPLINGS

A.

Grooved joint couplings shall consist of two ductile iron housing segments to ASTM A536, pressure responsive gasket to ASTM D2000, and zinc electroplated steel bolts and nuts to ASTM A449. Couplings shall comply with ASTM F1476 Standard Specification for the Performance of Gasketed

Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications.

1. Rigid Type: Coupling housings shall be cast with offsetting, anglepattern bolt pads to provide joint rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and B31.9. a. Victaulic Style 107H, Installation-Ready, for direct stab installation without field disassembly, with grade EHP gasket, suitable for water service to +250 deg F. b. Victaulic Style 07 “Zero-Flex”

2. Flexible Type: For use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are required, and for the elimination of flexible connectors. Victaulic Installation-Ready Style 177 or Style 77.

3. 14” and Larger: AGS Series, with lead-in chamfer on housing key and wide width FlushSeal gasket. Victaulic Style W07 (rigid) and Style

W77 (flexible).

2.05 VALVES - GENERAL

A. Gate and globe valves shall be repackable under pressure, with gland follower. The temperature/pressure rating shall not be less than the design criteria applicable to the system.

B. Manufacturer; Victaulic, Crane, Nibco, Jamesbury, Apollo, Milwaukee,

Grinnell and Hammond.

2.06 GATE VALVES UP TO 2 1/2 INCH - SCREWED END

A. Solid wedge, union bonnet, inside screw, traveling stem, screwed.

B. 125 lb saturated steam, 200 lb non-shock WOG.


D. Application; steel piping systems.

2.07 GATE VALVES UP TO 2 1/2 INCH - SOLDER END




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

A. Solid wedge, inside screw, traveling stem, screw-in bonnet.

B. 200 lb non-shock WOG.



2.08 GATE VALVES OVER 2 1/2 INCH - IBBM

A. Solid wedge, bolted bonnet, outside screw and yoke, rising stem, grooved end or flanged.

B. 125 lb saturated steam, 200 lb non-shock WOG, 300-psig CWP.

C. Iron body, bronze mounted conforming to MSS SP 70.


2.09 GATE VALVES OVER 2 1/2 INCH - BRONZE

A. Solid wedge, renewable bronze seat rings, outside screw and yoke, rising stem, bolted bone, flanged.




2.10 GLOBE VALVES UP TO 2 1/2 INCH - SCREWED END

A. Renewable composition disc, screwed bonnet, screwed.




2.11 GLOBE VALVES UP TO 2 1/2 INCH - SOLDER END

A. Renewable composition disc, screw-in bonnet, rising stem.

B. 300 lb non-shock cold water.



2.12 GLOBE VALVES OVER 2 1/2 INCH - IBBM

A. 125 lb at 450, 200 lb non-shock WOG.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

B. Regrindable and renewable beveled bronze disc and seat ring, outside screw and yoke.

C. Iron body, bronze mounted.


2.13 BALL VALVES UP TO 2 1/2 INCH



C. Teflon seats, packing and gasket, stainless steel ball.

D. Application; Steel or copper piping systems.

2.14 BALL VALVES 1-1/2 INCH TO 6 INCH

A.

All ductile iron, grooved ends.

B.

800-psig CWP.

C.

Chrome plated steel or stainless steel ball and stem.

D.

Application: Steel piping systems: Heat Pump S/R, Heating HWS/R, Dual

Temperature S/R, and Compressed Air

E.

Basis of Design: Victaulic Series 726.

2.15 SWING CHECK VALVES UP TO 2 1/2 INCH - SCREWED END



C. Regrinding bronze disk.


2.16 SWING CHECK VALVES UP TO 3 INCH - SOLDER END

A. Regrinding bronze disc.

B. 300 lb non-shock WOG.

C. All bronze, ASTM B62.


2.17 SWING CHECK VALVES OVER 3 INCH - ALL BRONZE

A. Renewable bronze seat ring and composition disc, bolted cover, flanged.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

B. All bronze, ASTM B62.

C. 175 lb non-shock cold water.


2.18 SWING CHECK VALVES OVER 2 1/2 INCH - IBBM

A. Iron body bronze mounted conforming to MSS SP 71.


C. Renewable and regrindable bronze disk and seat ring, bolted cover.


2.19 SPRING-ACTUATED CHECK VALVES OVER 2-INCH – VERTICAL OR

HORIZONTAL

A.

Iron body, stainless steel spring and shaft.

B.

300-psig CWP (to 12”) and 230-psig (14” to 24”).

C.

Application: Steel piping systems: Heat Pump S/R, Heating HWS/R, Dual

Temperature S/R, and Compressed Air

D.

Basis of Design: Victaulic Series 726.

2.20 BUTTERFLY VALVES 2 INCH AND OVER

A. Systems applicable:

Heating HWS/R

B. Valves shall be grooved end or wafer type iron butterfly valves for 300 psi working pressure -20 deg F to 230 deg F. a. 2” through 12” Sizes: The seat shall be pressure responsive and rated to 250 deg F.

C. Valves shall have lever operators with locking set points, removable and replaceable liner, nylon bearings, and stainless steel stem. a. Stem shall be offset from the disc centerline to provide complete

D.

360-degree circumferential seating.

Manufacturers: Centerline (wafer), Victaulic (grooved), or prior approved equal.

2.21 STRAINERS

A. Self cleaning "Y" type screwed end up to 2 inch with machined seats and




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 blow-off outlet, stainless steel screen. All bronze, 150 lb steam 300 lb nonshock WOG, for steel or copper piping systems.

B. Self cleaning "Y" type flanged 2 1/2 inch and up with bolted cover flange, blow-off outlet, 125 lb ANSI, brass screen, iron body, for steel piping systems.

C. Self cleaning "Y" type flanged 2 1/2 inch and up with bolted cover flange, blow-off outlet, brass screen. All bronze construction ASTM B-62 150 lb steam 225 lb non-shock WOG, for copper piping systems.

D. Perforations; .033" pipe size to 2 inch, .057" pipe size 2 1/2 to 4 inch, 1/8

" pipe size 6 inch and up.

E. Manufacturers; Muesco, Sarco, Hoffman, Metraflex, Mueller, or prior approved equal.

F. Grooved End Y or T type strainers, with ductile iron body and coupled cover or factory-fabricated steel body with T-bolt hinged closure, and stainless steel perforated metal / frame and mesh basket, rated to 300-psig CWP.

Basis of Design: Victaulic Style 732/W732 and 730/W730.

2.22 THERMOMETERS

A. Separable socket, inserted into fluid flow, adjustable, hermetically sealed, red mercury, die cast case, baked enamel finish, double strength glass lens, white scale and black graduations.

B. Manufacturer; U.S.Gauge, H.O. Trerice, Moeller, Duro, Ernst.

2.23 GAUGES

A. Phosphor bronze bourdon tube, polypropylene case, gasketed glass crystal, aluminum dial, black graduations, 4 1/2 inch diameter.

B. Installed with bronze gauge cock.

C. Manufacturer; Danton, U.S. Gauge, H.O. Trerice, Moeller.

2.24 TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE PLUGS

A. Furnish and install on the inlet and outlet of all heat exchange devices and terminal equipment, a temperature and pressure insertion device fitting.

B. Provide temperature and pressure reading instrument to owner at completion of the work.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015


A. Insulated dielectric unions to prevent the flow of electric between adjacent sections of piping. Unions shall have the same pressure and temperature ratings of the installed systems.

B. Fittings shall be screwed union type up to 2 inch and flanged type above 2 inch. Grooved end or Flanged type shall have isolating gaskets and isolated bolt holes.

C. Manufacturer; Victaulic Style 47, Epco Sales Inc., Central Plastics.

2.26 UNIONS

A. All equipment, control valves, and coils shall be provided with union connections up to 2 1/2 inch and flanged connections above 2 1/2 inch.


C. Unions and flanges for servicing and disconnect are not required in installations using grooved joint couplings. (The couplings shall serve as disconnect points.)

2.27 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Flexible connectors shall be provided on the suction and discharge of all base mounted pumps and wherever else indicated on the drawings.

B. Connectors shall be braided hose or reinforced rubber as manufactured by

R.K.L. Control Inc., Anaconda, Flexonics, or Mason Industries.

C. Three grooved joint (Victaulic) couplings may be used in lieu of a flexible connector at equipment connections to accommodate vibration attenuation and stress relief. The couplings shall be placed in close proximity to the source of the vibration.

2.28 PIPE SADDLES

A. Pipe saddles shall be welded to all steel pipe 2 1/2 inches or larger for support of the pipe at hanger locations where the piping conveys hot fluids or steam.

B. The saddles shall be packed with insulation of the same material used for




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 adjacent pipe insulation.

2.29 PIPE ANCHORS AND GUIDES

A. Anchors for retarding and constraining pipe movement shall be installed to maintain the piping in the proper position. Pipe anchors shall be a rigid constraint between the pipe and the building structural system.

B. Where the piping is constrained to move in a designated direction furnish and install pipe alignment guides to control the movement of the pipe. The guides shall be fastened to the building structural system. Guides shall be commercially manufactured by J.J. McNally, Flexonics, or Tube Turns.

C. Two sets of guides shall be installed on each side of an expansion joint.

2.30 SUPPORTS

A. Piping shall be supported from structure at intervals not exceeding:

PIPE SIZE INTERVAL

COPPER

Up to 1"

1 ½"

2"

2 ½"

STEEL

6'

6'

10'

10'

3'

3 ½'

3 ½'

4'

3"

4"

6"

8"

10'

10'

4'

4 ½'

5'

5'

Piping to be supported at pipe joints not to exceed spacing for copper and steel piping. PVC piping to be supported on 4'-0" spacing. Copper tubing up to 1 1/4" to be supported on 6' spacing, over 1 1/4" to be supported on

10'-0" spacing. Other piping to be supported per manufacturer.

B. Hangers shall be copper or copper plated for copper piping, galvanized or corrosion resistant for steel and PVC piping.

C. Provide insulation saddles for insulated piping.

D. Piping supports shall be clevis type hangers.

E. Piping which is 2 1/2" in diameter or larger and has hangers longer than

12" in length shall be seismic braced. Bracing shall be with angle iron




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 stiffeners at 45° angles attached to the structural support and the clevis hanger. See detail on drawings. Bracing shall be at spacing dimensions given above.




2.32 COMPRESSION TANKS

A. ASME label, carbon steel welded construction, with gauge glass, Airtrol tank fitting.

B. Manufacturers: Amtrol, B&G, The John Wood Company.

2.33 DIAPHRAGM TYPE EXPANSION TANK

A. Welded steel, galvanized inside and outside, ASME Section VIII stamped,

125 PSI working pressure, pre-charged to the 12'-0" minimum operating pressure.

B. Diaphragm-type butyl rubber expansion chamber.

C. Bronze fittings.

D. Manufacturer: Amtrol Series AX, Armstrong, TACO, B&G, The John Wood

Company.

2.34 AIR ELIMINATION VALVE

A. Continuous elimination of air, float activated, remote pressure operated, cast iron and steel, bronze fitted, 125 PSI working pressure.

B. Manufacturer: Amtrol, Armstrong, TACO, B&G, The John Wood Company.

2.35 WATER FEEDERS

A. Furnish and install a water makeup and pressure reducing valve for each closed circuit water circulating system. Valve shall be protected with strainer, check valve, isolation valves and bypass valve.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

2.36 RELIEF VALVES

A. Furnish and install an ASME pressure relief valve on each closed circuit water circulating system capable of relieving the full heat generating capacity of the system.

2.37 BALANCING VALVES - ORIGINAL

A. Furnish and install flow control valves at each heat pump, fan coil, unit heater, radiator, HVAC unit, coil or any other terminal device and at floor return riser connections, and at hot water to boilers.

B. Each balancing valve on terminal equipment shall be factory set. Other balancing valves shall be field setable with orifice taps and calibration setting to adjust the system to the indicated flow. Balancing valves shall be complete with ball valve shut off, (2) P/T ports, air vent and union.

C. Manufacturers: Victaulic, Autoflow or B&G Circuit Sentry for terminal equipment. Autoflow, B&G Circuit Sentry, or B&G Circuit Setter for other locations. Equal by Tour and Anderson, Wheatly, Armstrong.

D. Each flow control valve shall be preceded by a 20 mesh stainless steel strainer. Strainer shall be line size with combination ball valve shut off, PT port, drain valve and union end.

2.38 CHEMICAL FEEDER

A. Size as indicated on the drawings, steel, fill funnel and valve, pressure gauge, sight glass.

2.39 TRIPLE DUTY VALVES

A. In lieu of a non-slam check valve and balancing valve on the discharge side of centrifugal pumps, contractor may substitute with a triple duty valve.

B. The valve shall have a cast iron body, bronze disc and seat, stainless steel stem and spring, and calibrated name plate.

C. Valve shall be rated for 175 PSIG maximum working pressure and 250 deg

F maximum operating temperature.

D. Manufacturers; Bell & Gossett, Taco, Armstrong, Wheatley




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

E. Triple Duty Valve Assembly: Assembly shall consist of a Victaulic

MasterSeal butterfly valve with memory stop and a Series 779 Venturi-

Check, rated for water service to 230°F (110°C) and pressures to 300 psig

(2065-kPa).

1.

For 14” through 24” sizes, Victaulic AGS-Vic300 butterfly valve with

Series W715 AGS check valve, rated for pressures to 230 psig (1575kPa).

2.40 SUCTION DIFFUSER

A. In lieu of a strainer and blowdown on the suction side of a centrifugal pump, contractor may substitute with a suction diffuser.

B. The suction Diffuser shall have a cast ductile iron body, stainless steel inlet vanes, and stainless steel combination diffuser - strainer - orifice cylinder.

C. The orifice cylinder shall be able to withstand pressure differential equal to pump shutoff.

D. Manufacturers; Bell & Gossett, Taco, Armstrong, Wheatley


3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS

A. All piping shall be arranged to drain to a drainable low point. The low point shall be provided with a drain valve at least 1/2 inch and a hose end thread as a minimum. Extensions to floor drains may be required elsewhere in which case the drain line shall gradually slope to the drain and terminate at the drain with a 90 degree elbow.

B. Air vents shall be placed at the high points of all portions of systems which may trap air. This shall apply to piping, equipment, coils, exchangers or any other place that air may collect. At these points install automatic air vents which shall automatically vent the air from the system.

C. Piping shall run square with building lines.

D. Piping shall not be insulated until it is pressure and leak tested and until the building is closed in.

E. Necessary drains, offsets, rises, vents, and drips shall be provided for as




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 part of the contracted work. Where any such rise or drip is necessary the contractor shall install same as part of the work and as directed by the engineer. The drawings are diagrammatic in nature and due to the small scale it is not possible to show all necessary drains, vents, offsets and rises which may be required to properly execute the work and such items shall be provided as needed.

F. Running or close nipples are not allowed.

G. Piping shall not be installed over electrical panels, equipment, transformers, motor control centers, switch, gear, or substations. If absolutely necessary piping may be sleeved to prevent water from falling on electrical gear provided the installation is acceptable to the electrical inspectors.

H. Allow clearances for expansion and contraction. Provide swing ells at

I. connection points so as not to strain piping systems.

Exposed insulated risers shall be covered with 22 gauge galvanized steel sleeves from floor to ceiling.

J. All piping shall be installed on the interior conditioned side of the building insulation.

K. Utilize eccentric reducers on steam and water piping systems with tops level for water systems and bottoms level for steam systems.

L. Furnish and install dielectric pipe couplings between sections of ferrous and non ferrous piping systems and between copper or brass equipment and ferrous piping systems.

M. Piping shall be supported from adjustable clevis type hangers at distances specified in Section 15000. Provide sway bracing to prevent horizontal movement of pipe.

N. Grooved joint shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, or roll marks. The gasket shall be molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer of an elastomer suitable for the intended service. The coupling manufacturer’s factory trained representative shall provide on-site training for the contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools and installation of product. The representative shall periodically visit the job site to ensure best practices in grooved product installation are being followed. (A distributor’s representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training.)




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015


A. Provide stencils or snap-on labels to identify all piping systems.

B. Labels shall indicate the service of the pipe and the direction of flow.


3.03 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. All valves shall be identified except fixture stop valves and terminal device shut off valves.

B. Identification shall consist of a metallic tag chained to the valve with tag number pressed into the metal.

C. Provide a piping system diagram with valve numbers identified. The diagram shall be easily legible, framed in glass, and mounted in the mechanical room or where directed by the owner. Multiple charts may be necessary and required where various piping systems or portions of systems need be identified for simplicity.

3.04 WELDING





ANSI B16.9.










Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

3.05 SOLDERING AND BRAZING

A. Ream or file pipe or tube to remove burrs.

B. Clean and polish contact surfaces.

C. Apply flux to both male and female surfaces.

D. Insert tube full depth into socket.

E. Bring joint to soldering or brazing temperature in as short a time as possible.

F. Form a continuous solder bead or brazing filler bead around entire circumference of the joint.

G. Tin-lead 50-50 shall not be allowed on the site.

H. Brazed joints of 95-5 tin antimony AWS 5.8 shall be used for refrigerant

I. piping, hot water heating piping, drainage piping, domestic hot, cold, and recirculated water piping.

Flux shall be non-toxic.

3.06 VALVES



C. Valves installed above 7 feet in mechanical rooms shall have chain operators.

D. Check valves shall be installed on the discharge side of pumps and wherever else indicated on the drawings.

3.07 STRAINERS

A. Strainers shall be installed on the suction side of all pumps and at the inlets to all control valves.

B. Provide a blow down valve of at least 1/2 inch size connected to each strainer blow off port.

3.08 GAUGES

A. Pressure gauges shall be installed on the suction and discharge side of all pumps and wherever else indicated on the drawings or specified.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

3.09 SYSTEM START-UP

A. Fill system and thoroughly flush all sediment, dirt, particles and any other material from the system. Furnish and install necessary hose connections as may be necessary to accomplish.

B. Remove all air from the system. This will require several bleeding sequences to remove all air from the system. Provide all necessary air vents to accomplish. Where existing systems are connected, remove air from the existing system also.

C. Clean all strainers after thorough flushing.

D. Provide chemical treatment for first year of operation including all necessary tests, chemicals, additives and service visits.

END OF SECTION




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

SECTION 23 25 13 - HOT WATER AND HEAT PUMP PIPING TREATMENT

SYSTEM BYPASS FEEDER


1.01 REFERENCE

A. Refer to Section 15000 for requirements which are applicable to this section.

B. Refer to International and City of Philadelphia codes.

C. Refer to EPA and OSHA regulations.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to install equipment and place into operation a complete water treatment system.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings of equipment.

B. Submit treatment procedures.


2.01 GENERAL

A. Contractor shall supply and install the water treatment system package as specified herein.

B. A single water treatment company shall be responsible for all products and services. This company shall be a recognized specialist in the field of industrial water treatment with full time personnel available to the

BYPASS FEEDER 232513 - 1



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 contractor.

C. This water treatment package shall be provided by Kroff Chemical. No equivalent.

2.02 CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT

A. The contractor shall install all of the following; including all external piping.

1. One - minimum five gallon bypass feeder with 3 1/2" fill opening designed to meet the specific capacity and pressure requirements of the system.

2. One - Bypass bag filter housing for removal of suspended dirt and debris. This filter housing shall be constructed out of carbon steel and shall be sized to system capacity and pressure.

2.03 WATER TREATMENT CHEMICALS

A. All hot water lines and related equipment shall be thoroughly precleaned and flushed with chemicals designed to remove mill scale, oils, loose rust and pipe dope.

B. Provide a one year supply of the recommended formulas for the prevention of corrosion in this system. All formulations must be compatible with system construction materials and meet or exceed all environmental requirements.

C. The water treatment company will supply all testing equipment and reagents necessary to properly maintain the treatment program.

D. The water treatment company will provide a water treatment service program for a period of one year from system startup. This program shall include: startup assistance, plant personnel training, periodic service calls and inspection of system equipment.

END OF SECTION

BYPASS FEEDER 232513 - 2



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

SECTION 23 31 13 - DUCTWORK


1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Construct rectangular ductwork to meet all functional criteria defined in

Section VII, of the SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and

Flexible" latest edition. This shall be subsequently referred to as the

SMACNA Manual. All ductwork must comply with all local, state and federal code requirements.

B. Refer to Section 23 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section.

C. The SMACNA Manual, ASHRAE Handbooks, International Mechanical Code, and NFPA Pamphlet 90A shall apply to this work.

D. Provide labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to install a complete air handling system as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

E. Contractor is to furnish and install volume dampers in all supply, return, exhaust, and outside air branch ductwork. If these are omitted from the drawings, the contractor is to make an allowance to install them.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Ductwork shop drawings must be properly submitted. Any ductwork installed without prior approval by the engineer and found to be incorrect, shall be replaced at the expense of the contractor.

B. Submit shop drawings of all sheet metal for review. Drawings shall be not less than 1/4" scale and show all light fixtures, steel, piping, conduit, equipment and architectural features. It is unacceptable to resubmit and modify McHugh design documents for sheet metal drawing purposes.

1. Indicate structural steel and elevation of bottom of beams and joists or floor to bottom dimension.

2. Indicate ductwork elevation and/or floor to bottom of duct. Verify ductwork fits in available space.

3. Indicate waste and storm piping where it occurs in the area of

DUCTWORK 233113 - 1



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 ductwork.

4. Locate electrical gear on plan. Ductwork is not to run above panels.

5. Ductwork is to be shown double line with indicated width and height.

Allowance to be made for lining and/or insulation.

6. Duct sizes shown on contract drawings may be flattened to a 4 to 1 ratio when necessary to establish clearance. Such transitions are to be included in the contract price.

7. Ductwork fabrication shall not proceed until shop drawings are submitted for review.

8. All dampers, grilles, registers, diffusers, access panels, louvers, coils, filters, and other components of the system are to be indicated.

9. Provide detail of fire damper assembly.

10. Provide drawing sections when requested by the engineer.

Coordinate sheetmetal drawings with light fixture layout and sprinkler system piping and heads and shown on the drawing.

C. Submit manufacturer’s literature and performance data of equipment and devices for review.

D. Samples: Furnish at request of A/E.

E. Contractor to coordinate work with sprinkler piping and head locations.


A. The contractor must comply with the enclosed specification in its entirety.

If on inspections, the specifier finds changes have been made without prior approval, the contractor will make the applicable changes to comply with this specification, at the contractor’s expense.

B. At the discretion of the specifier, sheet metal gauges, and reinforcing may be checked at various times to verify all duct construction is in compliance.

1.04 GAUGES

A. Supply ductwork to diffusers: 2" w.g.

B. All other exhaust, return ductwork: 1" w.g.


2.01 FABRICATED DUCT REQUIREMENTS - DUCTMATE

DUCTWORK 233113 - 2



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

A. All interior rectangular ducts shall be constructed with G-60 or better galvanized steel (ASTM A-653-94) LFQ, chem treat. Exterior ductwork shall be G-90 or better galvanized steel LFQ, chem treat. Kitchen, shower, or dishwasher exhaust shall be aluminum with aluminum joints.

B. Materials: Support, access doors not part of ducts, bar or angle reinforcing damper rods and items made of uncoated mild steel shall be painted with two coats of primer or provide galvanized equivalent.

C. Longitudinal Seams. Pittsburgh lock shall be used on all longitudinal seams. All longitudinal seams will be sealed with mastic sealant.

Snaplock is not acceptable.

D. Flanged interior Gasket. Ductmate 440 or a Butyl Rubber Gasket which meets Mil-C 18969B, Type II Class B, TT-C-1796 A, Type II Class B, and

TTS-S-001657 must also pass UL-723. This material, in addition to the above, shall not contain vegetable oils, fish oils, or any other type vehicle that will support fungal and/or bacterial growth associated with dark, damp areas of ductwork. The recommended test procedure for bacterial and fungal growth is found in 21CFR 177, 1210 closures with sealing gaskets for food containers.

E. Ductmate or W.D.C.I. proprietary duct connection systems will be accepted. Duct constructed using these systems will refer to the manufacturers guidelines for sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcements.

F. Formed - on flanges (T.D.C./T.D.F./T-25A/T-25B) be accepted. Formed on flanges will be constructed as SMACNA T-25 flanges, whose limits are defined on page 1.36 1995 SMACNA Manual, Second Edition. No other construction pertaining to formed - on flanges will be accepted. Formed on flanges shall be accepted for use on ductwork 42" wide or less and must include the use of corners, bolts and cleat. (Over 42", the reinforcement/joint deflection criteria no longer conform with the UMC).

G. Rectangular ductwork in most areas, and toilet rooms shall be aluminum construction with aluminum hangers, supports, and fasteners.

H. Rectangular ductwork above the roof or outside shall be 4" water gauge construction.

2.02 ROUND DUCTS

A. Construction: In accordance with HVAC Duct Construction Standards,

Section III.

DUCTWORK 233113 - 3



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

B. Round ductwork shall be spiral seam construction only. Gauges shall be in accordance with SMACNA Duct construction Standard and fittings in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standard, except as noted:

1. Joints 0"-20" diameter, interior slip coupling beaded at center, fastened to duct, with sealing compound applied continuously around joint before assembling and after fastening. Wrap joints with

3 inch wide duct tape.

2. Provide double wall with 1" insulation and perforated liner for all air conditioning supply ducts.

3. Round ductwork in the most areas and toilet rooms shall be aluminum with aluminum hangers, supports, and fasteners.

2.03 FIBERGLASS DUCTBOARD

A. Fiberglass ductboard is not acceptable.

2.04 SEALERS

A. Duct sealer shall be flexible, water-based, adhesive sealant designed for use in all pressure duct systems. After curing, it shall be resistant to ultraviolet light and shall seal out water, air and moisture. Sealer shall be

UL listed and conform to ASTM E84. Sealer shall be Ductmate PROseal or an approved equal.

B. All joints shall be sealed.

2.05 DUCTWORK HANGER/SUPPORT

A. Hang and support ductwork as defined by SMACNA, Section IV 1995

Manual, Section Edition, or as defined within. Hanger spacing not to exceed 8'.

B. Not Permitted: Sheetmetal screws in a metal deck.

2.06 ACCESS DOORS IN DUCTWORK

A. Access doors shall be hinged or Ductmate Sandwich Type Access Doors manufactured by Ductmate Industries, Inc. Doors shall be of adequate size to allow easy access to hardware which needs to be maintained.

DUCTWORK 233113 - 4



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

2.07 TURNING VANES

A. Turning vanes shall be Harper single wall turning vanes fabricated from the same material as the duct. Tab spacing shall be SMACNA standard. Rail systems with non-standard tab spacing’s shall not be accepted. All tabs shall be used, do not skip tabs. Mounting rails shall have friction insert tabs which align the vanes automatically. Vanes shall be subjected to tensile loading and be capable of supporting 250 lbs. when fastened per the manufacturer's instructions. Approved Systems: Ductmate PRO-Rail.

2.08 SOUND ATTENUATING DUCT LINING

A. All transfer air ductwork and unit returns being utilized for return air

Plenum use shall be lined.

B. Duct liner shall have a flame spread of not over 25, a fuel contributed of not over 50 and a smoke developed of not over 50.

C. Liner shall be minimum 1 inch thick, 1.5 Lbs. /Cu. Ft. density with a thermal conductance of .24 at 50 deg. F. mean temperature.

(Conductance: BTU/Sq. Ft. /F/Hr.).

D. Liner shall not spall or deteriorate at air velocities to 4000 FPM when installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Liner shall be Johns-Manville Linacoustic or approved substitute by

Owens-Corning, CertainTeed, or Knauf. Observe all installation instructions.

F. Any ductwork in unconditioned spaces or outdoors shall have insulation totaling R-8.3.

2.09 FLEXIBLE INSULATED DUCTWORK

A. Contractor may utilize flexible factory insulated ductwork for short connections from trunk ducts to diffusers when concealed. Lengths shall not exceed 10 feet.

B. Pressure rating: Minimum 10" w.g.

C. Outer Jacket: Aluminum equivalent to Flexmaster 5M 4.2 vapor barrier

D. Insulation for ductwork in conditioned spaces: R-4.2.

E. Insulation for ductwork in unconditioned spaces/outdoors - R-8.

F. Liner: Wire with laminated mylar

G. Manufacturer: Atco, Flexmaster. Or prior approved equal.

H. Applies to supply ductwork only. Exhaust and return ductwork to be rigid ductwork.

DUCTWORK 233113 - 5



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

I. Flexible insulated ductwork to comply with 25/50 flame spread and smoke density ratings.

2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. Between all fans, air handlers, A/C units and ductwork.

B. Material: Woven fiberglass with mounting accessories.

C. Minimum 1" and maximum 4" between adjacent sections.

2.11 DAMPERS

A. Location: Where required to control flow of air or to balance air systems.

Additionally includes at each supply/return/outside/exhaust air branch ductwork, each air device, individual duct risers, branch ductwork off duct risers, VAV box inlet.

B. Type: Opposed blade, bearings at each end, adjustment quadrant and locking device for ducts over 1 square foot. Under 1 square foot dampers may be single blade with locking device.

C. Leakage: 10 cfm maximum at 4" S.P. for 4 Sq. Ft. damper.

D. Material: galvanized steel in galvanized steel ductwork, extruded aluminum in aluminum ductwork.

2.12 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Furnish and install pre-manufactured dampers with 1 1/2 hr. UL Label where required by code or indicated on the drawings.

B. Fusible links shall be set at 160 deg. F. Provide 10 % extra links to the owner.

C. SET FIRE DAMPERS IN 20 GAUGE SLEEVES WITH BREAKAWAY

CONNECTIONS TO THE DUCTWORK ON EACH SIDE. SEE STANDARD

SMACNA DETAILS FOR INSTALLATION. DAMPERS INSTALLED

INCORRECTLY WILL BE REQUIRED TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACED

CORRECTLY.

D. Damper shall be set in wall or floor construction.

E. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and the authority having jurisdiction.

F. Damper blades shall be held out of airstream for ducts smaller than 14".

G. Provide 12" x 12" access door in ductwork for access to each damper.

Label "FIRE DAMPER ACCESS" with 2" high stenciled letters.

DUCTWORK 233113 - 6



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

H. Manufacturers; Prefco, American Warming and Ventilating, Air Balance,

Phillips, Nailor-Hart, Lloyd.

I. Fire dampers in fiberglass ductboard systems shall be installed in steel sleeves. The fiberglass duct shall be terminated and the steel sleeve installed at the fire wall or floor. Rigid ductboard shall not continue thru the fire wall.

2.13 VOLUME DAMPER CONTROL - REMOTE EXTERNAL CONTROL

A.

Applications: Drywall ceilings or where shown on drawings.

B.

Location: In ductwork where required to control air flow or balance air systems.

C.

Volume damper type: Opposed single blade round butterfly damper for external control, EPDM low leakage seals, scoop and spin-in type shell,

Young Regulator Co. 5020 CC Series. Rectangular: #830-CC Series.

D.

Leakage: 10 CFM maximum at 4" s.p.for 4 square foot damper.

E.

Material: Galvanized steel in galvanized steel ductwork, extruded aluminum in aluminum ductwork.

F.

Controls: Bowden Cable Control Kit 270-896C to include hardware, for ceiling mounting in conjunction with external control of round or rectangular dampers, flush 7/8" diameter cold rolled steel cover is zinc plated for painting, 12" wrench (damper adjustments), metal clad control cable.


3.01 DUCTWORK

A. Dimensions on drawings are inside of lining.

B. Ducts shall be concealed unless otherwise indicated.

C. Changes in direction shall be made with radius bends or turning vanes.

D. Ducts shall be cross-broken or machine grooved over 18 inches in width.

E. Supports: Galvanized steel per SMACNA.

F. Longitudinal joints; Pittsburg Lock or Inside Groove.

G. Connections to wall louvers shall be sloped down to louver connection to prevent water draining into interior.

DUCTWORK 233113 - 7



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

H. All ducts to have nested takeoffs, 45 degree cants, or adjustable turning vanes at all branch duct takeoffs.

3.02 ACCESS DOORS

A. Furnish and install at all fire dampers, heating coils, humidifiers, filters, smoke dampers, valves, volume dampers and wherever indicated on the drawings.

B. Minimum 12" x 12" double thick 22 gauge with 1" fiberglass, fully gasketed and with cam lock or latches.

3.03 LOUVERS

A. Ductwork to an intake or exhaust louver shall slope down to the louver as to prevent water entering the ductwork.

3.04 LEAK SEALING

A. All joints shall be sealed to prevent leakage.

B. Systems shall be sealed with high velocity duct sealant.

END OF SECTION

DUCTWORK 233113 - 8



January 30, 2015

SECTION 23 34 00 - FANS AND ROOF VENTS


1.01 REFERENCE


B. Refer to NFPA Codes and in particular Pamphlet 90A 6 for requirements which are applicable to the work of this section.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and catalog cuts of all items specified in this section.

B. Submit performance data and electrical requirements of all items.

C. Refer to exhaust fan schedule for additional information.


A. Insure that all items are installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Items are required to be wired in accordance with the National Electrical

Code and be installed in conformance with the requirements of

International Mechanical Code and the authorities having jurisdiction.


2.01 CEILING EXHAUST FANS

A. Furnish and install recessed ceiling exhaust fans of the size and capacity indicated on the drawings. Fans shall be UL listed and have steel centrifugal wheels, galvanized steel housing, backdraft damper, and

FANS 233400 - 1



January 30, 2015 thermal overload motor protection.

B. The fan shall be removable from casing, be sound attenuated, and be complete with matching grille.

C. Commercial Application Manufacturers; Cook “GC/GN” Series or approved substitute by Carnes, Jenn, Greenheck, or Penn Barry.

D. Residential Application (Apartments, Houses, Condominiums)

Manufacturers; Panasonic, Nutone, and Broan.

2.02 CEILING PROPELLER FAN

A. Furnish and install ceiling or high bay air circulation fans of the size and capacity indicated on the drawings.

B. Fans shall be propeller type with steel pipe supports, steel yoke, heavy duty capacitor, die cast aluminum housing, thermally protected with copper windings, silicon steel stator and rotor, and die formed steel blades.

C. Fans shall be Awesome 60 by Leading Edge, Inc. 305-255-7070 or Heat dropper by Globe Engineering, Inc. 201-276-5334.

2.03 ROOF VENTS - HOOD TYPE

A. Furnish and install gravity roof vents as indicated on the drawings.

B. Roof vent shall be fabricated from aluminum sheet with welded seams.

Top shall be sloped for drainage. Inside of hood shall be insulated with 1" fiberglass to prevent condensation dripping.

C. Vent shall be provided with matching self-flashing roof curb with interior insulation. Curb shall be minimum 12" high.

D. Vents shall be provided with snow/insect screen for intakes.

E. Provide motor operated dampers in throat which shall be ATC controlled.

F. Hood shall be hinged for access to damper.

G. Manufacturers: Cook, Carnes, Penn Barry, Acme, Greenheck, Jenn.


3.01 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate wall, roof, and ceiling opening locations and sizes with the

FANS 233400 - 2



January 30, 2015 general contractor.

B. Coordinate all electrical requirements with the electrical contractor.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Cooperate with the roofing contractor in the setting and flashing of the roof fans and roof vents. Each fan and vent shall be carefully set, flashed and counter flashed to provide a watertight roof penetration. The architect must approve the installation prior to acceptance of the installation.

B. The ceiling exhaust fan shall be supported from construction above, not ceiling tiles or ceiling runners or grids. Connect to ductwork and extend ductwork to the perimeter of the building.

C. Each fan shall be connected to ductwork with a flexible connection.

D. The contractor shall be responsible for all control wiring associated with interlocking the fans with the air conditioning systems. Control wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code.

E. Install fans with vibration isolating mounts wherever horsepower is 1/2 or over.

F. Verify wall opening or roof opening size before proceeding.

G. Verify electrical branch wiring, circuit breaker and safety switch before proceeding.

H. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

I. Any steel shall be primed with Rustoleum and coated with 2 coats of

J enamel paint.

Wire in accordance with the N.E.C. Provide local wall switch where directed by the Architect or Owner if not specified in 23 09 00 have ATC control.

END OF SECTION

FANS 233400 - 3



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

SECTION 23 37 00 - AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES


1.01 REFERENCE


B. The SMACNA Low Velocity Duct Manual, ASHRAE Handbooks, International

Mechanical Code, and NFPA Pamphlet 90A shall apply to this work.

C. Refer to Section 23 31 13 Ductwork.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to install a complete air handling system with all supply and return distribution devices as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

B. Contractor is to furnish and install a volume damper in all supply, return, exhaust, and outside air branch ductwork. If these are omitted from the drawings, the contractor is to make an allowance to install one.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer’s literature and performance data of equipment and devices for review.

B. Samples; Furnish at request of A/E.


A. Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with manufacturer’s warranty requirements.

B. Provide adequate supervision of labor force to see that installations are correct.

AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 233700 - 1



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015


2.01 AIR DIFFUSERS

A. Furnish and install terminal air diffusers of the size and capacity indicated on the drawings.

B. Room terminal air velocity shall not exceed 50 fpm. NC level shall not exceed 40. Air static pressure drop shall not exceed 0.10" wg.

C. Diffusers shall be square face, multiple louver type, with separable outer frame and removable inner core assembly, 1-2-3 or 4 way below, 22 gauge,

18" x 18" face size for 24" x 24" lay-in with round neck sized for volume and not to exceed 0.10" s.p. drop. Not to exceed 1/4" drop from ceiling to bottom of louver face. Titus TDC or equivalent by listed manufacturers.

Adjustable to be type TDCA.

D. Diffusers shall be steel with a baked enamel finish unless otherwise specified with screwdriver adjustable opposed blade volume control from face, removable face, and adjustable pattern control. Finish shall be #26 white, and must pass ASTM D117 Corrosive Environment Salt Spray Test,

ASTM 870 Water Immersion Test, and ASTM D-2794 Reverse Impact

Cracking Test with a 50 #force applied.

E. Each diffuser shall have a mounting flange specifically selected for the particular type of ceiling finish. Contractor to coordinate with architectural ceiling details.

F. Furnish and install equalizing grids and turning vanes at duct connection.

G. Face size shall be 12" x 12" for up to 150 cfm and 24" x 24" for all other sizes.

H. Manufacturers; Carnes, Tuttle and Bailey, Krueger, Nailor Hart, Metal Aire,

I.

Anemostat. Price, or prior approved equal.

Performance shall be tested in accordance with ASHRAE 70-1991.

J. Where other than 360 degree pattern is required, provide sectorizing baffles to control air flow.

K. Perforated face ceiling diffusers are not acceptable

L. With earthquake tabs.

M. Those diffusers located in moist areas including kitchens, toilet rooms, etc. shall be similar but all aluminum construction.

2.02 LINEAR AIR DIFFUSERS




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

A. Furnish and install linear type air diffusers of the lengths and capacities indicated on the drawings.

B. Diffusers shall be extruded aluminum with internal deflector blades which shall allow adjustment of air flow in either direction or straight down.

C. Diffusers shall be installed in a sheet metal plenum which shall be supplied with duct connectors from the supply duct at intervals as indicated. Each duct connector shall have a balancing damper.

D. Manufacturers: Carnes, Titus, Tuttle and Bailey, Krueger, Nailor Hart,

Price.

E. Provide plaster frame for drywall or plaster ceilings. Refer to architectural drawings for ceiling type.

2.03 REGISTERS AND GRILLES

A. Furnish and install where indicated on the drawing.

B. Registers and grilles shall be aluminum with satin finish, #26 white.

C. Registers shall have opposed blade volume control.

D. Registers and grilles shall have separable frames, or removable cores, with extruded aluminum blades on 1/2" centers for return and exhaust and 3/4" centers for supply, single set at 45 degrees for return or exhaust and double deflection adjustable for supply. Reinforced corners, mitered.

E. Furnish and install turning vanes for connections to ducts.

F. Where registers or grilles are located low near floor they shall be heavy duty 14 gauge steel with fixed 45 degree blades on 1/2" centers. In damp areas they shall be extruded aluminum.

G. Where drawings indicate linear return grilles they shall be linear extruded aluminum with 1/8" bars 3/4" long on 1/4" centers.

H. Manufacturers: Same as diffusers.

I. Provide separable frames in drywall, plaster, or masonry construction.

2.04 LOUVERS

A. Louvers shall be extruded aluminum with 12 gauge blades and frames 2" deep up to 12" in height. 4" deep from 12" to 36" in height, and 6" deep above 36" in height. Louvers shall be storm proof design and shall not pull rain through the blades at the capacity required by the system.

B. Furnish a bird screen on each louver mounted at the inside face.

C. Frames shall be miter welded with reinforced corners.

D. Louver finish shall be determined by the architect. Contractor to coordinate




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

E. Manufacturer; Arrow, Airstream Products Co., Air Balance, Arrow, American

Warming and Ventilating, Ruskin, Greenheck and Pottorff, United Enertech.

2.05 AIR FILTERS

A. Refer to drawings and schedules for certain air filtration requirements for various systems.

B. These filters are to be installed in air handling equipment if the equipment is capable of receiving them. If not, the contractor shall install the filters in a filter frame with gasketed doors on the entering side of the unit. The filter frame in either case shall provide an air tight fit with gaskets.

C. The filter shall meet a minimum of MERV (xx) @ 2000 cfm (500 fpm) per

ASHRAE Standard 52.2-2007 and shall be required to meet the same

MERV-A value when tested per “Appendix j” of the aforementioned

Standard. A filter with a MERV -A value lower than the MERV rating is not acceptable.

D. Manufacturers: CAMFIL/FARR Co., ECO Air Filters, Flanders, American Air

Filter.


3.01 GRILLES, REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS

A. Device face shall be flush with wall, ceiling or floor.

B. Supports: Galvanized steel per SMACNA.

3.02 LOUVERS

A. Louvers shall be set plumb in wall openings left by general contractor.

B. Coordinate openings with G. C.

C. Louvers shall be anchored in masonry construction.

D. Frames shall be caulked water tight. Color of caulking shall be acceptable to the architect

E. Connections to wall louvers shall be sloped down to louver connection to prevent water draining into interior.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

3.03 FILTERS

A. All filters shall be clean prior to acceptance by the owner. Renewable media filters shall be replaced with new filters. Cleanable filters shall be removed and cleaned just prior to acceptance.

B. Provide one spare set of replaceable filters for each system to the owner prior to acceptance of the work.

END OF SECTION




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

SECTION 23 52 34 - HOT WATER SEALED COMBUSTION BOILER

HI-EFFICIENCY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCE

A. Requirements established within the portions of the Project Manual titled

"Division 1, General Requirements" are collectively applicable to the work of this section. Refer to Section 23 05 00 for additional requirements.

B. Requirements of International, AGA, and NFPA codes are applicable to this section.

C. Requirements of the local gas company shall apply to this section.

D. Requirements of ANSI National Fuel Gas Code Z223.1 - 1974 shall apply.

E. IRI regulations and requirements shall apply.

F. PA. Dept of Labor and Industry shall be met.

1.02 WORK SUMMARY

A. Provide labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to install a complete gas-fired heating system.

B. Provide all piping connections, flues, breeching, vents, combustion outside air intake, accessories, trim, and foundations to complete the work.

C. Refer to drawings for additional information.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings, manufacturers' data sheets, and piping and wiring diagrams of all equipment specified in this section.

B. Submit certificates of compliance with A.G.A. ratings.

1.04 QUALITY INSURANCE

A. Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with manufacturer’s warranty requirements.

B. Install equipment in accordance with International and NFPA codes.

C. Install equipment in accordance with requirements of PA Department of

Labor and Industry, Boiler Division.

MCHUGH ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC. 23 52 34 - 1



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


B. Store material or equipment in dry enclosure or under protective coverings out of way of work in progress.

C. Handle so as to prevent damage to products or any surrounding materials.

1.06 SUBMISSIONS

A. Contractor shall prepare a submission drawing and submit to the Division of BOILERS, Department of Labor and Industry, Harrisburg, PA.

Submission shall be in accordance with their requirement and shall be not less than 18" x 24" with BOILER plan at 3/8" scale or larger. Provide sections two ways through the plan. Show all BOILERS, drums, headers, doors, piping, gauges, safety devices, blow-offs, other mechanical and electrical gear, structural beams, ceiling/roof clearances, exit ways, and identify all required clearances. Clearances shall be identified around, over and between BOILERS and adjacent equipment and construction.

B. No construction shall be done until approval has been granted by the

Division of BOILERS.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 HOT WATER SEALED COMBUSTION BOILER

A. The BOILER shall bear the ASME “H” stamp for 160 psi working pressure and shall be National Board listed. There shall be no banding material, bolts, gaskets or “O” rings in the header configuration. The 316L stainless steel combustion chamber shall be designed to drain condensation to the bottom of the heat exchanger assembly. A built-in trap shall allow condensation to drain from the heat exchanger assembly. The complete heat exchanger assembly shall carry a ten (10) year limited warranty.

B. The BOILER shall be certified and listed by C.S.A. International under the latest edition of a harmonized ANSI Z21.13 test standard for the U.S. and

Canada. The BOILER shall comply with the energy efficiency requirements of the latest edition of the ASHRAE 90.1 Standard and the minimum efficiency requirements of the latest edition of the BTS2000 Standard.

The BOILER shall operate at a minimum of 93% thermal efficiency at full




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 fire on 399,999 and 500,000 BTU/hr. models and at a minimum 94% thermal efficiency at full fire on 600,000, 700,000 and 800,000 BTU/hr models. All models shall operate up to 98% thermal efficiency with return water temperatures at 100°F or below. The BOILER shall be certified for indoor installation. The BOILER’s Thermal Efficiency shall be verified through third party testing by the Hydronics Institute Division of AHRI and listed in the AHRI Certification Directory.

C. The BOILER shall be constructed with a heavy gauge steel jacket assembly, primed and pre-painted on both sides. The combustion chamber shall be sealed and completely enclosed, independent of the outer jacket assembly, so that integrity of the outer jacket does not affect a proper seal. A burner/flame observation port shall be provided. The burner shall be a premix design and constructed of high temperature stainless steel with a woven metal fiber outer covering to provide modulating firing rates. The

BOILER shall be supplied with a gas valve designed with negative pressure regulation and be equipped with a variable speed blower system, to precisely control the fuel/air mixture to provide modulating BOILER firing rates for maximum efficiency. The BOILER shall operate in a safe condition at a derated output with gas supply pressures as low as 4 inches of water column. The BOILER shall be equipped with leveling legs.

D. The BOILER shall utilize a 24 VAC control circuit and components. The control system shall have an electronic display for BOILER set-up, BOILER status, and BOILER diagnostics. All components shall be easily accessed and serviceable from the front and top of the jacket. The BOILER shall be equipped with: a temperature/pressure gauge, high limit temperature control certified to UL353, ASME certified pressure relief valve, outlet water temperature sensor, return water temperature sensor, a UL 353 certified flue temperature sensor, outdoor air sensor, low water flow protection band built-in adjustable freeze protection.

E. The BOILER shall feature the “Smart System” control with a Multi-Colored

Graphic LCD display with Navigation Dial and Soft Keys for, password security, three loop temperature setpoints with individual outdoor air reset curves, pump delay with adjustable freeze protection, pump exercise, domestic hot water prioritization with DHW modulation limiting and USB

PC port connection. The BOILER shall be capable of controlling a variable speed BOILER pump to keep a constant Delta T at all modulation rates.

The BOILER shall have the capability to accept a 0-10 VDC input connection for BMS control of modulation or setpoint, enable disable of the

BOILER, variable system pump signal and a 0-10 VDC output of BOILER modulation rate. The BOILER shall have a built-in “Cascade” with sequencing options for “lead lag” or “efficiency optimized” modulation logic, with both capable of rotation while maintaining modulation of up to




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 eight BOILER’s without utilization of an external controller. Supply voltage shall be 120 volt/60 hertz/single phase.

F. The BOILER shall be equipped with two terminal strips for electrical connection. A low voltage connection board with 42 data points for safety and operating controls, i.e., Auxiliary Relay, Auxiliary Proving Switch, alarm

Contacts, Runtime Contacts, Manual Reset Low Water Cutoff, Flow Switch,

High and Low Gas Pressure Switches, Tank Thermostat, Three Wal

Thermostat/Zone Controls, System Suppl7y Sensor, Outdoor Sensor,

Building Management System Signal, Modbus Control Contacts and

Cascade Control Circuit. A high voltage terminal strip shall be provided for supply voltage. The high voltage terminal strip plus integral relays are provided for independent pump control of the System pump, the BOILER pump and the Domestic Hot Water pump.

G. The BOILER shall be installed and vented with a (select one):

1. Direct Vent Sidewall system with a horizontal sidewall termination of both the vent and combustion air. The flue shall be PVC, CPVC or

Stainless Steel sealed vent material terminating at the sidewall with the manufacturers specified vent termination. A separate pipe shall supply combustion air directly to the BOILER from the outside. The air inlet pipe may be PVC, CPVC, ABS, Galvanized, Dryer Vent, or

Stainless Steel sealed pipe. The air inlet must terminate on the same sidewall with the manufacturer’s specified air inlet cap. The

BOILER’s total combined air intake length shall not exceed 100 equivalent feet. The BOILER’s total combined exhaust venting length shall not exceed 100 equivalent feet. Foam Core pipe is not an approved material for exhaust piping.

2. Direct Vent Vertical system with a vertical rooftop termination of both the vent and combustion air. The flue shall be PVC, CPVC or

Stainless Steel sealed vent material terminating at the rooftop with the manufactures specified vent termination. A separate pipe shall supply combustion air directly to the BOILER from the outside. The air inlet pipe may be PVC, CPVC, ABS, Galvanized, Dryer Vent, or

Stainless Steel sealed pipe. The air inlet must terminate on the rooftop with the manufacturer’s specified air inlet cap. The


3. Sidewall Vent with Room Air system with a horizontal sidewall termination of the vent with the combustion air drawn from the interior if the building. The flue shall be PVC, CPVC or Stainless steel sealed vent material terminating at the sidewall with the




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 manufacturers specified vent termination. The BOILER’s total combined exhaust venting length shall not exceed 100 equivalent feet. Foam Core pipe is not an approved material for exhaust piping.

4. Vertical Vent with Room Air system with a vertical rooftop termination of the vent with the combustion air drawn from the interior of the building. The flue shall be PVC, CPVC or Stainless

Steel sealed vent material terminating at the rooftop with the manufacturers specified vent termination. The BOILER’s total combined exhaust venting length shall not exceed 100 equivalent feet. Foam Core pipe is not an approved material for exhaust piping.

5. Vertical Vent with Sidewall Air system with a vertical rooftop termination of the vent with the combustion air being drawn horizontally from a sidewall. The flue shall be PVC, CPVC, or

Stainless Steel sealed vent material terminating at the rooftop with the manufacturers specified vent termination. A separate pipe shall supply combustion air directly to the BOILER from the outside. The air inlet may be PVC, CPVC, ABS, Galvanized, Dryer Vent, or

Stainless Steel sealed pipe. The air inlet must terminate on a sidewall using the manufacturers specified air inlet cap. The


H. The BOILER shall have an independent laboratory rating for Oxides of

Nitrogen (Nox) of 20 ppm or less corrected to 3% O2. The manufacturer shall verify proper operation of the burner, all controls and the heat exchanger by connection to water and venting for a factory fire test prior to

I. shipping.

BOILER shall be Knight as manufactured by Lochinvar, Larrs, or prior approved equal.

J. Provide an acid neutralization kit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 BOILER

A. BOILER and trim shall be installed with a minimum clearance of 30 inches




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 to all walls and other equipment. Wall mounted boilers shall be installed per the manufacturer’s and per PA Department of L&I Boiler Division requirements.

B. Install on 4" concrete pad

C. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Provide emergency cut off switch adjacent to each exit on the boiler. Wire into control circuit to de-energize BOILER.

E. Utilize full sized plugged tee on return connection to aid in future cleaning.

Provide clean out plug.

F. Prevent strain on BOILER from movement or expansion of piping. Provide double swing ells at connections.

G. Provide flue gas testing of operation.

H. Provide identified gas shut-off.

I. Reverse water flow through BOILER is unacceptable.

J. Wire stack dampers with control circuit.

K. Relief valve discharge piping must be piped near floor close to floor drain.

L. Provide additional auxiliary low water cut-off wired into burner circuit.

3.02 FLUE VENT AND OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE

A. Provide vent connector through outside wall to vent termination kit. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Provide outside air intake vent through outside wall. Connect to BOILER combustion opening.

3.03 TESTING

A. Observe the ignition of the pilot and the main burner to make sure they are smooth and complete.

B. Check out the safety controls and verify that they are functioning properly.

Report the actual and design pressure drop through the BOILER.

C. Set the operating controls for the proper temperature.

D. Operate the BOILER for no less than 2 hour, or return at the beginning of the heating season for completion of this test. Vary the outdoor sensor temperature from 32 deg. F (0 deg. C) to 70 deg. F (21 deg. C) and observe the reset of the output.

E. Submit to the engineer that safety controls have been checked, ignition is proper, and operating controls are set and functioning properly. The system is not complete until this report has been received.

END OF SECTION




January 30, 2015

SECTION 23 81 26 - SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS


1.01 REFERENCE


B. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of

SMACNA, ASHRAE, ARI, and meet their standards of performance.

Equipment shall be UL listed.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to install and place into operation the equipment and systems described herein.

B. Refer to Air Handling Unit schedule for additional information.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings of all items, components, and systems described in this section. Submit manufacturer’s data sheets, wiring diagrams, installation instructions, and certificates of conformance to applicable codes.

B. Submit color samples of finishes to the architect for approval.

C. Submit refrigerant piping diagram showing line sizes, traps, slopes, valves, etc. as required and specifically adapted for this installation.



B. Install systems and equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING 238126 - 1



January 30, 2015


2.01 SPLIT SYSTEMS UP TO 5 TONS, CONDENSING UNITS

A. Air cooled, factory assembled, weatherproof cabinet, standard operation 40 to 120 degrees, filter drier, U.L. listed, ARI rated to Standard 210.B.

Cabinet zinc coated steel with baked enamel finish, removable end panels, hermetic compressor, temperature and pressure overloads, pressure relief valve, internal spring vibration isolation, sound muffling, crankcase heater, copper tube aluminum fin condenser coil, coil guard, factory pressure tested, quick connect couplings.

B. Balanced aluminum condenser fan, permanently lubricated direct drive motor, thermal overload.

C. Manufacturers: Trane, Lennox, York.

2.02 SPLIT SYSTEMS UP TO 5 TONS, FAN/COIL UNITS

A. Steel cabinets, phosphatized, baked enamel, 1/2 inch fiberglass lining, insulated drain pan, throwaway filters.

B. Multi-speed direct drive motors, thermal overload, run capacitor.

C. Low voltage control terminal strip, transformer, fan relay.

D. Aluminum fin copper tube coil, capillary tube or expansion valve refrigerant device, quick connect coupling, charged with R-22.

FOR FURNACES

E. Natural gas furnace of the size indicated on the drawings. Aluminized steel heat exchanger, 20 year warranty, induced draft blower, electronic spark ignition, redundant gas valve, combustion air pressure switch, draft safeguard switch, and blower door safety switch.

F. Manufacturers: Trane, Lennox, York.

2.03 SPLIT SYSTEMS OVER 5 TONS, CONDENSING UNITS

A. Factory assembled, steel base, welded 18 gauge zinc coated casing, epoxy primer, enamel finish.

B. Single refrigerant circuit through 7 1/2 ton, dual refrigerant circuit above 7




January 30, 2015

1/2 ton, hermetic compressor, centrifugal oil pump, 2 point lubrication for each bearing and connecting rod, crankcase heater, ring type suction and discharge valves, rubber in shear vibration isolation, suction gas cooled, internal temperature and current motor overloads.

C. Vertical discharge condenser fans, direct drive, static and dynamic balanced, aluminum blades, permanently lubricated ball bearing motors, built in current and thermal overloads, weather tight slingers over bearings.

D. Aluminum fin copper tube condenser coil, sub-cooling circuit, factory pressure tested metal protective grilles.

E. 24 volt control circuit, magnetic contactors, cooling low ambient fan switches, high pressure cutouts, internal pressure relief valve, low pressure cutout, reset relays, factory wired, terminal strips, time delay timers, anti-recycle timers.


2.04 SPLIT SYSTEMS OVER 5 TONS, FAN/COIL UNITS

A. Zinc coated galvanized steel insulated casing, convertible from vertical to horizontal mounting, condensate drain pan.

B. Single refrigeration circuit through 7 1/2 ton, dual refrigeration circuit over

7 1/2 ton, copper tube aluminum fin coil, factory pressure tested.

C. Centrifugal double inlet, double width fans, adjustable belt drive, thermal overload protection, permanently lubricated bearings.

D. Magnetic fan contactor, terminal strip, factory wired.

E. Two inch throwaway filters.


G. One row steam coil, freeze proof design.


3.01 SPLIT SYSTEMS

A. Coordinate locations of units with General Contractor and other trades to maintain adequate access for service.

B. Outside units to be mounted on concrete pads unless otherwise indicated.

Pads to be minimum 4 inch thick and set on 6 inches of crushed stone.




January 30, 2015

C. Coordinate the electrical requirements of the unit with the electrical contractor prior to ordering or installing the equipment.

D. Furnish and install all controls and control wiring. Wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC. Control wiring above the roof shall be in galvanized steel conduit with watertight fittings.

E. Installations shall be in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer and meet all requirements.

F. Protect and be responsible for equipment until accepted in place by the owner.

G. Units shall be arranged for horizontal discharge. Horizontal discharge units shall be suspended on spring vibration isolating hangers with a minimum of

1 inch deflection.

H. Provide condensate drain and discharge to a suitable discharge point which

I. shall be acceptable to the owner and A/E.

Contractor is to interlock the air handling unit controls with the remote condensing unit and gas furnace. Contractor is to furnish and install an air proving switch or current sensor at the air handler’s blower and be interlocked with the associated condensing unit and gas burner controls to shut down if power to the blower is disconnected.

3.02 GENERAL

A. Any equipment mars, blemishes, scratches, abrasions or other surface imperfections shall be sanded, primed, and refinished to match adjacent surfaces.

B. No equipment will be accepted by the owner which has rust, corrosion, or otherwise in progress.

C. Equipment shall not be used for temporary heat unless separately negotiated with the owner.

D. All filters shall be new at time of acceptance by the owner.

E. All bare ferrous metal shall be painted prior to acceptance.

F. Equipment shall be in perfect working order prior to acceptance.

END OF SECTION




January 30, 2015

SECTION 23 81 27 - DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM


1.01 REFERENCE


1.02 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to furnish, install, and place into operation ductless split systems as specified herein.

B. Power wiring will be provided under the Electrical portion of the work.

C. Control wiring shall be furnished under this portion of the work.

D. Furnish ductless split system heat pumps or air conditioning units of the quantity, size and capacity shown on the equipment schedules.

E. System shall be a complete factory package consisting of compressor, evaporator coil, fan and motor, condenser coil fan and motor and complete refrigeration and heat pump temperature controls, and interconnecting wiring and refrigerant piping.

F. Unit shall be rated in accordance with latest version ARI Standard 380 and shall be U.L. listed.

G. Refer to Air Handling Unit schedule for additional information.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings of all equipment.

B. Submit manufacturers' data sheets of capacity.

C. Submit wiring diagrams of control system.

D. Submit piping diagrams of refrigeration interconnection.


A. Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's

DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM 238127 - 1



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 warranty requirements.


2.01 INDOOR UNIT

A. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism.

B. Factory pre-charge of R410A adequate for 33 feet of total length.

C. The indoor units shall have a white, “flat screen” finish.

D. The cabinet shall be supplied with a mounting plate to be installed onto a wall for securely mounting the cabinet.

E. The cabinet includes an “intelligent-eye” motion sensor capable of setting back the set point temperature for energy savings. This feature may be disengaged on the wire remote controller.

F. The evaporator fan shall be an assembly consisting of a direct-driven fan by a single motor. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balance and operate on a motor with permanent lubricated bearings.

G. The return air filter provided will be a removable and washable filter.

H. The evaporator coil shall be a nonferrous, aluminum fin on copper tube heat exchanger with factory pressure tested.

2.02 OUTDOOR UNIT

A. The outdoor unit shall be specifically matched to the corresponding indoor unit size. The outdoor unit shall be complete factory assembled and pre-wired with all necessary electronic and refrigerant controls.

B. The cabinet shall be Ivory White with a finished powder coated backed enamel paint.

C. The fan shall be a direct drive, propeller type fan.

D. The motor shall be inverter drive, permanently lubricated type bearings, inherent.




January 30, 2015

E. The fan shall be capable of operating in “silent operation” which lowers the outdoor fan speed in either cool, heat or auto modes.

F. A fan guard is provided on the outdoor unit to prevent contact with fan operation.

G. The outdoor coil shall be nonferrous construction with corrugated fin tube.

H. The compressor shall be a rotary swing inverter-driven compressor.

I. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator, four-way reversing valve.

J. The compressor shall have an internal thermal overload.

K. The outdoor unit can operate with a maximum vertical height difference of 49 feet and overall maximum length of 66 feet without any oil traps, liquid or suction line changes.

L. Lon Interface Network Card. Integrate with campus

Honeywell Tridium Building Automation System.

2.03 REMOTE CONTROLLER

A. Microprocessor technology with remote controller with LCD display.

B.

Operation Mode Setting (Heat, Auto, Cool/Dry).

C. Temperature setting (in units of two degrees Fahrenheit)

D. Self-Diagnostic Display.

E. Room Temperature Display.

F. Twenty-Four Hour On/Off Timer.

G. Fan Speed Indicator.

H.

I.

Auto/Speed Vane Operation

Memory (for storing operation functions)

J. Low Ambient Operation

K. Whisper-Quiet Operation

L. EMS Gateway Available to Management System via RS-232

Cable.

2.04 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: By Mitsubishi, Sanyo, EMI.




January 30, 2015


3.01 GENERAL

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Mount compressors on Neoprene pads on roof curbs.

C. Mount indoor unit on concealed blocking for additional support.

D. Install pre-charged refrigerant lines through manufactured roof curbs by Pate or equal. Maintain water tight integrity of penetration.

END OF SECTION




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

CONTENTS

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

SECTION

26 00 00

26 24 16

26 27 00

26 28 16

26 43 13

26 50 00

26 60 00

27 10 00

TITLE

STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

PANELBOARDS

BASIC MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

SAFETY SWITCHES - GENERAL DUTY

SURGE SUPPRESSION

LIGHTING

SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION

28 30 00

DATA COMMUNICATIONS CABLING

FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS - ADDRESS. HORN

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

SECTION 26 00 00 - STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REGULATIONS, CODES, STANDARDS

A. Reference Codes, applicable sections of the following codes and standards shall be considered as binding to the work of this project:

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association

NEC

NECA

NEIS

National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) - 2008 Edition

National Electrical Contractors’ Association

National Electrical Installation Standards

EGSA

IBC

NFPA

IEEE

UL

Electrical Generating Systems Association

International Building Code

National Fire Protection Association

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.

IES Illuminating Engineering Society

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

ANSI American National Standards Institute

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

FM Factory Mutual

IRI

ISO

Industrial Risk Insurers

Insuring Services Office

IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Assoc.

ADA Americans with Disability Act

NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association

B. All local codes to be incorporated.

C. Latest adopted codes and latest editions of standards shall be the basis of conformance.

D. Obtain and pay for all permits and inspections, and any associated charges.

E. Inspection Agency Certificate of Inspection to be provided at completion of the work. Inspection by Middle Dept or other local inspection agency.

F. Drawings, Contract, General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions

STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 260000 - 1



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 form a part of this section, by reference thereto and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full. Failure to review these sections shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to fully comply with the terms therein.

G. Where the contract documents are more stringent but not in conflict with the applicable codes, the more stringent requirements shall be followed.

1.02 SUBMITTALS







F. Performance test data and wiring diagrams of all electrical equipment.

G. Submissions shall include warrantees by the manufacturer for equipment being provided. Submissions for commonly related items such as fixtures, trim, carriers, shall be combined in a single brochure with all items being furnished clearly identified.

H. Shop drawings and submittals shall be checked and stamped by the

I. contractor before submitting. They shall conform to measurements made at the site, the contract requirements, and coordinated with all other trades.

Specific models in catalog sheets must be identified as well as all options, voltages, phases, etc. identified so as to be clear on what is being provided.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitution of other than specified manufacturers shall not be allowed after bid date.

B. Prior approval is required for other manufacturers. If the contractor wishes alternate materials or equipment be considered, he must submit information at least 10 days before bid date. If acceptable, an addendum will be issued which will allow the contractor to utilize the alternate.

C. Samples shall be provided when directed by the architect or engineer.

D. If the contractor submits alternate equipment, manufacturers, systems, methods, or materials, not specifically identified in the specifications, additional review and investigation time may be required by the engineer.



E.

If the contractor elects to submit alternate equipment, manufacturers, systems, methods, or materials, not specifically identified in the drawings and specifications, it is the contractors responsibility to coordinate the work with other trades and pay for any associated costs with the substitution or change.

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials and equipment in manufacturers original cartons or on skids.

B. Store materials in dry enclosure out of way of work progress.

C. Protect equipment, fixtures, and lenses after placement.

1.05 REFERENCE

A. Requirements established within the portions of this Project Manual titled


B. Instructions to Bidders, Special Conditions and Addenda as issued are part of this specification.

C. Electrical drawings along with all other project drawings represent the work




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 of this Division.


1.06 WORK SUMMARY

A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and supervision necessary to install complete operating electrical systems as indicated on the drawings and specified herein, including all work at the site and within the proposed construction areas to accomplish the require work.

B. Contractor shall provide all demolition necessary to remove, replace, repair, install new or modify existing work whether it be walls, floors, ceilings, structure, mechanical or electrical required to install his work.

Contractor shall replace all work to leave in a finished condition. Pipe, conduit, ductwork and wiring shall be cut back behind wall surfaces above ceilings and below floor levels so that a patch can be placed over the opening.

C. Demolition:

1. Contractor shall disconnect and remove the entire existing electrical system including panels, fixtures, conduit, wiring, supports, fasteners, starters, fire alarm devices and wiring, telephone equipment and wiring, battery packs, switches, outlets and devices within the renovation area.

2. Electrical contractor shall verify all existing conditions prior to commencing work.

3. All equipment and appurtenances removal are to be disposed of properly. Refer to local, state and federal requirements.

D. All work shown on the drawings and not expressly mentioned in the specifications and all work specified but not shown on the drawings, but necessary for the proper execution of same shall be performed by the contractor. It is not the intent of the drawings and specifications to describe every feature and detail of the work.

E. No additions to the contract amount will be approved for any materials, equipment, or labor to perform additional work unless it can be clearly shown to be beyond the scope and intent of the drawings and specifications.

F. Roof penetration for electrical work and all associated roof work.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

G. Provide 1 phase, 3 wire electrical service of the size as indicated on the drawings at 120Y/240 V with distribution to all equipment at 240V, lighting and general purpose receptacles at 120V.

H. Provide addressable fire alarm system with battery backup, horn/strobes

(speaker/strobes), pull stations, detectors, strobes, duct detectors, remote annunciator, telephone auto dialer, and all associated controls and appurtenances.

J. Provide exit and emergency lighting throughout with emergency power supply in addition to normal power.

K. Provide power to HVAC and plumbing equipment as necessary to have complete operating systems.

L. Provide lighting throughout, with exterior lighting at all exit doors .

M. Provide telephone conduit system. Provide (2) CAT 3 plenum rated telephone cables from the telephone demarcation point to the fire alarm control panel for the autodialer.

N. Provide Uninterruptible Power Supply System (UPS) with input filter, transformer, battery, and all associated controls and appurtenances.

O. Provide grounding system for facility in accordance with the National

Electrical Code.

P. Provide code required signage (i.e., NEC 110.34, NEC 700.8, 695.4 B3).

Q. Provide third party certification of all packaged systems by a Nationally

Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) in accordance with OSHA Federal

Regulations 29CFR1910.303 and .399 as well as Pamphlet #70 and

National Electrical Code Article 90-7.


A. Visit site, inspect, and become aware of all conditions which may effect the work. Investigate utilities, protection requirements for adjacent facilities, storage locations, and access to the construction area.

B. Submission of a bid will be deemed evidence of having compiled with this requirement. Contractor may not request additional costs for existing conditions which were evident from inspection of the site.

C. Before ordering materials or commencing with any work, the contractor shall verify all measurements at the building. Coordination of equipment, materials, spaces, and dimensions are the responsibility of the contractor.

1.08 UTILITY CONNECTION AND CHARGES




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

A. The contractor shall be responsible for coordination of the work with the

Electric Utility Company. Make arrangements in a timely fashion for connection of the service.

B. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for utility connection charges, meter charges, and other installation charges as may be applied, by the local utility company.

C. Contact the utility company during the bidding period for connection charges and include same with bid.

D. Provide connections, terminations, hand holes, manholes, pads, transformers, vaults, conduits, wiring, and all required materials and labor as may be required by the utility company to obtain service for the facility.

Any costs for service work shall be included with the bid.


A. Drawings and specifications are intended to be taken as a whole and each is to supplement the other. It is not intended that all work must be both shown on drawings and specified in the specifications.

B. An item shown on the drawings and not indicated in the specifications is to be understood to be required for the project. An item specified and not shown on the drawings is to be understood to be required for the project.

C. If there is a conflict between the drawings and specifications it is to be understood that the more strict or more expensive interpretation shall govern. Also, if a conflict exists between specification sections or between drawing plans and details, it is to be understood that the more strict or more expensive interpretation shall govern.

D. The architects or engineers interpretation of the documents shall be binding upon the contractor. If a question arises, the contractor shall ask for an interpretation prior to bidding and an answer shall be issued as an addendum to all bidders.

E. If a questions arises after bidding the A/E interpretation shall govern.

F. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and necessary field coordination and adjustment must be provided by the contractor prior to installation. Such deviations to the work to allow for coordination shall be kept to a minimum and any such deviations shall be at no extra cost.

1.10 MINIMUM INTEGRATED EQUIPMENT SHORT CIRCUIT RATING:

A. Where the contract documents indicate secondary service from the utility




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

Company (208/120V, 3 phase or 480/277V, 3 phase) available short circuit currents including system motor contribution (amperes RMS symmetrical) at the line terminals of the UL service entrance labeled main distribution panelboard or switchboard, shall be in accordance with the following tabulation:

_____________________________________________________________________

Service Minimum Service Entrance Panelboard Rating

500

750

1000

1500

2000

Transformer Rating

______________________________________________________________________

KVA %Z

75 1.5

112.5 1.5

150

225

300

1.5

1.5

1.5

1.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

208/120

14,500

22,000

29,000

43,000

58,000

96,000

42,200

56,100

85,000

480/277

______________________________________________________________________

10,000

10,000

13,000

19,000

25,000

42,000

18,000

24,500

37,000

49,000

2500

3000

5.5

5.5

51,000

73,500

______________________________________________________________________

B. The Integrated Equipment short circuit rating of the MDP or switchboard shall meet or exceed the tabulated minimum values. This shall be construed to mean that the equipment withstand capability (bus bracing), and interrupting capacities of main and feeder devices, shall each meet or exceed the tabulated minimum values.

C. Service transformer ratings shall be as indicated on the drawings. If said ratings are not indicated, the contractor shall contact the engineer and/or utility company for clarification.

D. The only deviations from this tabulation that are permissible shall be the results of a short circuit study (if and as specified in Section 26 05 73

Power System Studies), or documented data from the utility company.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015



1.12 COST SCHEDULE



1.13 OFFICE


1.14 STORAGE


1.15 SANITARY



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All materials and equipment shall be new and in present production of major manufacturers.

B. All materials and equipment shall be in conformance with accepted trade standards as a minimum. Where specifications exceed any minimum standard, the specifications shall govern.

C. Reference of equipment in the singular shall be deemed to apply to as many




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 such items as may be required to complete the work.

D. The word “provide” means “furnish and install complete, tested, and adjusted as necessary with all accessories, circuiting, switching, lenses, mounting hardware, cover plates, hangers and supports”.

2.02 FASTENERS AND SUPPORTS

A. All work shall be securely fastened to building construction.

B. Utilize toggle or machine bolts in hollow construction.

C. Utilize machine screws for steel construction.

D. Utilize expansion shields for masonry construction.

E. Utilize lag bolts for wood construction.

F. All fasteners shall be galvanized or plated with rustproof finish.

G. Maximum load on fasteners shall be at a safety factor of 4 to 1 for a tested sample.


A. Single phase manual motor starters with overloads shall be provided under the electrical portion of the work for fractional horsepower motors up to ½

HP.

B. Polyphase motor starters and motor starters above ½ HP shall be furnished under other portions of the work.

C. The starters in A or B above shall be installed under the electrical portion of the work.

D. Polyphase starters shall be magnetic combination type, across-the-line electrically operated, electrically held, three pole assemblies, with arc extinguishing characteristics, silver to silver renewable contacts, 3 pole thermal bi-metallic, red run pilot light, individual phase protection, with overload heaters matched to motors installed and with 4 auxiliary contacts,

Hand-Off-Auto switch, and control transformer.

E. For single phase motors above ½ HP provide magnetic combination, single phase motor starters with overloads, non-fusible disconnect switch, red run pilot light, integral 120 volt control transformer with dual primary fusing, auxiliary contacts.

F. Starters shall be as manufactured by G.E., Cutler Hammer, Siemens,

Square D or Allen Bradley.

G. Contactors shall be across the line, electrically operated, mechanically held

3 pole assemblies for tungsten and ballast lighting loads. Acceptable




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 manufacturers: GE, Cutler Hammer, Siemens, Square D or Allen-Bradley.

H. Manual motor starters without overloads in NEMA 1 enclosure equal to G. E.

Type TC shall be used for the following load:

1.

2.

30 amperes or less continuous

1 hp or less at 120 volts

3. 2 hp or less at 240 volts


A. Manufacturers’ names are included herein to establish those suppliers who may provide products for this project subject to the requirements of the specifications. Although a manufacturer’s name may appear as an acceptable supplier it is not understood that a standard product is acceptable. Products must also meet the technical, performance, and physical requirements of the project as well as being names in the specification. Any deviations from this must be acknowledged at bid time by the supplier and he shall be solely responsible for any and all costs associated with the application of his product in the project.

B. A design cannot be prepared which accommodates the installation of all suppliers and is not intended to do so. If certain modifications must be made to accommodate one particular supplier’s equipment it shall be considered the contractor’s responsibility to arrange for such accommodations and be financially responsible for same.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 WELDING


3.02 VEHICLES






Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

A. Except for items or materials identified to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain properly of the owner or tenant, demolished materials shall become the contractor’s property and shall be removed, recycled or disposed from the project site in an appropriate and legal manner.

B. Burning of debris on the site shall not be permitted. All debris, refuse, and waste shall be removed from the premises at regular intervals. No accumulation shall be permitted.

3.04 WORKMANSHIP


B. Erect and maintain barricades, warning signs, and other protective means as may be directed by the owner for protection of all persons and property from injury or damage.

C. Plug or cap open ends of piping systems and conduit.

D. Stored materials shall be covered to prevent damage by inclement weather, sun, dust or moisture.

E. Protect all installed work until accepted in place by the owner. Protect lighting fixtures.

F. Do not install plates, covers, and other finished devices until masonry, title, and painting operations are complete or protect otherwise.

G. Protect all existing or new work from operations which may cause damage such as hauling, welding, soldering, painting, insulation and covering.

H. All devices and exposed raceways are to be plumb and true. All exposed raceways in finished areas are to be coordinated with the architect/engineer prior to installation.

3.05 SCAFFOLDING


3.06 SITE UTILITIES





Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015


C. Those services that are used during construction, but are to remain, shall be refurbished to a new condition before turning back to the owner.

3.07 CLEAN-UP



C. Remove all trash and debris from the premises.

3.08 LUBRICATION

A. Furnish and install and maintain all required lubrication of any equipment operated prior to acceptance by the owner. Lubrication shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

B. Provide one year’s supply of lubricants to owner at date of acceptance.

C. Verify that required lubrication has taken place prior to any equipment start up.


A. Verify proper installation by manufacturer or his representative.

B. Advise A/E 2 days prior to actual start up.




A. Properly and fully instruct owners personnel in the operation and maintenance of all systems and equipment.


C. Such installation shall be for each item of equipment and each system as a whole.

D. Provide report that instruction has taken place. Include in the report the equipment and/or systems instructed, date, contractor, owners personnel,




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 vendor, and that a full operating and maintenance manual has been reviewed.

E. Manual shall include all instructions on operation, maintenance, repair parts list, lubrication requirements, brochures, catalogue cuts, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, control sequences, service requirements, names and addresses of vendors, suppliers and emergency contacts. 3 manuals shall be provided to owner.

F. Submit manuals for review prior to operating instruction period. Manuals shall be 8 1/2" x 11" with hard cover suitably bound.

G. Provide to the owner any special tools necessary to operate any of the equipment.


A. All penetrations of Natatorium walls, fire walls, smoke walls, and floors shall be sealed around conduits and wiring to prevent the flow of gases or smoke.

B. The sealant shall be foamed in place between the conduit or wiring and the adjacent walls and floors with DOW Corning RTV foam or Fire Stop Caulk.

C. All penetrations through roof structure shall be coordinated with other trades to minimize the potential for water seepage and leakage through such penetrations.

D. When electrical boxes located on opposite side of a fire resistance rated wall assembly are within 24" horizontally of each other, both devices are to be wrapped with Spec Seal Putty Pads as manufactured by Specified

Technologies, Inc. or approved equivalent.


A. Furnish and install as a minimum, a 4" thick concrete pad beneath all floor mounted equipment.

B. Furnish and install as a minimum, spring vibration isolators under any equipment 10 HP and over and rubber-in-shear vibration isolation under all equipment less than 10 HP.

C. Reinforce concrete with No. 4 rods 12' on center both ways.


3.13 INSTALLATION MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. To be verified by Architect, but in general shall be as follows (top of device




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 elevation above finished floor):

Lighting switches, controls:

Duplex receptacles:

Duplex receptacles over counters:

Telephone data wall plate and modular jack, desk phone:

Telephone, data wall plate and

3 ft. 10 in.

1 ft. 8 in.

+8" above countertop

1 ft. 8 in. modular jack, wall phone:

Special outlets:

Fire alarm annunciating devices:

Fire alarm manual pull stations:

Clock receptacles:

CATV wall plates and modular jacks:

CATV wall plates and modular jacks mounted near ceiling:

3 ft. 10 in.

As required for equip.

85"

3 ft. 10 in.

As indicated on dwgs.

1 ft. 8 in.

Thermostats (forward reach):

Thermostats (side reach):

Thermostats with lockable cover:

Coordinate mounting height with

Architect.

3 ft. 10 in.

3 ft. 10 in.

4 ft. 6 in.

Requirements of the Americans with Disability Act and/or ANSI A117.1 shall be met.

B. Structural and mechanical details shall be coordinated before roughing in.

3.14 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with work of other trades prior to installation.

B. Arrange for minor variations for complete coordinated installation. Provide all necessary offsets to install the work and to provide clearances for other trades.

3.15 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Provide for cutting and patching for all electrical work.

B. Patching to be performed by tradesmen skilled in the particular trade.

C. Contractor shall patch and repair any existing openings created by the demolition work in floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings not being reused for




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 the new construction.

3.16 BALANCING AND TESTING

A. Electrically balance connected loads in panels.

B. The entire wiring system shall be tested to be free from grounds and faults.

C. Identify all circuits and all phase wiring at terminations.

3.17 EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS

A. This contractor shall make final electrical connections to equipment furnished by other contractors or the owner.

B. Provide electrical service and disconnects as required by code to supply such equipment.


A. Perform all excavation required to install the work. Deposit excavated material as so not to create a slide hazard.

B. Maintain excavations free of water.

C. Backfill with clean material and pneumatically tamp in 8 inch layers.

Remove excess material, including rock, from site or as directed by the A/E.

D. Return to original conditions any areas disturbed for excavation.

E. Install all work neat, trim, and plumb with building lines.

F. Install work in spaces allocated.

G. Cutting and patching shall be performed by skilled tradesmen normally employed for the work involved.

3.19 RECESSES

A. Furnish information to the General Contractor as to sizes and locations of recesses required to install panels, boxes, grilles, and other equipment or devices which is to be recessed in walls.

B. Make offsets or modifications as required to suite final locations.

3.20 LABELING

A. All equipment panels, controls, safety switches, and devices shall be provided with permanent black laminated micarta white core labels with




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

3/8 inch letters.

B. This shall also apply to all controllers, remote start/stop pushbuttons, equipment cabinets, and where directed by the A/E.

C. This shall not apply to individual room thermostats, and local light switches.

3.21 GUARANTEE

A. All work shall be guaranteed to be free from defects for a period of 1 year of operation from date of acceptance by the owner unless otherwise specified.


3.22 AS BUILT DRAWINGS

A. At the completion of the work and prior to final payment, the contractor shall furnish a reproducible as-built drawings to the A/E for approval. The drawings shall indicate all work installed and its actual size, location and identify all systems installed with locations of concealed devices, conduit, piping and other equipment and complete wiring diagrams of all systems. If acceptable, the A/E will submit the as-built drawings to the owner as record drawings. If not acceptable, the A/E will return the drawing to the contractor to make corrections as required. The contractor will resubmit for approval.


3.23 MAIN ELECTRICAL ROOM DRAWING

A. Provide 3/8" = 1'-0" scale drawings of the Main Electrical Room indicating all electrical, mechanical, plumbing, telephone, security, fire alarm and life safety equipment to be installed within this room. Exact dimensions of equipment, pads, etc., are to be indicated. Show two cross sections at important points.

B. Obtain information from other subs as appropriate.

C. Submit for review and approval along with electrical equipment submittals.

Equipment will not be approved prior to review of this drawing.


A. The contractor shall promptly correct work rejected by the engineer or




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 failing to conform to the requirements of the contract documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the engineer’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the contractor’s expense.


A. The following is a list of required shop drawings for this project.

ELECTRICAL DATE

REC’D

ACTION DATE

REC’D

ACTION

Basic Materials and Equipment

(Section 26 27 00)

Panelboards (Section 26 24 16)

Safety Switches - (Section 26 28 16)

Surge Suppression (Section 26 43

13)

Lighting (Section 26 50 00)

Fire Alarm and Detection Systems

(Section 28 30 00)

Low Voltage Systems (CCTV,

Security, DATA, Phone Entry, etc.)

As-Builts

Warranties

Maintenance Manuals

Instructions

Ground Test

END OF SECTION




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCE

A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for additional requirements of this section.

B. Refer to requirements of the National Electrical Code, UL, and the NFPA.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all labor, material, equipment and supervision necessary to furnish and install panelboards as specified.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturers shop drawings of all equipment specified in this section.


A. Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ warranty requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS (MDP or PP)

A. GENERAL - Furnish and install distribution and power panelboards as indicated in the panelboard schedule and where shown on the plans.

Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers of frame and trip ratings as shown on the schedule.

B. BUSSING ASSEMBLY AND TEMPERATURE RISE - Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main breaker shall have current ratings as shown on the

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1



January 30, 2015 panelboard schedule. Bus shall be plated copper.

C. CIRCUIT BREAKERS - Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and protected connectors. Circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown.

Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors will be required to add breakers. Mechanical lugs are to be copper. For 480 V applications over 1000 Amp, the main breaker is to include electronic trip with LSIG characteristics.

D. EQUIPMENT SHORT CIRCUIT RATING (FULLY RATED) - Each panelboard shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panelboard schedule or on the plans. Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage and shall be UL listed.

E. CABINET - Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. The size of wiring gutters shall be in accordance with UL

Standard 67. Cabinets to be equipped with latch and tumbler-type lock on door of trim. Doors over 48" long shall be equipped with three-point latch and vault lock. All locks shall be keyed alike. End walls shall be removable. Fronts shall be of code gauge steel. Baked enamel finish electro-deposited over cleaned phosphatized steel.

F. SAFETY BARRIERS - The panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front removed. Main lugs or main breakers shall have barriers on five sides. The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to a fixed part of the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall have barriers.

G. UL LISTING - Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and shall bear the UL label. When required, panelboards shall be suitable for use as service equipment.

H. NAMEPLATES - Provide laminated black phenolic resin with white core with

3/16 inch high engraved lettered nameplates for each circuit breaker to indicate the feeder, panelboard and equipment served. Mounted, with

I. plated screws, adjacent to or on front of the breaker.

Panelboards shall be by Square D, Siemens, Cutler Hammer or GE.

2.02 LIGHTING & RECEPTACLE PANELS (LP or RP)

A. GENERAL - Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting panelboards as indicated in the panelboard schedule and where shown on the plans.

Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic molded case circuit




January 30, 2015 breakers with frame and trip ratings as shown on the schedule.

B. CIRCUIT BREAKERS - Shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip indicating and have common trip on all multipole breakers. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking position between "ON" and "OFF" when the breaker is tripped. Branch circuit breakers feeding convenience outlets shall have sensitive instantaneous trip settings of not more than 10 times the trip rating of the breaker to prevent repeated arcing shorts resulting from frayed appliance cords. Single pole

15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers shall be UL listed as "Switching

Breakers" at 120V AC and carry the SWD marking. UL Class A ground fault circuit protection shall be provided on 120V AC branch circuits as specified on the plans or panelboard schedule. This protection shall be an integral part of the branch circuit breaker which also provides overload and short circuit protection for branch circuit wiring. Tripping of a branch circuit breaker containing ground fault circuit interruption shall not disturb the feeder circuit to the panelboard. A single pole circuit breaker with integral ground fault circuit interruption shall require no more panelboard branch circuit space than a conventional circuit breaker.

C. PANELBOARD BUS ASSEMBLY - Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the "distributed phase" or "phase sequence" type. Single phase, three-wire panelboard bussing shall be such that any two adjacent single pole breakers are connected to opposite polarities in such a manner that two pole breakers can be installed in any location. Three phase, four-wire bussing shall be such that any three adjacent single pole breakers are individually connected to each of the three different phases in such a manner that two or three pole breakers can be installed at any location.

All current carrying parts of the bus assemble shall be plated copper.

Mains ratings shall be shown in the panelboard schedule or on the plans.

D. WIRING TERMINALS - Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. Terminals for branch circuit wiring, both breaker and neutral, shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified.

E. CABINETS AND FRONTS - The panelboard bus assemble shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The size of the wiring gutters and gauge of steel shall be in accordance with NEMA and UL Standards. The box shall be fabricated from galvanized steel or equivalent rust resistant steel.

Fronts shall include doors and have flush, cylinder tumbler-type locks with catches and spring-loaded stainless steel door pulls. Doors shall be mounted with completely concealed steel hinges. Fronts shall not be removable with door in the locked position. A circuit directory frame and




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. Fronts shall be of code gauge steel.

F. EQUIPMENT SHORT CIRCUIT RATING (FULLY RATED) - Each panelboard shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panelboard schedule or on the plans. Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage and shall be UL listed.

G. UL LISTING - Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and bear the UL label. Equal panelboards may be provided by Square D, G.E.,

Cutler Hammer, or Siemens.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PANELS

A. Tops not to exceed 72 inches above floor.

B. Provide labeling and complete directories.

C. Ductwork or piping shall not pass over panels.

D. Space shall be clear 36" in front of panel floor to structural slab or roof above.

E. All conduit entering the panel shall have a screwed hub with an insulated bushing and no sharp edges.

F. Wires shall be labeled and neatly arranged in the wiring gutters with wires cut to proper lengths and neatly racked.

3.02 GROUNDING

A. All panels shall be grounded to the building equipment grounding system per NEC 408.40. Ground resistance shall not exceed NEC values.

END OF SECTION




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

SECTION 26 27 00 - BASIC MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FOR METAL

RACEWAY SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCE


B. Refer to NECA 1-2000 for general installation requirements.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and manufacturer’s catalog sheets of all specified items unless waived by the engineer.

B. Submit switches and receptacles as a minimum.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 RIGID METAL CONDUIT (GRS)

A. Material; Steel, Zinc coated Fed. Spec. WW-C-581d, ANSI C801.

B. Fittings; Malleable iron, Threaded

C. NEC; Article 344

D. Application; Indoor, above ground, enamel coated, all occupancies not subject to severe corrosive influences.

E. Manufacturer; Hubbell, Allied Tube and Conduit Corp. or approved equal.

2.02 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Material; Galvanized steel, U.L. labeled, Fed. Spec. WWC-563 (latest revision), ANSI C80.3.

B. Fittings; Threadless compression type for up to 1 1/4", set screw for 1 ½" and larger. Installation in accordance to Article 358 of the National

Electrical Code and U.L. general information card #FJMX.

BASIC MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 262700 - 1



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

C. NEC; Article 358

D. Application; Exposed and concealed work not subject to physical damage.

E. Manufacturer; Hubbell, Allied Tube and Conduit Corp. or approved equal.

2.03 FLEXIBLE METAL TUBING (FMT)

A. Material; Hot dipped galvanized interlocking convolutions of steel tape in circular cross section. Fed. Spec. WW-C-566.

B. Fittings; Hot dipped galvanized steel

C. NEC; Article 344

D. Application; All areas other than wet locations, hoistways, hazardous locations, below ground, and areas with exposure to oil, gasoline, or other materials having an adverse effect on rubber.

E. Manufacturer; Electri-flex Company Liquatite Type BR, Hubbell, Allied Tube and Conduit Corp., AFC.

2.04 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT (SCHEDULE 40 PVC)

A. Material; U.L. 651, ANSI/NEMA TC-2, Fed. Military Spec. WC-1094A, 90 deg. wire rated and sunlight resistant.

B. Fittings; PVC, same as above.

C. NEC; Article 352

D. Application; In walls, floors, ceilings, wet locations, underground, and locations subject to severe corrosive influences.

E. Manufacturer; Carlon Schedule 40 electrical conduit or approved equal.

2.05 LIQUATITE FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Material: Hot dipped galvanized interlocking convolutions of steel tape in circular cross section with PVC jacket.

B. Fittings: Hot dipped galvanized steel.

C. NEC Article 350 (LFMC)

D. Application: All areas other than elevator hoistways, hazardous locations and where subject to physical damage.

E. Manufacturers: Electriflex Company Liquatite Type LT, Hubbell, Allied Tube and Conduit Corp., AFC.

2.06 CONDUCTORS




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

A. Type; THHN, 98% conductivity copper, 600 volt, dry locations. Type

THWN for wet locations. Conductors shall be U.L. listed.

B. Equipment terminations for circuits rated 100 Amps or less (#14 AWG - #2

AWG) shall be rated 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). Equipment termination for circuits rated over 100 Amps (#1 or larger) shall be rated

75 degrees C (167 degrees F). Refer to NEC for allowable exceptions. 90 degrees C (194 degrees F) rated conductors shall be used as indicated on the drawings or as indicated within these specifications.

C. Solid copper conductors for #10 and #12 wire size. #8 and larger shall be stranded copper.

D. All conductors shall be color coded as follows:

120/240 Volt Systems

Phase A Black

Phase B Red

Neutral Grey or Natural White

E. Minimum size conductor shall be #12 AWG except that #14 AWG shall be used for control wiring. All circuit conductors shall be run in the same raceway system.

F. A grounding conductor shall be provided to each electrical device in accordance with the National Electrical Code.

G. Conductor sizes shall be as shown on drawings and/or specified in this specification.

H. Conductors shall not be installed in raceways until construction is advanced to allow conductors to be installed completely without damage to conductors and there is not possibility of water or other contaminants entering the raceway system. Conductors shall be installed between convenient terminating points.

I. An approved pulling compound shall be used to assist in pulling of conductors.

J. Aluminum Alloy Conductors For Distribution Feeder Applications:

1. Distribution feeder conductors sizes #6 AWG to 1000 Kcmil may be copper (Base Bid) or aluminum alloy (Alternate). Aluminum alloy conductors shall be compact standard conductors of a recognizable

Aluminum Association 8000 Series aluminum alloy conductor material (AA-8000 series alloy). AA-8000 series alloy conductor must be Alcan Cable Stabiloy or approved equal.

2. Compliance with the elongation requirement per Table 10.1 of UL

Standard 1581 for stranded AA-8000 series aluminum alloy conductors shall be determined on wires taken from the conductor




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 after stranding by manufacturer.

3. Insulation: a. For use in raceways: Type XHHW-2, temperature rating 90 o C. b. For use in cable trays: Sizes #1/0 AEG and larger. Type

XHHW-2, temperature rating 90 o C and marked: “SUN RES”,

“VW-1"”, “GASOLINE AND OIL-RESISTANT II”, “FOR CT USE”.

K. Manufacturers: Alpha Wire, Southwire, Tamaqua Cable, Triangle Wire &

Cable, American Insulated Wire, BICC or General Cable.

2.07 JUNCTION BOXES

A. Material; Galvanized steel, accessible.

B. Manufacturers; Keystone, Hubbell, Penn Panel and Box Co.

C. NEC; Article 314

2.08 OUTLET AND SWITCH BOXES

A. Material; Galvanized steel with knockouts to suit raceway system.

B. Manufacturer; Crouse Hinds Co., Steel City Div., Raco Inc., or approved equal.

2.09 WALL PLATES - METAL- COMMERCIAL SPECIFICATION GRADE

A. Wall plates shall be standard size, metal, commercial grade.

B. Plates shall be provided for all switches, receptacles, blanks, telephone, and special purpose outlets.

C. Plates must be of modern design having rounded edges and corners, and be complete with color-matched mounting screws.

D. Plates must be of one design throughout the building and shall conform to

UL,CSA, and NEMA standards.

E. Engraving shall be done by plate manufacturer in accordance with the schedule.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Cooper Wiring Devices, Pass & Seymour,

Hubbell, Leviton.

2.10 RECEPTACLES - DECORA - SPECIFICATION GRADE

A. Impact-resistant nylon face.

B. One-piece, triple-wire brass power contacts.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

C. Corrosion resistant, plated, wrap-around steel strap locked into assembly to prohibit strap from bending away from body.

D. Terminal compartments isolated from each other for positive conductor containment.

E. Available in hospital grade & specification grade.

F. Heavy-duty compact design for easier installation and long lasting performance.

G. Automatic grounding clip standard for positive ground to metal boxes.

H. All devices fit standard #26 opening wall plate.

I. Side and backwire accepts #14 - #10 AWG.

J. In compliance with UL 498.

K. Pre-wired pigtail connectors that accommodate Fed. Spec. Receptacles are approved. Must be crimped and welded terminal right angle application within the connector.

L. Receptacle shall be Federal Specification, WC896 compliant. Marking should be clearly identifiable on face or strap.

M. Acceptable manufacturers: Cooper Wiring Devices, Pass & Seymour,

Hubbell, and Leviton.

N. Leviton 16352, 20 amp, white, ivory, grey, black or almond.

2.11 GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTING RECEPTACLES - STANDARD

GRADE

A. Side or screw pressure plate back wire with #14 or #12 AWG solid or y-stranded copper wire.

B. Extra-long strap.

C. High-impact resistant thermoplastic construction.

D. Ground screw with a wire guide channel.

E. Dual-direction test and reset buttons.

F. Line and load terminations supplied backed out, and ready to wire.

G. 2 back wire holes per terminal.

H. Ultrasonic welding of face to back body.

I. Mis-wire label applied to load terminals.

J. GFCI receptacle shall have SafeLock protection. If critical components are damaged and ground fault protection is lost or if miswired, power to receptacle is disconnected.

K. Class A rated GFCI

L. 1 ½ HP rating on Motor Control GFCI switch (2081 series).

M. Button colors match the device face.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

N. Supplied with matching wall plate.

O. In compliance with UL-943, UL-498, UL-508.

P. Pre-wired pigtail connectors that accommodate Fed. Spec. receptacles are approved. Must be crimped and welded terminal right angle application within the connector.

Q. Receptacle shall be Federal Specification, WC896 compliant. Marking should be clearly identifiable on face or strap.

R. Acceptable Manufacturers: Cooper Wiring Devices, Pass & Seymour,


S. Leviton 6898, 20 amp, ivory, white, almond, or mahogany.

2.12 ROCKER SWITCHES - SPECIFICATION GRADE

A. Impact-resistant thermoplastic nylon back body and frame.

B. Cushioned nylon paddle assures smooth, quiet, long term operation.

C. Unique single rocking butterfly contact provides long term consistent performance with significantly fewer moving parts.

D. Internal back and side wire capability for easy installation with #14 - 10 stranded or solid copper/copper clad wire. Terminals made of high conductivity brass and serrated for maximum wire gripping.

E. Color-coded back bodies for positive identification of switch rating.

F. Silver alloy contacts integrally formed to the butterfly actuator assures reliable performance.

G. Integral autoground clip for positive ground to metal boxes.

H. Brass binding head terminal screws are combination phillips/slotted. All terminal screws backed out, ready to install.

I. In compliance with UL 20.

J. Switches shall be Federal Specification, WC596 compliant. Marking should be clearly identifiable on face or strap.

K. Acceptable Manufacturers: Cooper Wiring Devices, Pass & Seymour,


L. Leviton 5621-2/5623-2/5624-2, 20 amp, 120/277V ivory, white, black, grey, almond.

2.13 AC MOTOR RATED SWITCH

A. 30 A and/or 40 A, 600 V AC rated.

B. Double pole or triple pole, single-throw.

C. UL 508, UL 94 (flammability) Listed.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

D. All molded parts are made of thermoplastic material to assure superior resistance to repeated impact, chemical degradation, extreme temperature fluctuations, tracking and arcing.

E. Positive-contact design enhances fast make/slow break mechanism by minimizing bounce and arcing upon contact closure and teasing upon separation.

F. Free-travel toggle design protects closed contacts from accidental disengagement and contact teasing.

G. Silver alloy contacts provide maximum conductivity and prolonged service life.

H. Side and back wire terminal screws accept up to #10 AWG solid copper wire.

I. For standard #8 AWG wire, remove terminal clamp and use ring terminal.

J. Oversized #10, triple-combination, vibration-resistant terminal screws.

K. Mounting yoke is made from nickel-plated brass for superior corrosion resistance.

L. Insulating barriers between terminal screws provide isolation from each phase.

M. Device are permanently marked with catalog number, amperage, voltage and horse-power ratings to assist with identification.

N. Large toggle provides positive actuation, even when operated with gloved hand.

O. Leviton MS302 (30 A, 2 P), MS 303 (30 A, 3 P), MS402 (40 A, 2 P) or

MS403 (40 A, 3 P) or equivalent by Cooper Wiring Devices, Hubbell or Pass

& Seymour.

2.14 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY AND WIREWAY

A. Provide surface metal raceway system complete with all fittings, wiring, devices, etc. Surface raceway shall have baked enamel finish.

B. These raceways are permitted only in dry locations where not subject to severe physical damage and must have metal not less than .04 inches thick. Do not use in hoistways and in any hazardous classified areas.

C. The number, type, and size of conductors permitted in raceway shall be clearly marked on raceway or on shipping label.

D. Splices and taps may be made providing raceway has an accessible removable cover.

E. Wireway made of 14 gauge sheet metal forming a square trough with hinged cover and complete with couplings, 90 deg. elbows, tees, junction




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 boxes, end plates, and supports may be used for surface wiring at load centers and other locations to the extent permitted by the NEC.

F. Wireways in sizes 2 1/2" x 2 1/2" up to 12" x 12" square may be used; however, no conductor larger than that which the wireway is designed shall be installed therein. Wireway shall not contain more than thirty current carrying conductors at any cross-section and the sum of cross-sectional areas of all contained conductors at any cross-section shall not exceed 20% of the interior cross-sectional area of wireway.

G. Wireways shall be treated with rust resistant primer and finished gray baked enamel.

2.15 MC CABLE

A. Type; UL listed Type MC Cable with galvanized steel armor outer casing, color coded circuit conductors, insulated green grounding conductor.

Each conductor insulated with thermoplastic insulation.

B. NEC; Article 330, 518 and to comply with Federal Specification J-C-30B.

C. Manufacturers: AFC Cable Systems MC, Alean Cable, BICC, Tamaqua

Cable.

2.16 FIRE ALARM MC CABLE

A. Type; UL listed Type MC Cable with galvanized steel armor outer casing, bare grounding conductor, color coded circuit conductors. Each conductor insulated with thermoplastic insulation.

B. NEC; Article 760 and to comply with Federal Specification J-C-30B.

C. Manufacturer: AFC Cable Systems Fire Alarm Cable or approved equal.

2.17 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Hubbell Lighting.

2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.

3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.

4. Novitas, Inc.

5. RAB Lighting, Inc.

6. Sensor Switch, Inc.

7. TORK.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

8. Watt Stopper (The).

9. Pass & Seymour

B. General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit.

1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.

3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and

277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac.

Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.

4. Mounting: a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 0.5" knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.

5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of the sensor.

6.

7.

Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.

Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 - 200 fc; keep

lighting off when selected lighting level is present.

C. PIR Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a combination of heat and movement in area of coverage.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6" minimum movement

of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in.

2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96" high ceiling.

3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90' when mounted on a 10' high ceiling.

D. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a change in pattern of reflected ultrasonic energy in area of coverage.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches.

2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch high ceiling.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch high ceiling.

4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch high ceiling.

5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within

90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet

E. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by using a combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage.

Particular technology or combination of technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.

2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch high ceiling.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 WIRING DEVICES

A. Lighting outlet boxes to have fixture studs - 3/8 inch.

B. Exterior boxes shall be gasketed and watertight.

C. Switch and device plates to be mounted with all 4 corners touching adjacent surface.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

D. All devices to be installed true and plumb.

E. Switch plates and receptacles shall not be placed back to back in adjacent rooms. Offset locations a minimum of 3 inches to restrict noise transfer.

This shall also apply to TV outlets, telephone outlets, data outlets.

F. All devices on opposite side of a fire resistance rated wall assembly are to be separated by a horizontal distance of not less than 24 inches.

G. Ground fault circuit interrupters shall be provided on all outdoor receptacle circuits, receptacle circuits within toilet and bath rooms, areas in close proximity to water, and wherever else indicated on the drawings or required by Code. While-in-use type covers are to be used in exterior wet locations.

3.02 WIRING METHODS

A. Exposed interior wiring, panel feeders, home runs, equipment feeders;

EMT. EMT conduit shall be securely fastened at intervals not exceeding 10 feet and within 3' of all boxes. NOTE: Exposed means all wiring which is not installed within walls, above suspended ceilings, or within a pre-manufactured raceway. Any raceway that is to be exposed in a finished area is to be coordinated with the architect/engineer prior to installation.

B. Concealed branch circuiting above suspended ceilings, and in stud partitions; MC Cable. MC Cable shall be securely fastened at intervals not exceeding 4.5 feet, and within 12" of all boxes or fittings. All home runs shall be in EMT.

C. Wiring in concrete slabs or decks is not permitted unless approved by the architect or structural engineer.

D. Exposed exterior wiring; Intermediate rigid conduit

E. Wiring below concrete slabs in earth; PVC conduit. * Provide GRS conduit sweep elbow through concrete slab.

F. Minimum conduit size is 3/4".

G. Flexible connections to all motors. Maximum length of flexible conduit is to be 36".

3.03 RACEWAY SYSTEMS

A. All secondary wiring shall be installed in rigid metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or MC Cable as specified in these Specifications.

B. Electrical metallic tubing shall be employed in lieu of rigid metal conduit in




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 all locations except:

1. Underground

2. In gravel, cinder, concrete, or other sub-base floor construction. PVC may be used under floor.

3. Horizontal runs in concrete floor slabs. PVC may be used in slabs.

4. Where subject to possible mechanical injury

5. In masonry construction below finished grade. PVC may be used.

6. Vertically in poured concrete walls

7. For service work

8. For main distribution feeders

C. All raceway components shall be fastened at intervals not exceeding 8'-0".

1. Conduits shall not fasten or come in contact with piping of other trades as installed in this building.

2. Conduit shall be separated not less than 6 inches from any water, steam or gas lines as may be installed in the building.

D. Conduits and raceway systems shall be run concealed in walls, partitions and floor slabs. Conduit which must be exposed shall be arranged as to not pass in front of windows, doors, access panels, access doors, sky lights, HVAC equipment access for coil removal or filter removal or required service clearances.

E. Pulling fittings shall be provided for any conduit run which exceeds 200 feet in length.

F. All exposed fire alarm conduits are to be painted red, unless directed otherwise by the architect. This is to include the 120 V feed to the control panel. Junction boxes are to be labeled “FIRE ALARM.”

G. All conduits and raceway components installed under this Section for completion by others shall be provided with a pull wire affixed at both ends of conduit.

H. Insulating bushings shall be used on all conduit terminations entering enclosures, boxes and panels to protect the conductor from damage during installation.

3.04 POWER WIRING

A. Wire between motors, starters, disconnects and source.

B. Verify proper motor rotation. Check for smooth operation.

C. Furnish and install weatherproof disconnects, as indicated.

D. All panel feeders shall be run in EMT raceway system.

E. All wiring to roof top units, fans, and H&V units shall be installed complete




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 between panel, disconnect switches and motor or unit connections.

F. Disconnects shall be mounted adjacent to electrical and mechanical equipment. Indoor installations shall utilize NEMA 1 enclosures. Outdoor installations shall utilize NEMA 3R enclosures.

3.05 GROUNDING

A. All electrical equipment and systems shall be grounded.

B. Grounding system shall consist of a ground bus bar connected to a driven ground rod. Utilize ground type clamp fitting.

C. All connections to conduit, equipment and devices shall be made with compression type connections.

D. The grounding system shall comply with the NEC.

E. All outside lighting fixtures and poles shall be grounded.

F. All equipment and devices shall be grounded in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.

G. The ground system shall have a resistance of 25 ohms or less in compliance with the NEC. Utilize the fall of point method.

H. Furnish a ground system test report at the completion of the work.

I. Substation area grounding shall be in accordance with local utility company standards.

END OF SECTION




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

SECTION 26 28 16 - SAFETY SWITCHES - GENERAL DUTY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCE


B. Refer to NFPA and in particular National Electrical Code.

C. Refer to NEMA, UL, and IEEE Standards.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to furnish and install and place into operation safety switches where indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's shop drawings of devices.



B. Install systems and equipment in accordance with the National Electrical

Code and local codes having jurisdiction.

C. Provide adequate supervision of labor force to see that installations are correct.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES

SAFETY SWITCHES 262816 - 1



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

A. APPLICATION DATA

30-600 amperes

240 volts ac

NEMA 1 - General Purpose, painted sheet steel

NEMA 3R - Rainproof, painted galvanized steel

Standard - Non time delay fuse

Maximum - Time delay (dual element) fuse

B. CONSTRUCTION

Visible blades

Handle attached to box, not cover

Handle position indicates "ON" or "OFF"

Top hinged cover on NEMA 3R

Operating mechanism is quick-make, quick-break

Plated current carrying parts

Provisions for padlocking the switch in the "OFF" position

Class R fuse kits for field installation

C. NEUTRAL AND GROUNDING

Provisions for field installation of insulated, groundable neutral

Ground kits for field installation

D. TERMINALS

UL listed for Al or Cu wires

UL listed for 60 deg. or 75 deg. C. wires

E. FUSE CLIPS

Spring reinforced

Plated

F. APPLICATION

Fusible - Class H or Class R

Not fusible

G. NEMA STANDARDS

KS1 - 1975

H. UL LISTING

I.

UL 98 Enclosed Switches

Maximum HP ratings

UL LISTED SHORT CIRCUIT RATING:

100,000 rms symmetrical amperes with proper rejection kit and Class R fuses 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes with Class H fuses

J. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Siemens




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

2. Cutler Hammer

3. GE

4. Square D

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SAFETY SWITCHES

A. Furnish and install safety switches on all motors which do not have integral equipment disconnect devices, local starters and/or where indicated on the drawings.

B. Furnish and install fused safety switches where indicated on the drawings.

C. Safety switches shall be installed to meet the area classification as to standard, hazardous, rainproof, etc.

D. Safety switches shall be installed securely to building structure or be provided with supplemental support steel such as angle iron or uni-strut when required to locate on other than building structure.

E. All safety switches shall be grounded.

END OF SECTION




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

SECTION 26 43 13 - SURGE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCE


B. Refer to National Electrical Code (NEC).

C. Refer to UL, ANSI, IEEE, and NEMA Standards.

D. Refer to Computer Business Manufacturer’s Association (CBEMA),

Information Technology Industry Council (ITIC) and International

Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) for clamping voltage tolerance guidelines for sensitive equipment.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to install and place into operation surge suppression where indicated on drawings and/or specifications.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. The surge suppression submittal shall also include:

1. Dimensional drawing of each suppressor type indicating mounting arrangements.

2. UL 1449 Third Edition documentation (SCCR, VPR, MCOV, I-n).

C. All Surge Protective Devices shall be of the same manufacturer.


A. Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s warranty requirements.

B. Install equipment with accordance with NEC.

SURGE SUPPRESSION 264313 - 1



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

C. Provide adequate supervision of labor force to see that installations are correct.

D. Surge protection devices shall be manufactured in the USA, by a company normally engaged in the design and manufacture of such devices for at least ten (10) years.

1.05 SAFETY AGENCY APPROVALS

A. Suppressers shall be listed in accordance with UL 1449 3 rd Edition documentation, standard for safety, surge protective devices and meet requirements in UL 1283 for electromagnetic interference filters.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SERVICE ENTRANCE

A. Surge protection devices shall be installed at all service entrances of each building and/or as shown on the riser diagram.

B. Suppressers shall be tested per ANSI/IEEE C62.45.

C. Wye systems shall have suppression elements between each phase conductor and the system neutral, between each phase conductor and the system ground and between the neutral conductor and ground (true 10 mode protection).

D. Each phase shall have a minimum of two modules. The surge modules shall be fused at a minimum rating of 30 amps. Modules and fuses shall be field replaceable. Fuses shall be surge suppression fuses. (Ferraz

Shawmut VPS Series)

E. Visible indication of proper suppresser connection and operation shall be provided. The indicator shall consist of an LED array. No single LED or neon indicators will be used.

F. The surge protection device shall be equipped with an audible alarm that shall actuate when any part of the surge circuitry has been damaged. A silence button shall be provided with the alarm.

G. The suppressor shall exhibit Sine Wave Tracking circuitry and shall provide high frequency noise filtering up to 50dB attenuation (100 kHz - 100 MHz).

H. Suppressors shall meet or exceed the following criteria:




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

1. Minimum single impulse current rating (L-N + L-G): 160,000 amperes per phase, 80kA per mode.

2. Incorporate hybrid circuitry.

3. UL 1449 3 rd Edition voltage protection ratings shall not exceed the following:

VOLTAGE L-N

120/208 800

L-G N-G L-L

MCOV

800 800 1200

150

277/480 1200 1200 1200

2000

320

I. Suppressors shall exhibit redundant protection for each phase and consist of solid-state components and shall operate bi-directionally.

J. Suppressor shall be equipped with a surge counter with a reset and battery backup.

K. Suppressor short circuit current rating shall meet or exceed that of the service panelboard.

L. Total Protection Solutions (Joslyn) Surge Track ST160 or approved equivalent by Advanced Protection Technologies, Inc., Siemens, GE, Eaton,

Square D or LEA International.

2.02 SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION INTEGRATED SUPPRESSION PANELS:

A.

Surge Protective Devices shall be installed in secondary distribution panels as shown on the riser diagram.

B. Suppressor shall be tested per ANSI/IEEE C62.45.

C. Wye systems shall have suppression elements between each phase conductor and the system neutral, between each phase conductor and the system ground and between the neutral conductor and ground (true 10 mode protection).

D. Visible indication of proper suppressor connection and operation shall be provided.

E. The surge protective device shall be equipped with an audible alarm that shall actuate when any part of the surge circuitry has been damaged. A




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 silence button shall be provided with the alarm.

F. The suppressor shall exhibit Sine Wave Tracking circuitry. The surge suppressor shall have suppression circuitry that is field replaceable without disturbing the conduit or enclosure.

G. Suppressors shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. Minimum single impulse current rating (L-N + L-G): 80,000 amperes per phase, 40kA per mode.

2. UL Clamping voltage shall not exceed the following:

VOLTAGE L-N L-G N-G L-L

MCOV

120/208 800 800 800 1200

150

277/480 1200 1200 1200

2000

320

H.

Suppressors shall consist of solid-state components and operate bi-directionally. The manufacturer of the surge panel shall offer either a surface or flush cover, as required by the job conditions.

I. Suppressor short circuit current rating shall meet or exceed that of the panelboard.

J. Total Protection Solutions (Joslyn) Surge Track ST80 or approved equivalent by Advanced Protection Technologies, Inc., LEA International,

Siemens, GE, Eaton or Square D.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SERVICE ENTRANCE

A. Install one primary suppressor at each utility service entrance. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Suppressor shall be installed on the load side of the service entrance.

C. Conductors between suppressor and point of attachment shall be at least

#6 AWG stranded copper conductor or larger. The conductors shall be kept as short and straight as possible. Lead length of connecting




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 conductors shall be within 36 inches.

D. Suppressor's ground shall be bonded to the service entrance ground.

3.02 SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION PANELS

A. Install one secondary suppressor at each distribution panel location or as indicated on the riser diagram. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Suppressor shall be installed on the service panel, per the manufacturer's installation instructions. Contractor shall install circuit breaker in panel to attached surge panel to electrical distribution system if necessary.

C. Conductors between suppressor and point of attachment shall be at least

#6 AWG stranded copper conductor or larger. The conductors shall be kept as short and straight as possible. The maximum length of connecting wiring shall not exceed 18 inches. Pre-wired suppressors with conductors smaller than #6 wire are not acceptable.

D. Suppressor’s ground shall be connected to the distribution panel ground.

3.03 CERTIFIED TESTS

A. The surge suppresser manufacturer shall provide certified test results on the actual product being shipped to the job site. The test results shall be certified by an officer or engineer of the company as being performed on the product after manufacture.

B. The test conducted shall be per ANSI/IEEE C62.45. The units shall be tested in all modes listed in this specification.

3.04 WARRANTY

A. The surge suppresser shall warrant the surge protective devices and supporting components against defects in material and workmanship for a minimum period of five years.

3.05 TESTING

A. Perform field quality control testing under the supervision of the manufacturer’s factory authorized service representative.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train owner’s personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain equipment.

END OF SECTION




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

SECTION 26 50 00 - LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCE

A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for other requirements of this Section.

B. All work to conform to the National Electrical Code.

C. Refer to standards of the Illuminating Engineering Society.

D. All exit and emergency lighting shall comply with NFPA Life Safety Code

101, ADA, and other local codes as may apply.

1.02 SCOPE

A. Remove existing lighting system within the renovated area. Remove fixtures, mountings, outlets, wiring, conduit, switches and controls unless otherwise indicated.

B. Furnish and install a complete and operating lighting system in new and renovated spaces, including all fixtures, wiring, lamps, and ballasts.

C. All lighting outlets shall have a fixture. If a fixture designation is missing, furnish and install a fixture in similar use in the project.

D. All fixtures shall have a home run. If these are omitted on the drawings the contractor shall allow for a home run to the nearest appropriate panel.

E. All rooms are to be provided with lighting controls. Provide manual switch and code required control devices as appropriate.

F. Provide exit and emergency lighting as required by Code in all spaces to meet requirements of the AHJ. Allow for 10 additional fixtures to be installed where directed by the AHJ.

1.03 MOUNTING

A. The contractor shall be responsible for selecting particular mounting arrangements of fixtures to suit the construction or ceiling types.

Contractor or his agent shall review architectural drawings to establish ceiling types prior to preparing shop drawings for submission. It is NOT to be understood that the fixture schedule accounts for the mounting types.

LIGHTING 265000 - 1



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

Frequently ceiling types are changed after the fixture schedule has been completed.

B. Fixtures shall be mounted on structurally secure supports. The contractor shall provide miscellaneous steel supports to span between structural elements to provide a base of support for the fixtures at the locations shown on the drawings. Refer to architectural and structural drawings for locations of beams, joists, purlins, etc.

C. Exterior fixtures shall be mounted with anchor bolts of suitable size secured into concrete bases. The mounting arrangement shall be capable of withstanding a continuous wind of 100 mph with gales to 130 mph.

EPA of fixture shall be rated with pole to provide required performance.

1.04 APPROVALS

A. Furnish shop drawings and catalog cuts of all fixtures for review by the engineer prior to ordering.

B. Provide samples of any particular fixture or fixtures when requested by the owner, architect, or engineer.

C. Provide a point by point lighting level calculation for parking areas, areas when requested by the engineer, and for high profile areas (i.e., main lobbies, atriums, pools, gymnasiums, etc.), when an alternate manufacturer or fixture is being presented for approval. Calculation shall be provided by the manufacturer or the local manufacturer’s representative. Footcandle levels are to be indicated at a maximum of 10' intervals (outside) or 5' intervals (inside). A drawing is to be provided at the same scale as the contract documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FIXTURES

A. Fixtures shall be complete with wiring, lamp holders, lamps, reflectors, glassware, canopies, shades, bases, pendants, etc.

B. Fixtures shall be wired with type AF fixture wire.

C. Pendants and canopies of the type required for the particular fixture and mounting shall be provided.

LIGHTING 265000 - 2



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

D. Plastic lenses shall not be used. Provide either virgin acrylic, high impact polycarbonate or tempered glass or as specified in the fixture schedule.

E. Any exposed fixture housing surface, trim frame, door frame and lens frame shall be free of light leaks either between fixture components or between fixture and adjacent surface.

F. Hinged door closure frames shall operate smoothly and easily without binding when installed and latches shall function easily by finger action without the use of tools.

G. Recessed incandescent fixtures installed in an insulated ceiling shall be listed for use in insulated ceilings.

H. Fixtures in pool environments (or similar condition) shall be fabricated with stainless steel and utilize stainless steel hardware. The fixtures shall be fully gasketed with an Ingress Protection Classification of at least IP-64 in addition to the requirements listed in the Lighting Fixture Schedule.

I. Fixtures in kitchens, showers, and other damp areas shall be gasketed, vapor tight, and fabricated with aluminum instead of steel. These fixtures shall have pressure clamping devices in lieu of latches.

J. Fixtures located in other harsh environments are to be of suitable construction and finish for the intended environment in addition to the requirements listed in the Lighting Fixture Schedule.

K. All fixture lenses shall, from the manufacturer, be shipped within a protective covering, i.e. plastic bag, paper wrapped, to prevent dust, dirt, smudges prior to final acceptance.

L. Ballasts shall be easily serviceable when installed and shall not be mounted to removable reflectors or wire way covers.

2.02 COMPACT FLUORESCENT BALLAST

A. The electronic ballast shall be furnished with poke-in wire trap connectors, color coded to ANSI standard C82.11.

B. The electronic ballast shall operate from a line voltage range of 108 - 305 volts, 50/60 Hz.

C. The electronic ballast input current shall have Total Harmonic Distortion

(THD) of less than 10% when operated at the nominal line voltage (120V,

277V) with primary lamp(s) and have a Power Factor greater than 96%.

D. The electronic ballast shall have a Programmed-Start type system.

E. The electronic ballast shall have a lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.

F. The electronic ballast shall be sound rated A.

LIGHTING 265000 - 3



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

G. The electronic ballast output frequency to the lamps shall be above 65kHz to minimize interference with infrared control systems, and eliminate visible flicker.

H. The electronic ballast shall meet ANSI C82.11, where applicable and

I. withstand transients specified in ANSI C62.41, Location Category A3.

The electronic ballast shall be Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Listed (Class

P) and CSA Certified where applicable and rated for use in air handling spaces.

J. The electronic ballast shall carry a five year warranty from the date of manufacture for operation at a case temperature of 75°C or less. When operated at a case temperature between 75°C and 85°C, the warranty shall be three years from the date of manufacture.

K. Ballast shall be Advance Smartmate or equivalent by Universal Lighting

Technologies, Osram, Lutron, or Robertson.

2.03 ELECTRONIC FLUORESCENT BALLAST (PROGRAMMED START)

A. Ballast shall operate from a nominal line voltage of (120, 277) volts, 50/60

Hz. 120V ballast shall operate from 90V-145V. 277V ballast shall operate from 200V - 305V.

B. Ballast shall maintain constant light output for a line voltage variation of

+/- 10%.

C. Ballast shall meet ANSI C62.41 Category A transient voltage protection requirements.

D. Ballast shall be programmed rapid start (Advance soft start).

E. Ballast Power Factor shall be >99% and THD shall be <10% for all lamp types.

F. Ballast shall meet FCC Class A (non-consumer) specifications for EMI/RFI.

G. Ballast shall start the lamp at a minimum temperature of 0°F.

H. Ballast shall have a lamp current crest factor <1.5 for F32T8 lamps.

I. Ballast shall be sound rated A.

J. Ballast shall be UL Listed Class P and CSA Approved.

K. Ballast output to the lamps shall be above 42Khz to minimize interference with infrared control systems.

L. The electronic ballast shall carry a five-year warranty from the date of manufacture. Warranty shall be valid for a maximum case temperature of

70°F.

M. Ballast shall be Advance Mark V or equivalent by Universal Lighting

Technologies, Osram, Lutron, or Robertson.

LIGHTING 265000 - 4



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

2.04 HID BALLASTS

A. Ballasts shall be designed in accordance with all applicable ANSI specifications including ANSI C82.4.

B. The Core & Coil ballast shall be designed with class “H” (180°C) or higher insulation system and vacuum impregnated with a 100% solid based resin.

C. Core & Coil ballasts shall be designed to operate at least 180 cycles of 12 hours on and 12 hours off, with the lamp circuit in an open or short-circuited condition and without undue reduction in ballast life.

D. Core & Coil ballast and starter combinations shall be designed to provide a reliable lamp starting down to -40°C for High Pressure Sodium and -30°C for Metal Halide at minimum rated line voltage.

E. Manufacturer shall provide written warranty against defects in workmanship, including replacement, for three years from date of manufacture.

F. Individual over current protection.

G. Constant wattage HPF type with a current crest factor not to exceed 1.6.

H. Ballasts shall have external pulse igniter.

I. B sound ratings or best available.

J. Manufacturers: Advance, Universal Lighting Technologies, Osram or

Robertson.

2.05 LAMPS

A. Incandescent: 125 volt, inside frosted, long life, "A" bulb, unless indicated otherwise in the fixture schedule.

B. Fluorescent: F32T8, 32 watt, 2900 lumens, 3500 K, 20,000 hr, 85 CRI, unless indicated otherwise in fixture schedule.

C. Compact fluorescent: As indicated in the fixture schedule.

D. Metal Halide: Pulse start, color as indicated in fixture schedule.

E. Manufacturers; Philips, G.E., Osram Sylvania, Inc., Panasonic, Venture.

F. Contractor is to coordinate lamp color for all fixtures. Lamp color is to be similar in all spaces.

2.06 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. General requirements: Self-contained units, thermoplastic enclosure, comply with UL 924. Units include the following features:

LIGHTING 265000 - 5



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type with minimum 10 year nominal life and special warranty, 12 volt, remote capacity as required.

2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.

3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

4. Wire Guard: Where indicated, heavy-chrome-plated wire guard arranged to protect lamp heads or fixtures.

5. Integral Time Delay Relay: Arranged to hold unit on for fixed interval after restoring power after an outage. Provides adequate time delay to permit high-intensity-discharge lamps to restrike and develop adequate output.

6. Test switch and LED pilot light

7. Self-diagnostic circuitry.

B. Manufacturers: Emergi-Lite, Dual-Lite, Chloride

2.07 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER SUPPLY UNIT

A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit factory mounted within fixture body. Comply with UL 924.

1. Test Switch and Light-Emitting Diode Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space.

2. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type with minimum 10-year nominal life.

3. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type.

4. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from unit when normal supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamp and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

5. Light output: a. Full light output, parallel connected lamps for T5, T8 or T12 applications. b. Minimum 750 lumens for compact fluorescent lamps.

B. Manufacturer: Bodine B30 or B33 Series or prior approved equivalent for

T5, T8 and T12 applications. Bodine B75C, B84CG, B94CG, B426, B4CFG

LIGHTING 265000 - 6



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 or BDL94C or prior approved equivalent for compact fluorescent applications.

2.08 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule on drawings.

B. Internally lighted Signs:

1.

Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

2.

Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type) Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack. a.

Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b.

Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c.

Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. d.

Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. e.

LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. f.

Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FIXTURES

LIGHTING 265000 - 7



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

A. All recessed fluorescent trouffers (2' x 2', 2' x 4', 1' x 4') and recessed fixtures weighing up to 20 lbs. are to be installed in grids with mounting clips and with grid secured at diagonal corners of fixture to the building structure. (4' x 4') fixtures to be secured at 4 corners.

B. Recessed fixtures between 20 and 50 pounds are to have, in addition to above, 12 gauge steel safety chains at opposite corners hung slack from the building structure. Fixtures above 50 pounds to be independently supported directly from the structure with approved hangers and angular sway bracing according to manufacturer’s installation guidelines.

C. Surface mounted and pendant fixtures under 15 pounds can be supported directly from the outlet box when all of the following apply: screws pass through round holes and not key slots in the fixture body, the outlet box is attached to a main ceiling runner, the outlet box is supported vertically from the building structure.

D. Surface fixtures between 15 and 50 pounds shall be bolted to the ceiling independent of the outlet box. Fixtures over 50 pounds shall be secured to the building structure using a manufacturer’s approved mounting method.

E. Fixtures to be set plumb.

F. Provide six foot flexible leads on recessed fixtures to allow easy removal.

G. Recessed fixtures to be set with mounting frames.

H. Coordinate final location of all fixtures with other disciplines to avoid

I. interferences and potential obstructions as the work progresses.

Fixtures used for temporary lighting during construction shall be re-lamped prior to acceptance of the lighting system.

J. Fixtures shall be cleaned and free of all dirt, dust, smudges and surface imperfections just prior to final acceptance.

K. Fixtures which are recessed in a fire rated ceiling shall be provided with an enclosure around the fixture which shall maintain the fire rating integrity of the ceiling system. The installation of the enclosure shall meet the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. The fixture shall be insulation rated for higher temperature operation.

L. All recessed or surface mounted fixtures on or in sloped ceilings shall have sloped ceiling adapters to allow for vertical light distribution.

M. Recessed fluorescent fixtures installed in an insulated ceiling shall have a bent chicken wire “insulation spacer hat” to maintain required 3" clearance per NEC.

LIGHTING 265000 - 8



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

3.02 SWITCHING

A. Provide lighting control switch legs to wall switches for all fixtures except for those operated by pull chains or integral switches.

B. Provide 3-way or 4-way control where indicated and for rooms with more than one entrance.

C. Provide a single time clock, contactors and relays as indicated on the drawings and as necessary for exterior lighting and parking lot lighting control.

* Provide lighting controls to meet IBC 2006/IECC 2006/ ASHRAE 90.1. Refer to Spec. 26 09 00 for additional requirements.

END OF SECTION

LIGHTING 265000 - 9



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

SECTION 26 60 00 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

A. Secondary Service: 120/240 V, 1 phase, 3 wire.

B. Secondary Distribution: 120/240 V, 1 phase, 3 wire.

C. Lighting Branch Circuits: 120 V, 1 phase, 2 wire.

D. Power Branch Circuits: 240 V, 3 phase, 3 wire.

1.02 ELECTRIC SERVICE

A. Secondary shall be provided by contractor to building service entrance gear. Contractor shall furnish and install all work required by the utility company for service.

B. Contractor shall coordinate his schedule with the utility for completion of the installation and energization of the services.

C. Contractor shall provide metering conduit between current transformer and final location of meter as determined by the utility company.

1.03 REFERENCE


B. Refer to requirements of the National Electrical Code and the utility company.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SECONDARY SERVICE CABLE

A. Copper conductors, 75 degrees C, 600V, thermoplastic insulation and neoprene outer jacket, U. L. listed. Type THWN.

SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION 266000 - 1



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

B. Manufacturers: Triangle, General Cable, Southwire.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 POWER WIRING

A. Wire between motors, starters, disconnects and source.

B. Verify proper motor rotation.

C. Furnish and install weatherproof disconnects, as indicated.

D. All panel feeders shall be run in EMT raceway system.

E. All wiring to roof top units, fans, equipment, and H&V units shall be installed complete between panels and disconnect switches, and motors.

F. Disconnects shall be mounted adjacent to electrical and mechanical equipment. Indoor installations shall utilize NEMA 1 enclosures. Outdoor installations shall utilize NEMA 3R enclosures.

3.02 GROUNDING

A. All electrical equipment and systems shall be grounded.

B. Grounding system shall consist of a ground bus bar connected to a driven ground rod. Utilize ground type clamp fitting.

C. All connections to conduit, equipment and devices shall be made with compression type connections.

D. The grounding system shall comply with the NEC.

E. All equipment and devices shall be grounded in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.

END OF SECTION

SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION 266000 - 2



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

SECTION 27 10 00 - DATA/COMMUNICATIONS/CATV EQUIPMENT

* Refer to attached SJU Voice/Data/Communications Systems Specification

DATA COMMUNICATIONS CABLING 271000 - 1

VOICE / DATA / COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SPECIFICATION

1.

General qualifications

2.

Installation Components, Materials and Methods

3.

Provisions

1.0 General Qualifications

1.1

All personnel involved in pulling, terminating, or otherwise installing cable must possess appropriate training or certification and a minimum of two years field experience with installing

Category 3, Category 5, Category 5 enhanced, Category 6, Category 6e, coaxial cable, Siamese, multi-mode fiber, and single-mode fiber. Personnel must have a working knowledge of termination techniques, pulling tension, acceptable bend radius, service loops, and other practices relevant to vertical (riser) and horizontal cable installation.

1.2

All supervisory personnel/foremen must possess appropriate certification and a minimum of 5 years experience in cabling and three years in a supervisory capacity.

1.3

A registered professional engineer must be on staff, or otherwise retained by the vendor if necessary, at no additional cost to Saint Joseph’s University, to assess and design installation including hole coring, trenching, conduit repairs, conduit installation, intrabuilding work, and other requirements as specified. This professional must have a minimum of five years experience in voice and data cabling projects.

1.4

Vendor must have on staff (or otherwise available), a person with RCDD (Registered

Communications Distribution Designer) accreditation from BISCI (Building Industry Consulting

Service International) and a minimum of five years experience. Absent qualifications as stated, a staff member must possess similar relevant accreditation, registration, or experience.

1.5

Provide resumes listing experience, certification, and/or other qualifications for each supervisor/foreman, engineer, and designer who will be assigned to work on the project.

1.6

Cite a minimum of three references specific to the supervisor/foreman who will be assigned to work on the project. References should be for projects that are similar to the Saint

Joseph’s University project in size, scope, and environment (if possible). College, University or other campus references would be most appropriate.

1.7

Name, and provide a phone number for, the manager/branch manager/principal responsible for overall supervision of our project.

1.8

Provide an organizational chart, relevant to our account, indicating names and positions of appropriate personnel up to and including either your principal, if you are a local company, or your principal regional executive.

1.9

The vendor must submit manufacturer-specific product data sheets detailing appropriate characteristics, parameters, or limitations for each type of cable or hardware proposed. These should be included as separately labeled appendices at the end of your proposal.

1.10

Vendor will be responsible for cleanup of all areas at the end of each day in accordance with University requirements. When working in 'finished' areas, the vendor must sweep/dry vacuum and otherwise leave the area in a condition as initially found.



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

1.11

Vendor will be responsible for identifying unanticipated obstacles or impediments to job performance and for immediately notifying assigned University or appropriate Contractor personnel.

1.12

Vendor will be responsible for repair of walls or other structures during penetration or other execution of work, except as mutually agreed in advance.

1.13

Nelson Firestop Products will be used for all necessary penetrations. The vendor must conform to University defined regulations regarding firestop materials and applications. Our

Facilities Management department can supply necessary documentation.

1.14

Vendor will be responsible for locating and identifying discrepancies in, or omissions from, drawings or specifications provided by the University. In the event that there is doubt or concern regarding the accuracy or completeness of the information provided, the vendor must contact the University/GC and request instructions for proceeding. Absent specific notification and request for instructions, the vendor will be responsible for providing the turnkey system as generally defined without incremental cost.

1.15

The vendor must become knowledgeable about the project prior to submission of a proposal to the extent that all work and cost components are fully developed in the response. No allowances will be provided for lack of sufficient knowledge on the part of the vendor for any reason unless specified by the University in writing.

1.16

Our Hubbell warranty must be maintained to cover all hardware and other components for the minimum of twenty-five years after date of acceptance by the University. Confirm that you are fully Hubbell certified. If an extended warranty is supplied, include a description of this in a labeled appendix at the end of your proposal.

1.17a

Confirm that you are Commscope-certified for installation of all cable or other components as applicable.

1.17b

Confirm that you are certified for installation of all cable or other components as applicable. List all applicable manufacturers.

2.0 Installation Components, Materials, and Methods

2.1

Voice cables will be of a different color than data cables. Typically gray (voice) and blue

(data) will be used, but this may be subject to change. Black or white RG-6 is acceptable.

2.2

All cables in wiring closets and the MDF for the building and in any other large-bundled applications must be run in cable trays or on ladder-racking wherever reasonable.

2.3

Cables must be neatly dressed and tie-wrapped and attached to the structure wherever reasonable.

2.4

Cables must not lay on light fixtures and should not be laid in parallel with power wiring.

Cables are not to be laid on ceiling grids anywhere in the building. All bundled cables in ceilings must be attached to the structure via J-hooks or D-rings according to manufacturer specifications.

In particular, cables will need to be attached to the original ceiling in halls and common areas.

The vendor must provide and install all necessary hardware (hooks, rings etc…). We will show the pathways, closets, routes and ceilings on the site survey.

2.5

The cabling vendor is responsible for penetrations through walls and installation of cabling throughout as defined on prints. The electrical contractor may be supplying a conduit with string and box or other pathway to each wall outlet, but you are responsible for confirming

2




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 this and managing your access with the electrical contractor. Do not assume this access unless you confirm.

2.6

All riser and horizontal cable should be plenum-rated throughout unless otherwise noted here.

2.7

Follow EIA/TIA Standards 567 and 568 for installation and EIA/IEEE 568B for termination.

2.8a

All new voice station cables will be 24 AWG 4 pair copper, and will conform to EIA/TIA

Category 5e standards. You are required to bid cable manufactured by Commscope. Voice cables must be Ultra II model 5504M (Gray in color. If gray is unavailable, use white) for all horizontal station runs.

2.8b

Typical office jack ‘Q’ installations will require two data (CAT 6) cables with two data jacks and one voice (CAT 5e) cable which should be split to two jacks by punching the blue and orange pairs onto the first jacks and green and brown onto the second. This will be used to derive two jacks from the single voice cable for each of the defined locations.

(We refer to this as a

‘Triple run’ or a ‘Quad plate’) These should be installed on 4 port Hubbell face plates (Part

#IFP14XX) using the mods as described before. Data only jacks are defined with an associated number of jacks. Hubbell plates will depend upon the number of jacks per locations (i.e. 2 port, 4 port, 6 port etc…) Single voice jacks, using Suttle plates, are generally defined for all wall phones (‘W’), Emergency phones (EP) and should be mounted at print-defined or ADA-defined height. Collaborative/learning spaces are generally configured with one CAT 6 data jack installed at 54” (or other print-defined height for the Display), one above ceiling for installation of a patch cable to the Touch Panel via conduit and sometimes one at 18” or wherever is defined for the laptop/AV equipment for the space. A/V technology in rack locations, lecterns, Sit-

Stand-Desks or similar configurations for classroom management generally require six CAT 6 data and one CAT 5e voice on an 8 port plate mounted in conjunction with A/V equipment provider installations inside the lectern, SSD, rack etc.. Typical end point jack configuration installations in Residence Hall dorm rooms will require two CAT 6 data cables with two data jacks and one CAT 5E voice cable with one jack (depending upon designation indicated on the contract drawings) and one CATV Coax BNC. These should be installed on 4 port Hubbell face plates (Part #IFP14XX) using the mods as previously described. Follow plans for all installations and verify counts and locations with SJU personnel prior to installation. Follow plans for all installations and verify counts and locations with SJU personnel prior to installation. Other jack types are defined on the print or the spreadsheet provided along with this. Note that we will require use of color coordinated faceplates for all drop locations and all types of drops throughout the building.

Verify color selection with SJU personnel. See the prints and other documentation to define other standard drop types.

2.8c

All new data station cables, including those for wireless access points, must be Category

6. You are required to install Commscope UltraMedia7504 (blue in color) for all horizontal station runs.

2.8d

. All Wireless Access Points (WAPs) are to receive one (1) CAT6 cable just like any other data run and terminated in accordance with the location conditions. See “Wireless Design” document for locations. For the WAPs, you will terminate on a patch panel/power over Ethernet panel configuration. Unless otherwise noted, SJU will supply the POE panel. Also include, (as an option) mounting (with enclosures where necessary) and testing the WAPs throughout. You must supply and install the enclosures (Oberon 1052-00 or 1059-00 depending upon ceiling and application). WAP end points in inaccessible areas must be provided with conduit raceway to

3




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 accessible area. Necessary conduit, raceways and back boxes are generally supplied by

Electrical Contractor but you should verify and coordinate this. Provide WAP drop counts and verify with SJU prior to award

2.8e

Security cameras will be mounted by the security contractor. But you should include

Siamese RG59 cabling and 1 CAT6 to each camera location. Note that all RG59 camera cabling must run back to the assigned DVR location and not necessarily the IDF associated with the voice/data cabling. Data for cameras should be terminated on separate Hubbell patch panels (for

CAT6). Security camera runs should be terminated according to manufacturer specifications at each end. University personnel can provide a location for your panels on an existing rack unless otherwise noted.

2.8f

Coax (for CATV) runs must be installed as Quad-shield RG6 or RG-11 cable terminated on the associated faceplate as defined on the prints and tipped at the user end in the faceplate as defined. Follow the prints for locations and terminations. Note that for any run greater than 150’ in length, you must use RG-11 rather than RG-6. It will be the responsibility of the vendor to determine which runs will exceed 150’ and will require RG-11. All CATV cabling to user locations should run to the defined IDF/MDF or existing Campus Television tap location and be terminated there and spooled for connection to the CATV vendor feed.

2.8g

If your coax runs to end user locations do not all run to a single can/tap that is activated for use or there is any need for installation of connectivity between CATV cans/taps, you will install Commscope.500 “Hard Line” cable for all CATV backbone in the building to provide a turnkey cabling solution.

2.8h

. Indoor emergency phones that require Talk-A Phone (TP or EPP) installations must follow manufacturer specifications.) Vendor will be responsible for installing communications cables (one CAT 5e voice) and for potentially coordinating with the EC to install a 120 V circuit to the ETP-400. (See Security System section below.)

2.9

Once installed, all cables will be tested for the following measurements: cable length, wire map, attenuation, NEXT (near end crosstalk), ELFEXT, and Return Loss. The vendor must use appropriate Enhanced Category 6 testers (level III) for data cables. Performance testing must demonstrate compliance with all Category 6 standards and limits. Voice cables must be tested for, and comply with all standard EIA/TIA Category 5e requirements. Testing must include all measurements as noted above for data cables.

2.10

The results of cable testing must be documented and provided to Saint Joseph’s

University as a file on a CD. All test sheets should be similarly supplied.

2.11

We require that all newly installed cabling be fished and flush mounted except where a box and string have been provided. Assume that you will use established routes by the electrical contractor (if applicable and confirmed) or fish the wall and terminate using flush mounted plates and either electrical contractor boxes or wall caddy’s. You must have prior approval from St.

Joseph’s University Information Technology personnel to use wall-mounted raceway or conduit except where noted on a print or discussed during the site survey. Where raceway is required in non-fishable areas and for large bundles, the vendor must provide and install appropriately sized

Hubbell Media TRak ( MT) raceway using all recommended techniques and securely attaching this to walls with adhesive and screws. Where required (in a raceway environment) the vendor must install a securely attached wall mount box (part #MT678SB). Cable must not be exposed in any fashion and must be contained in raceway or inside the ceiling or wall. Be sure to provide

4




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 spec sheets and add/alternate pricing for any product (i.e Panduit, Wiremold, etc…) you are recommending for use other than those defined. Install blanks for unused mod openings if applicable.

2.11a

In general, we expect the vendor to follow basic horizontal standards practice. Identify floors and locations of correct IDFs.

2.12

All typical (non-Wiremold-installed) data cables will be run horizontally to the defined jack locations and punched onto blue Category 6 compliant Hubbell mods (Part # HXJ6B) according to manufacturer instructions. For installations using Wiremold (most typically AL

4000 Isoduct Aluminum Raceway that is used primarily for University Lab/classroom applications) terminate using a Wiremold CM-2AB-GY (gray) bezel and a Hubbell IM2K1GY

(gray or the suitable color).

Installation must meet all relevant standards specifications for terminations. All non-wall phone voice cables will be run horizontally to the defined jack locations and punched onto Office White Category 5e compliant Hubbell mods (Part #

HXJ5EOW) according to manufacturer instructions. Installation must meet all relevant standards specifications for terminations. We typically use Office White Hubbell faceplates and hardware for office applications unless noted otherwise. However, you must confirm color of faceplates before installation. For standard wall phone installations, run the 5e as defined, but punch onto

Suttle SE-630AD6 Assy. Mod Wall Jack.

2.12a

All new data cables will be run back to the defined closet and terminated on 48 port

Hubbell patch panels (Part # P648U) and (if needed) 24 port Hubbell patch panels (Part #P624U) to provide at least 20 spare panel ports after all terminations are completed. You will supply and install all panels. All necessary hardware and installation must be supplied for each of the closets

(IDFs) that support horizontal cabling. All data terminations must be compliant with 568B standards and Category 6 specifications. All ports must be labeled according to University specification which specifies the type (voice or data), floor, and port number. You may assume that the University will supply and install switches and patch cords from the switches to the patch panels. Except for this, your completed solution should provide turnkey connectivity from the MDF to every jack , or Permanent Link.

2.12b

All voice cables will be run horizontally back to the defined IDF closet for that area and terminated on 110 blocks mounted inside the closet on plywood. Installation must meet all specification and standards for 568 and Category 5e. 110 blocks for horizontal cable must be labeled with floor and jack number following current labeling procedures. Vendor must confirm all labeling with SJU personnel prior to installation.

2.12c RG6 and RG11coax cables (if any) must be installed and terminated according to standard practices and procedures from the defined cabinet interface to the defined coax locations throughout the job site to be used for TV hookups. We anticipate that Coax will be used to support TV as defined on the prints.

2.13

Terminate data on new patch panels that you supply on the existing rack. Access and location of panels/cables must be confirmed with SJU personnel prior to bidding. Any new cabling (riser) must be installed in the racks as configured by SJU personnel using cable management. New voice cabling and 110 blocks must be mounted with existing voice 110s and be installed on plywood in the appropriate closet. If rack space is unsuitable or provides insufficient capacity all data equipment including the patch panels (to be supplied by the vendor) must be installed in a new 84’ inch high 19’ rack which the vendor must supply, install and secure inside each closet unless adequate space is available on an existing rack. This must be confirmed with SJU personnel prior to bidding. Any new cabling (riser) must be installed in the

5




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 racks as configured by SJU personnel using cable management. New voice cables and risers must be mounted with voice 110s and be installed on plywood in the appropriate each closet.

2.14a

Riser/vertical cabling for data will be plenum-rated General Cable (or similar as approved by SJU personnel in advance) twenty four (24) strand hybrid indoor cable with 12 singlemode strands and 12 multimode 50 micron 10 gig compliant strands. This must be run between closets as follows: list routes and locations.

If hybrid cable in unavailable, you should include separate SM and MM cables to achieve the same result. Fiber must be installed to meet all manufacturer specifications and industry standards including the use of 1.25” innerduct (Endot Endocor IPR 125). As an alternative you may quote armored cable in accordance with manufacturer specs. The fibers must be terminated in a Hubbell (Part #FCR2U6SPNA) fiber termination panel/enclosure that the contractor must supply and install. The multimode fibers must be terminated using Hubbell SC connectors (Part

#FCSCMQ12). The single mode fibers must be terminated using Hubbell SC connectors (Part

#FCSCSQ12). The enclosures must be installed in the racks as configured using adapter panels

Part # FSPSCD6 using blue for Multimode and using a different color for Single mode (e.g yellow part# FSPSCDY6). (Note that color schemes should be confirmed with SJU personnel before ordering. Enclosures must be labeled according to University specifications at each end.

All fibers must be terminated to meet all manufacturer specifications and standards. You may assume that the University will supply and install fiber jumpers to connect switches to fiber terminations. Other than this, your installations must provide a turnkey solution between the

‘closets’ as defined.

2.14b

Riser cable for voice must be installed as follows:

List routes and locations

to support current and potential voice requirements for horizontal runs. The vendor will install a

200 pair CAT 3 General Cable plenum- rated riser copper cable between the closets as defined.

You must supply all blocks and perform all punch downs at each end on 110 blocks. All station cables must be punched on vendor-supplied 110s in each applicable IDF for horizontal cable runs. You must install all riser cables into the MDF and terminate these on 110 blocks on the wall. 110s in the IDFs must be mounted on plywood. Cross connects to horizontal cabling to deliver dial tone will be handled by SJU personnel.

2.15

Supply, or move and install voice, data, and coax station cables to each location as defined on the blueprint or as described. We typically use appropriate Hubbell Office White plates as needed. For example you may use two-port plate (Part #IFP12OW) for each 2 port requirement, a #IFP14OW for each 4 port plate requirement etc. You should confirm colors prior to installation.

2.16

All horizontal and vertical cabling must be installed/re-installed with sufficient service loops as defined in manufacturer instructions and industry standards.

2.17

All modules will be color coded by type (voice or data). Any wall mounted (non-surface mounted) plates or jacks must be securely affixed to the wall with a bolt or similar hardware.

2.18

Any requirements for raceway beyond that previously defined or discussed, must be communicated to University personnel immediately.

3.19

We require an alternating scheme or patch panels and switches in racks. See SJU personnel for examples and direction.

6




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

2.20

The University requires that all horizontal cables be bundled neatly together and securely attached to ceilings using cable management rings or ties as described earlier. Your proposal should include supplying all cable management materials and labor for installation.

2.21

Typically we require alternating installations of switches and patch panels on data racks.

Hubbell wire management is not generally used, and only if specifically requested by SJU personnel you may be asked to supply and install model #HC119CE1N to secure and manage cables according to manufacturer specifications. Provide cable bend radius guides for all transitions to cable trays, racks, racking etc. The vendor will use all efforts to supply a professional and dressed appearance of all voice and data cabling. This will include use of appropriate cable rings, brackets, support bars, wire managers, tie wraps, and other unspecified cable management products to assure cable integrity and efficiency.

2.22

Labels will be electronically generated and not handwritten. Labels must be permanently affixed to jacks and at patch panels. Voice jacks and corresponding 110 and 66 blocks must be similarly labeled for easy identification.

2.23

All cable label documentation will be provided to the University electronically as an asbuilt print/diagram or an Excel worksheet. In addition, two hard-bound copies of all documentation must be provided. As-built drawings of cable routes must also be provided.

2.24

Test results must be submitted to the University as an Excel or other readable file format on a CD or may be emailed.

2.25

You must manage all necessary demolition of voice, data, CATV cabling in the area as defined on the prints. Some old cabling may be retained and must be protected/re-terminated after renovations. Some old abandoned cables and hardware in the renovated spaces will no longer be used. Include in your proposal the removal and disposal of all existing cables and jacks throughout the work areas defined by the project except those to be demolished by another contractor. Please verify that cables are not terminated on a patch panel before demolition. The vendor will be responsible for demolition of all cables back to the patch panel/voice blocks and removed. Demolition must be coordinated to confirm that all cables are removed and all unused connections are eliminated, while documenting and maintaining necessary services during the cabling project. The intent of the demo work is to completely remove older replaced cables and hardware while maintaining retained services. Blank plates must be installed over all remaining abandoned jacks so that no old voice or data connections are visible throughout the work areas.

Wherever possible and as indicated on the prints, we want old raceway, wall mount boxes or other hardware removed as well. All removed, cut, or otherwise decommissioned cables must be removed from the appropriate patch panel/voice 110 block. Please note any exceptions.

Replacement boxes in the rooms must completely cover holes or other blemishes. If coverage is not possible, you must discuss this with University personnel to gain approval to reuse the existing hardware or for use of contractors to supply patching and painting.

2.26

The vendor must provide an itemized list of equipment and projected labor hours (with separate optional work requirements) to complete the above defined work requirements.

2.27

The vendor must confirm that pricing will be held firm as quoted through the installation.

2.28

The vendor will be responsible for establishing all pathways, coreholes, sleeves, etc and for firestopping etc. as needed for the efficient deployment of cables. The vendor is responsible for the coordination of all cabling pathways with the GC and other trades. The vendor will be responsible for subcontracting to a qualified electrician to supply work as needed except for work confirmed to be included under another contractor’s scope of work. It is expected that you would use the contractor working on site. Please confirm with general contractor personnel any

7




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 work that has already been assigned to another subcontractor’s scope including demolition and pullstring installation.

2.29

Note that blueprints are to be used as a guide to the building and used for jack locations and counts. You should reference the prints for locations and a description of layout. Counts by drop type including ‘Spare’ locations (that are not included on the prints are provided below.

These must all be included in your pricing. The exact locations/counts will be provided on the prints except for the spares which should be priced assuming an average length/cost to install.

Verify that your cable/drop counts are consistent with those below. Should End Point count discrepancies exist between this specification and the Contract Drawings after award, the

Contractor/Cabling Contractor is responsible to notify Saint Joseph’s University personnel and to provide the greater of the two unless otherwise directed.

3.0 Provisions

Include cabling to all end points as defined in the Contract Documents/blueprints. The Work includes terminating all cables; installing all necessary hardware (blocks, ladder racks, supports, cable management, racks, trays, patch panels, jacks, etc.); labeling; and providing complete testing and schematic documentation as defined herein. Work in accordance with the

Construction Schedule as set forth, defined, managed and revised by the General Contractor.

Except for installation of cross connects for dial tone the cabling vendor is responsible for providing a complete turnkey installation for voice conveyance services. Except for installation of data network switches and the activation of data jacks, which will be managed by the

University (by patching stations from the patch panel to the switch), the Cabling Contractor is responsible for providing a complete and turnkey cabled solution. Except for connection to taps or similar TV/video distribution components, the Cabling Contractor is responsible for providing a complete and turnkey cabled solution. The Cabling Contractor is responsible for attending project meetings as necessary including the General Contractor, Subcontractors and the Owner in addition to coordinating the Work with the Construction Manager and General Contractor.

3.1

Drop types:

Q

D

ST

2D

3D

4D

6D

WAP

SW

CATV

1DC

2DC

SSD

AV

2 CAT 6 data, 1 CAT 5e voice split

1 CAT 6 data

1 CAT 5e voice (deskphone/fax)

2 CAT 6 data

3 CAT 6 data

4 CAT 6 data

6 CAT 6 data

1 CAT 6 data (WAP)

1 CAT 5e voice (wallphone)

1 RG6/or RG11 (distance dependent)

1 CAT 6 data (ceiling installed)


6 CAT 6 data, 1 CAT 5e voice in floor box or inside classroom sit/stand desk

6 CAT 6 data, 1CAT 5e voice at classroom rack location

TP

TV

1 CAT 6 data coiled in ceiling with patch cable to TP via conduit

1 CAT 6 data mounted for display screen and 1 CAT 6 data for control.

Security camera (icon) 1 RG 59 siamese cable, 1 CAT 6 data

8




EP

SA

FA

1 CAT 5e voice for emergency phone

1 CAT5e voice, 1CAT6 data for security/burglar panel

2 CAT5e voice, 1CAT6 data for fire panel

Dorm Drop (iconTBD) 2 CAT6 data, 1 CAT5e voice, 1 Coax for TV

Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

3.2

Based on IEEE standards, the maximum Cat5E, Cat6E cable length from Patch Panel to

Wall Jack is not to exceed 90 meters.

3.3 Drop Type Counts

Drop types as indicated on the Contract Drawings are defined as follows:

Type

Q

D

ST

2D

3D

4D

6D

WAP

SW

CATV

1DC

2DC

SSD

AV

TP

Description

2 CAT 6 data, 1 CAT 5e voice split

Quantity

1 CAT 6 data

1 CAT 5e voice (deskphone/fax)

2 CAT 6 data

3 CAT 6 data

4 CAT 6 data

6 CAT 6 data

1 CAT 6 data (WAP)

1 CAT 5e voice (wallphone)

1 RG6/or RG11 (distance dependent)



6 CAT 6 data, 1 CAT 5e voice in floor box or inside classroom sit/stand desk

6 CAT 6 data, 1CAT 5e voice at classroom rack location

1 CAT 6 data coiled in ceiling with patch cable to TP via conduit

TV 1 CAT 6 data mounted for display screen and 1 CAT 6 data for control.

Security camera (icon) 1 RG 59 siamese cable, 1 CAT 6 data

EP 1 CAT 5e voice for emergency phone

SA

FA

1 CAT5e voice, 1CAT^ data for security/burglar panel

2 CAT5e voice, 1CAT^ data for fire panel

Dorm Drop (iconTBD) 2 CAT6 data, 1 CAT5e voice, 1 Coax for TV

_______ Spare_____________

_______

_______

_______

Spare_____________

Spare_____________

Spare_____________

9




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

3.3b Notes: Add specific notes here.

3.3c The exact locations/counts are identified on the Contract Drawings. Contractor/Cabling

Contractor is required to confirm counts and report any discrepancies between Table 3.3 and the

Contract Drawings to the Owner prior to award. Should End Point count discrepancies exist between this specification and the Contract Drawings after award, the Contractor/Cabling

Contractor is responsible to provide the greater of the two. Assume an average run length for the counts indicated as “Spares” and provide a Unit Cost to furnish and install as indicated.

3.4 Notes regarding MDF / IDF Closet(s)

1.

The MDF and IDF(s) are is sized according to the prints or existing conditions. Note location(s) and whether sufficient rack space is available.

2.

Communications Racks, MDF: Provide and install quantity defined allowing approximately 3’ access clearances at each side(s).

3.

Communications Racks, IDF: Provide and install quantity defined allowing approximately 3’ access clearances at each side(s)

4.

Power circuits provisions for the racks in the MDF are to be on an emergency generator fed circuit. You must verify this with electrical contractor.

5.

Provide Power circuit for UPS. The UPS will be provided by SJU. Confirm this with electrical contractor and coordinate location.

6.

Include grounding system. (Ground bus bar mounted on wall for all required devices, cable, sheathing etc…Provide or confirm with electrical contractor.

7.

All MDF and IDF walls are to be covered with plywood to support required cabinets, blocks, cans, taps, panels, etc…. Provide or confirm with general contractor

8.

MDF/ADF may receive a wall mounted split 5 ton A/C system by Mechanical

Contractor. Confirm/ coordinate with electrical contractor for installation and location of associated power circuit. IDFs may just receive circulating exhaust air by Mechanical

Contractor. Confirm.

3.5 Communications Systems Backbone

Fiber There is a 24 strand single mode fiber optic cable from the 5800 main building

MDF to the Annex (Career Development Center). In the Annex, this is unterminated and coiled in the large first floor room closest to the main building. The Contractor is to uncoil and install this cable into the 2 nd

floor data closet and terminate all strands in a

Hubbell (Part #FCR350SP36R) fiber termination panel/enclosure that the contractor must supply and install. All singlemode fibers must be terminated using Hubbell SC connectors (Part #FCSCSQ12). The enclosures must be installed in a rack using adapter panels Part # FSPSCDY6). . As part of the overall installation, you must provide a new

84’ inch high 19’ rack which the vendor must supply, install and secure inside the closet.

The rack and enclosure for the main house are already installed. Enclosures must be

10




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 labeled according to University specifications at each end. All fibers must be terminated to meet all manufacturer specifications and standards. In the main building MDF, the cable is tipped but must be installed on adapter panels as noted above that you supply. All strands are to be tested. You may assume that the University will supply and install fiber jumpers to connect switches to fiber terminations. Other than this, your installations must provide a turnkey solution between the main building MDF and the Career Development data closet. You must perform all testing as required with results submitted to SJU.

Copper – There is a 100 pair Category 3 plenum rated outdoor copper cable from the

Annex to the main building MDF. It is fully terminated and extended to the MDF in the main building. In the Annex, this is coiled in the large first floor room closest to the main building. Contractor is to uncoil and install this cable into the 2 nd floor data closet and terminate. If this exceeds building code length for outdoor cable, terminate this at a specified location by the University on fully lightning-protected/fused cans (Circa 1880

ENA1/NSC-200 or similar) and then extend via inside 100 pair category 3 copper cable to 110 blocks in the 2 nd floor data closet. If fuse cans can be placed in the data closet by code, install and terminate there and provide pigtails to a 110 block and terminate in that same closet. Fully ground, fuse and test. Supply all necessary cable and cross connect cable management hardware and accessories. Provide all test results to SJU.

3.6 Security Systems

Include costs as follows:

1.

Card Access Readers – As indicated on the Contract Drawings - Strike and door control: Include one ¾” conduit to accessible ceiling space with a single gang box for single card readers (“CR” designation) and a ¾” conduit and double gang box for dual card readers (“CR2” designation) in locations as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

Verify quantities and locations (14 “CR” drops and 1 “CR2” drop) and report any discrepancies to the Owner prior to award. Provide a ¾” conduit from the door jamb to accessible ceiling space for strike and door contact (“SD” designation) control wiring.

Stanley Security, the University’s Security System provider, will furnish and install security systems including: card swipe readers and controllers, strike and door control, as well as intercom system components. Stanley will contract associated electrical work with the Electrical Contractor. The Electrical Contractor will provide the necessary conduits and raceways as required. The electrical contractor is to confirm locations of

Security System components with SJU prior to final placement.

•

Except for an alarm condition, no student access into the fire towers is allowed.

All doors will be locked from the corridor side and released at alarm condition only.

2.

Intercom – Provide a double gang box and one (1) ¾” conduit to accessible ceiling space in addition to a duplex power receptacle at each designated Intercom (I) location..

Verify four (4) “I” designations locations. See 1) above regarding Stanley Security.

3.

Reception Desk – (To be manned 24/7 during all occupancy periods) a.

Components to be installed in the Reception Desk:

11




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 i.

CCTV Monitor to be supplied by SJU. ii.

Intercom System iii.

Telephone to be supplied by SJU iv.

Data connections for network access v.

Card Access control point vi.

Remote Fire Alarm panel to be installed on the wall adjacent to the desk

4.

CCTV Cameras - The Electrical Contractor will provide a 1” conduit to support one

CAT 6 data cable and one RG59 video cable to each CCTV Camera location, including locations designated as “Future”. The voice/data cabling contractor is responsible for supplying the CAT 6 an RG 59 cabling according to the specifications. Verify quantity of fourteen (14) camera installations (including two (2) exterior outside Emergency

Phone pedestals) and ten (10) future camera locations.

•

Provide a DEDUCT ALTERNATE to furnish and install the CCTV system.

Costs are to include the furnishing and installation of cameras and associated equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and specifications. Include, Bosch FlexiDome 2X model VDN-498V03-21 for each

Camera location, interior and exterior. Use standard flush mounting on ceilings for indoor applications. Provide an install using a VDA-445WMT- Pendant Wall

Mount for the exterior wall application. Include DVRs in each of the two designated closets as follows; One (1) VICON Kollector Strike with Viconnect

V5 (KS1B-1000V5) in each of the two closets (1 st

floor MDF and 4 th

Floor South

IDF). Also include an Altronix 16 channel power supply (R2416ULCB) in each of the two closets. The DVR and the power supply must be rack mounted for convenient patching to coax and/or CAT 6 data connectivity. Confirm all equipment installation locations and configurations with SJU prior to final location. The Contractor is responsible for all installation and testing procedures for the cameras and DVRs, including the production of test results in accordance with SJU and all manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations.

5.

Emergency Phones –

(EPP) (“Talk-A-Phone” type).:

Exterior:

Two (2) exterior emergency phones pedestals must be installed. This requires trenching and conduit installation to support power and communications provisions as follows:

Install one (1) outside plant rated CAT5e for voice and one (1) outside plant rated

CAT6 for data for security camera. SJU will supply a twisted pair receiver that converts to coax for connection to dvr. Confirm that electrical contractor is supplying power (with step down transformer ayt the phone location.

Supply and install a Talk-A-Phone’s ETP-MT/R OP5 Emergency Phone Tower which includes an integrated AD Delta Dome PTZ camera and a Model ETP 400

Emergency Phone in the pedestal. All work must confirm with the manufacturer’s

12




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 and SJU specifications and recommendations. Provide a turnkey installation with the exception of the cross connections for dialtone provided by SJU.

Interior:

In each of the two elevator cabs, furnish a “Talk-A-Phone” ETP-103 OEM

Emergency Phone in accordance with the manufacturer’s and SJU specifications and recommendations. COORDINATE INSTALLATION AND PROVISIONS FOR

ETP-103 OEM WITH THE ELEVATOR CONTRACTOR. Locations are reflected on the Contract Drawings: one outside main entrance vicinity and One in Plaza vicinity. Provide one (1) CAT 5e for voice to each.

Emergency Phones/Red Phones (Non “Talk-A-Phone” type/red phones).

Provide all necessary wiring (one CAT 5e for voice), connectors and terminations.

Phone sets, dialtones and autodial programming will be provided by SJU.

6.

Fire Alarm – The electrical contractor or the University’s vendor will be responsible to provide a complete fire alarm system for the building as defined in the Contract

Documents.

7.

Security Alarm – The Security Systems contractor will be responsible to provide a complete security/burglar alarm system for the room/building as defined in the contract documents.

8.

Door Monitoring - Security desk has the capability to monitor specific doors for open/closed status. Provide hardware and cabling as defined by SJU personnel to accommodate this requirement.

9.

Annual Maintenance – Provide a line item costs for annual maintenance to support all equipment included in the scope of work encompassing your contract. (Cameras,

DVRs, Emergency Phones, Security System, and other, etc.). The SJU standard assumes a one hour remote access response time for outage conditions and a two hour on-site response time for unresolved outages. Confirm 24X7 support.

END


13



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

SECTION 28 30 00 - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS

ADDRESSABLE HORN

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCE

A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. All work required is not limited to this section.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide labor, material, equipment and supervision necessary to install a complete electrically supervised microprocessor based, fully addressable type system as outlined in this section.

B. Equipment by Silent Knight.

C. It is the intent of this specification and accompanying drawings to require the contractor and/or supplier of equipment and devices to provide a complete code compliant system which will obtain, as a minimum, the approval of the AHJ. Different suppliers may have devices which differ between each other and as such all devices necessary for approval shall be included in the scope of work whether specifically identified or not.

D. Horns shall be audible as required by code in all spaces above ambient.

Devices provided by manufacturers shall be selected to provide audibility with either additional horns or higher dB devices as necessary to achieve such approval.

E. Strobes shall be visible as required by code in all spaces to meet requirements of the AHJ.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish shop drawings and/or descriptive data, complete with the following:

1. Fire Alarm Control Unit

2. Smoke Detectors

3. Signals

4. Annunciator

FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEM 283000 - 1



Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

5. Stations

6. Fire Alarm Riser Diagram drawn specifically for this project with devices identified, room designations, and conductor runs.

7. Telephone auto dialer

8. Floor plans (to same scale as architectural/engineering plan) indicating all equipment locations.

B. Submit drawings to the local authority for permit and approval. Submit approved drawings to consulting engineers and to owner’s insurance company and obtain approval prior to construction. All requirements for above approval are to be included with the work.

1.04 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM

A. Control of System: By the FACP.

B. System Supervision: Automatically detect and report open circuits, shorts, and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notification-appliance circuits.

C. Priority of Signals: Automatic alarm response functions resulting from an alarm signal from one zone or device are not altered by subsequent alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals. An alarm signal is the highest priority.

Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and third-level priority.

Higher-priority signals take precedence over signals of lower priority, even when the lower-priority condition occurs first. Annunciate and display all alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals regardless of priority or order received.

D. Noninterference: A signal on one zone shall not prevent the receipt of signals from other zones.

E. System Reset: All zones are manually resettable from the FACP after initiating devices are restored to normal.

F. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically route alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station by means of a digital alarm communicator transmitter and telephone lines.

G. System Alarm Capability during Circuit Fault Conditions: System wiring and circuit arrangement prevent alarm capability reduction when an open circuit, ground or wire-to-wire short occurs, or an open circuit and a ground occur at the same time in an initiating device circuit, signal line circuit, or notification-appliance circuit.

H. Loss of primary power at the FACP initiates a trouble signal at the FACP and the annunciator. An emergency power light is illuminated at both




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

I. locations when the system is operating on the secondary power supply.

Basic Alarm Performance Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, operation of a manual station, automatic alarm operation of a smoke or flame or heat detector, or operation of a sprinkler flow device initiates the following:

1. Notification-appliance operation (exterior bell/strobe only operates with sprinkler flow devices).

2. Identification at the FACP and the remote annunciator of the device originating the alarm.

3. Transmission of an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.

4. Unlocking of electric door locks in designated egress paths.

5. Release of fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.

6. Shutdown of fans and other air-handling equipment serving zone when alarm was initiated.

7. Closing of smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving zone where alarm was initiated.

8. Recording of the event in the system memory.

J. Alarm Silencing, System Reset and Indication: Controlled by switches in the FACP (and the remote annunciator).

1. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activates an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained.

2. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification appliances until silencing switch is operated again.

3. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated, notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.

K. Smoke detection for zones or detectors with alarm verification initiates the following:

1. Audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the

FACP.

2. General alarm if the alarm is verified.

3. Cancellation of the FACP indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

L. Remote Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Manipulation of controls at the

FACP causes the selection of specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display of their current status and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings. Same controls can be used to




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015 program repetitive, scheduled, automated changes in sensitivity of specific detectors. Sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes are recorded in system memory and are printed out by the system printer.

M. Removal of an alarm-initiating device or a notification appliance initiates the following:

1. A "trouble" signal indication at the FACP and the annunciator for the device or zone involved.

2. Transmission of trouble signal to remote alarm receiving station.

N. FACP Alphanumeric Display: Plain-English-language descriptions of alarm, supervisory, and trouble events; and addresses and locations of alarm-initiating or supervisory devices originating the report. Display monitoring actions, system and component status, system commands, programming information, and data from the system's historical memory.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONTROL PANEL

A. Fire Alarm Panel shall be surface mounted where shown on the drawings, with the following items.

UL Listed

Modular, Solid-state

Addressable locations of all devices

Zoned Visual Alarm and Trouble Indicators

Automatic Ground Detection

Lamp Test

Supervisory Voltage and Current Meters

Double Supervision

Field Programmable Fan Relays

Supervise Signal Circuit Modules

Annunciator Contacts by Zone

Dead Front Construction

Battery backup

2.02 SMOKE DETECTORS




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings UL listed smoke detectors. Detector shall be solid state photoelectric type and shall operate on the light scattering, photo diode principle. Detector shall have an integral fixed temperature heat detector rated at 135 degrees F.

B. Detector shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at the

FACP for calibration, sensitivity and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.

2.03 HORN/STROBE

A. Combination device with factory integrated audible and visible devices in a single mounting assembly. Horn shall be electric vibrating polarized type which produces 90 dB measured 10 feet from the horn. Strobe shall be self-synchronizing, Xenon strobe lights with clear lens and rated light output of 15, 30, 60, 75 or 110 candela.

2.04 STROBE

A. Self-synchronizing, flush wall mounted, red housing, white letters, UL 1638 and UL 1971 compliant 15, 30, 60, 75 or 110 candela as appropriate, mounted on single gang box, clear Lexan flash tube enclosure.

2.05 FIRE ALARM STATIONS

A. Fire Alarm Stations shall be semi-flush mounted, non-code break glass type, finish shall be red with white letters.

B. Stations shall be addressable.

2.06 HEAT DETECTORS

A. Heat Detectors, furnished and installed where indicated on the drawings, shall be combination type, actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 degrees F or rate of rise of temperature that exceeds 15 degrees F per minute.

B. Detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at the

FACP for calibration, sensitivity and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

2.07 REMOTE DEVICE LOCATION-INDICATING LIGHTS AND IDENTIFICATION

PLATES

A. Device shall contain LED indicating light near each smoke detector that may not be readily visible, and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch. Light is connected to flash when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is flush mounted in a single gang wall plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification plate at the indicating light identified, in engraved white letters, device initiating the signal and room where the smoke detector or valve is located. For water-flow switches, the identification plate also designates protected spaces downstream from the water-flow switch.

2.08 TELEPHONE AUTO DIALER

A. Furnish and install where indicated on the drawings or required elsewhere in the specifications a digital type telephone auto dialer. The dialer shall call and notify a preprogrammed telephone number when in the alarm mode.

2.09 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Device shall be Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a multiplex system address for listed fire and sprinkler alarm-initiating devices with normally open contacts.

B. Integral Relay shall be capable of providing a direct signal to the elevator controller to initiate elevator recall or to a circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.

2.10 ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: Duplicate annunciator functions of the FACP for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Also duplicate manual switching functions of the FACP, including acknowledging, silencing, reset, and test mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Class 1.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display same as the FACP. Controls with associated LEDs permit acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals identical to those in the FACP.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SYSTEM OPERATION

A. Operation of any manual or automatic device shall cause all signals and strobes to sound. The annunciator will light showing the specific location of the alarm initiation. Control and contacts for the building system shall function as required. Door hold opens shall be released. Door locks will be opened.

3.02 WIRING

A. All wiring shall be run in conduit in exposed areas or Fire Alarm MC Cable in concealed spaces and shall be installed as recommended by the system manufacturer. Provide deduct alternate for use of type FPLP plenum rated fire alarm cable.

B. Initiating device circuits are to be Class B (2 wire using NO contact initiating devices and an end of line resistor).

C. Notification appliance circuits shall have polarized devices wired in parallel and be equipped an end of line resistor.

3.03 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Smoke detectors indicated on the drawings shall be located in the occupied space. A similar device layout shall be duplicated above suspended ceilings and/or below raised floors as outlined in NFPA 72 for return air plenums.

B. Connect the FACP with a disconnect switch with lockable handle or cover.

Provide circuit label as per NFPA 72 requirements.

C. Manual Pull Stations: Mount semi-flush in recessed back boxes.

D. Ceiling-Mounted Smoke Detectors: Not less than 4 inches (100 mm) from a side wall to the near edge. For exposed solid-joist construction, mount detectors on the bottom of joists. On smooth ceilings, install not more than 30 feet (9 m) apart in any direction.

E. Wall-Mounted Smoke Detectors: At least, 4 inches (100 mm), but not more than, 12 inches (300 mm) below the ceiling.




Project #177901981

Bid Documents

January 30, 2015

F. Smoke Detectors near Air Registers: Install no closer than 60 inches

(1520 mm).

G. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

H. FACP and Auxiliary Booster Panels: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor. Provide smoke detection for room in which the panel is located.

I. Annunciator: Install with the top of the panel not more than 72 inches

(1830 mm) above the finished floor.

J. Provide separate zone for each floor, not to exceed 20,000 sq. ft., length not to exceed 200 ft. in any direction.

K. Provide where indicated on drawings, 15 cd horn/strobes or strobes in non-sleeping rooms up to 20' x 20'. Provide 30 cd horn/strobes or strobes in non-sleeping rooms up to 30' x 30'. Provide 110 cd in all other spaces where indicated on drawings.

3.04 SERVICE

A. A service contract shall be made available to the owner after the one year warranty expires.

B. A complete set of reproducible as-builts, showing installed wiring and color coding and wire tag notations for exact locations of all installed equipment, specific interconnections between all equipment shall be provided for the system.

3.05 TESTING

A. Perform test of system according to procedures outlined in NFPA 72.

Correct deficiencies as necessary. Provide written record of inspections, tests and test results in the form of a test log.

END OF SECTION


Volume 3

Related documents

Add this document to collection(s)

Add this document to saved

Suggest us how to improve StudyLib